Major Pharmaceuticals

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

Major Pharmaceuticals Drugs

Major Hypertonicity Oph...

Major Hypertonicity Ophthalmic

Distributed by:

MAJOR PHARMACEUTICALS

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150 USA

Made in Korea
Major Eye Wash

Major Eye Wash

DISTRIBUTED BY

MAJOR PHARMACEUTICALS

31778 ENTERPRISE DRIVE

LIVONIA, MI 48150 USA

Made in Korea
Major Liquitears

Major Liquitears

Distributed by:

Major Pharmaceuticals

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150 USA

Made in Korea
Major Natural Balance

Major Natural Balance

Distributed by:

Major Pharmaceuticals

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150 USA

Made in Korea
Major Hypertonicity Oph...

Major Hypertonicity Ophthalmic

Distributed by

MAJOR PHARMACEUTICALS

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150

Made in Korea
Major Lubrifresh Pm

Major Lubrifresh Pm

Distributed by:

MAJOR PHARMACEUTICALS

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150

Made in Korea
Aripiprazole

Aripiprazole

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

The recommended starting and target dose for aripiprazole is 10 or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. Aripiprazole has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either aripiprazole tablets 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

Adolescents

The recommended target dose of aripiprazole tablets is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. Aripiprazole tablets can be administered without regard to meals [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to aripiprazole or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. Aripiprazole tablets can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of aripiprazole tablets is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. Aripiprazole tablets can be given without regard to meals [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.2)].

Additional pediatric use information is approved for Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.'s ABILIFY® (aripiprazole) product. However, due to Otsuka America Pharmaceutical, Inc.'s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.7 Dosage Adjustments for Cytochrome P450 Considerations

Dosage adjustments are recommended in patients who are known CYP2D6 poor metabolizers and in patients taking concomitant CYP3A4 inhibitors or CYP2D6 inhibitors or strong CYP3A4 inducers (see Table 1). When the coadministered drug is withdrawn from the combination therapy, aripiprazole dosage should then be adjusted to its original level. When the coadministered CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn, aripiprazole dosage should be reduced to the original level over 1 to 2 weeks. Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (e.g., a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response.

Table 1: Dose Adjustments for Aripiprazole in Patients who are known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers and Patients Taking Concomitant CYP2D6 Inhibitors, 3A4 Inhibitors, and/or CYP3A4 Inducers

Factors

Dosage Adjustments for Aripiprazole

Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers

Administer half of usual dose
Known CYP2D6 Poor Metabolizers taking concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., itraconazole, clarithromycin) Administer a quarter of usual dose Strong CYP2D6 (e.g., quinidine, fluoxetine, paroxetine) or CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g.,itraconazole, clarithromycin) Administer half of usual dose Strong CYP2D6 and CYP3A4 inhibitors Administer a quarter of usual dose
Strong CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., carbamazepine, rifampin)

Double usual dose over 1 to 2 weeks

2.8 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Memantine

Memantine

The recommended starting dose of memantine hydrochloride is 5 mg once daily. The dose should be increased in 5 mg increments to 10 mg/day (5 mg twice daily), 15 mg/day (5 mg and 10 mg as separate doses), and 20 mg/day (10 mg twice daily). The minimum recommended interval between dose increases is one week. The dosage shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials is 20 mg/day.

Memantine hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food. If a patient misses a single dose of memantine hydrochloride, that patient should not double up on the next dose. The next dose should be taken as scheduled. If a patient fails to take memantine hydrochloride for several days, dosing may need to be resumed at lower doses and retitrated as described above.

Special Populations

Renal Impairment

A target dose of 5 mg twice daily is recommended in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 5 to 29 mL/min based on the Cockroft-Gault equation).

Hepatic Impairment

Memantine hydrochloride should be administered with caution to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Baclofen

Baclofen

The determination of optimal dosage requires individual titration. Start therapy at a low dosage and increase gradually until optimum effect is achieved (usually between 40 to 80 mg daily).

The following dosage titration schedule is suggested:

5 mg t.i.d. for 3 days 10 mg t.i.d. for 3 days 15 mg t.i.d. for 3 days 20 mg t.i.d. for 3 days

Thereafter additional increases may be necessary but the total daily dose should not exceed a maximum of 80 mg daily (20 mg q.i.d.).

The lowest dose compatible with an optimal response is recommended. If benefits are not evident after a reasonable trial period, patients should be slowly withdrawn from the drug (see WARNINGS, Abrupt Drug Withdrawal).
Celecoxib

Celecoxib

Use lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals for the individual patient.

These doses can be given without regard to timing of meals.

2.1 Osteoarthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of OA the recommended oral dose is 200 mg per day administered as a single dose or as 100 mg twice daily.

2.2 Rheumatoid Arthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of RA the recommended oral dose is 100 to 200 mg twice daily.

2.3 Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of JRA the recommended oral dose for pediatric patients (age 2 years and older) is based on weight. For patients ≥10 kg to ≤25 kg the recommended dose is 50 mg twice daily. For patients >25 kg the recommended dose is 100 mg twice daily.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of a celecoxib capsule can be added to applesauce. The entire capsule contents are carefully emptied onto a level teaspoon of cool or room temperature applesauce and ingested immediately with water. The sprinkled capsule contents on applesauce are stable for up to 6 hours under refrigerated conditions (2 to 8° C/ 35 to 45° F).

2.4 Ankylosing Spondylitis

For the management of the signs and symptoms of AS, the recommended dose of celecoxib capsules is 200 mg daily in single (once per day) or divided (twice per day) doses. If no effect is observed after 6 weeks, a trial of 400 mg daily may be worthwhile. If no effect is observed after 6 weeks on 400 mg daily, a response is not likely and consideration should be given to alternate treatment options.

2.5 Management of Acute Pain and Treatment of Primary Dysmenorrhea

The recommended dose of celecoxib capsules is 400 mg initially, followed by an additional 200 mg dose if needed on the first day. On subsequent days, the recommended dose is 200 mg twice daily as needed.

2.6 Special Populations

Hepatic insufficiency: The daily recommended dose of celecoxib capsules in patients with moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class B) should be reduced by 50%. The use of celecoxib capsules in patients with severe hepatic impairment is not recommended [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5), Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Poor Metabolizers of CYP2C9 Substrates: Patients who are known or suspected to be poor CYP2C9 metabolizers based on genotype or previous history/experience with other CYP2C9 substrates (such as warfarin, phenytoin) should be administered celecoxib with caution. Consider starting treatment at half the lowest recommended dose in poor metabolizers (i.e. CYP2C9*3/*3). Consider using alternative management in JRA patients who are poor metabolizers. [see Use in Specific populations (8.8), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)].
Fluconazole

Fluconazole

Dosage and Administration in Adults

Single Dose

Vaginal candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for vaginal candidiasis is 150 mg as a single oral dose.

Multiple Dose

SINCE ORAL ABSORPTION IS RAPID AND ALMOST COMPLETE, THE DAILY DOSE OF FLUCONAZOLE IS THE SAME FOR ORAL AND INTRAVENOUS ADMINISTRATION. In general, a loading dose of twice the daily dose is recommended on the first day of therapy to result in plasma concentrations close to steady-state by the second day of therapy.

The daily dose of fluconazole for the treatment of infections other than vaginal candidiasis should be based on the infecting organism and the patient’s response to therapy. Treatment should be continued until clinical parameters or laboratory tests indicate that active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection. Patients with AIDS and cryptococcal meningitis or recurrent oropharyngeal candidiasis usually require maintenance therapy to prevent relapse.

Oropharyngeal candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for oropharyngeal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Clinical evidence of oropharyngeal candidiasis generally resolves within several days, but treatment should be continued for at least 2 weeks to decrease the likelihood of relapse.

Esophageal candidiasis: The recommended dosage of fluconazole for esophageal candidiasis is 200 mg on the first day, followed by 100 mg once daily. Doses up to 400 mg/day may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. Patients with esophageal candidiasis should be treated for a minimum of three weeks and for at least two weeks following resolution of symptoms.

Systemic Candida infections: For systemic Candida infections including candidemia, disseminated candidiasis, and pneumonia, optimal therapeutic dosage and duration of therapy have not been established. In open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients, doses of up to 400 mg daily have been used.

Urinary tract infections and peritonitis: For the treatment of Candida urinary tract infections and peritonitis, daily doses of 50 to 200 mg have been used in open, noncomparative studies of small numbers of patients.

Cryptococcal meningitis: The recommended dosage for treatment of acute cryptococcal meningitis is 400 mg on the first day, followed by 200 mg once daily. A dosage of 400 mg once daily may be used, based on medical judgment of the patient’s response to therapy. The recommended duration of treatment for initial therapy of cryptococcal meningitis is 10 to 12 weeks after the cerebrospinal fluid becomes culture negative. The recommended dosage of fluconazole for suppression of relapse of cryptococcal meningitis in patients with AIDS is 200 mg once daily.

Prophylaxis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation: The recommended fluconazole daily dosage for the prevention of candidiasis in patients undergoing bone marrow transplantation is 400 mg, once daily. Patients who are anticipated to have severe granulocytopenia (less than 500 neutrophils per cu mm) should start fluconazole prophylaxis several days before the anticipated onset of neutropenia, and continue for 7 days after the neutrophil count rises above 1000 cells per cu mm.

Dosage and Administration in Children

The following dose equivalency scheme should generally provide equivalent exposure in pediatric and adult patients:
Pediatric Patients Adults * Some older children may have clearances similar to that of adults. Absolute doses exceeding 600 mg/day are not recommended. 3 mg/kg 100 mg 6 mg/kg 200 mg 12* mg/kg 400 mg
Experience with fluconazole in neonates is limited to pharmacokinetic studies in premature newborns. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.) Based on the prolonged half-life seen in premature newborns (gestational age 26 to 29 weeks), these children, in the first two weeks of life, should receive the same dosage (mg/kg) as in older children, but administered every 72 hours. After the first two weeks, these children should be dosed once daily. No information regarding fluconazole pharmacokinetics in full-term newborns is available.

Dosage in Patients With Impaired Renal Function

Fluconazole is cleared primarily by renal excretion as unchanged drug. There is no need to adjust single dose therapy for vaginal candidiasis because of impaired renal function. In patients with impaired renal function who will receive multiple doses of fluconazole, an initial loading dose of 50 to 400 mg should be given. After the loading dose, the daily dose (according to indication) should be based on the following table:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Percent of Recommended Dose > 50 100% ≤ 50 (no dialysis) 50% Regular dialysis 100% after each dialysis
These are suggested dose adjustments based on pharmacokinetics following administration of multiple doses. Further adjustment may be needed depending upon clinical condition.

When serum creatinine is the only measure of renal function available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) should be used to estimate the creatinine clearance in adults:

Males: Weight (kg) × (140-age) 72 × serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

Females: 0.85 × above value

Although the pharmacokinetics of fluconazole has not been studied in children with renal insufficiency, dosage reduction in children with renal insufficiency should parallel that recommended for adults. The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in children:

K × linear length or height (cm) serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)(Where K=0.55 for children older than 1 year and 0.45 for infants.)

Administration

Fluconazole tablets are administered orally. Fluconazole tablets can be taken with or without food.
Lisinopril

Lisinopril

2.1 Hypertension

Initial Therapy in adults: The recommended initial dose is 10 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 20 mg to 40 mg per day administered in a single daily dose. Doses up to 80 mg have been used but do not appear to give greater effect.

Use with diuretics in adults

If blood pressure is not controlled with lisinopril tablets alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added (e.g., hydrochlorothiazide, 12.5 mg). After the addition of a diuretic, it may be possible to reduce the dose of lisinopril tablets.

The recommended starting dose in adult patients with hypertension taking diuretics is 5 mg once per day.

Pediatric Patients 6 years of age and older with hypertension

For pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate > 30 mL/min/1.73m2, the recommended starting dose is 0.07 mg per kg once daily (up to 5 mg total). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response up to a maximum of 0.61 mg per kg (up to 40 mg) once daily. Doses above 0.61 mg per kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lisinopril tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate < 30 mL/min/1.73m2 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)and Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose for lisinopril tablets, when used with diuretics and (usually) digitalis as adjunctive therapy for systolic heart failure, is 5 mg once daily. The recommended starting dose in these patients with hyponatremia (serum sodium < 130 mEq/L) is 2.5 mg once daily. Increase as tolerated to a maximum of 40 mg once daily.

Diuretic dose may need to be adjusted to help minimize hypovolemia, which may contribute to hypotension [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4), and Drug Interactions (7.1)]. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of lisinopril tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

2.3 Reduction of Mortality in Acute Myocardial Infarction

In hemodynamically stable patients within 24 hours of the onset of symptoms of acute myocardial infarction, give lisinopril tablets 5 mg orally, followed by 5 mg after 24 hours, 10 mg after 48 hours and then 10 mg once daily. Dosing should continue for at least six weeks.

Initiate therapy with 2.5 mg in patients with a low systolic blood pressure (≤ 120 mmHg and > 100 mm Hg) during the first 3 days after the infarct [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)]. If hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure ≤ 100 mmHg) a daily maintenance dose of 5 mg may be given with temporary reductions to 2.5 mg if needed. If prolonged hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure < 90 mmHg for more than 1 hour) lisinopril tablets should be withdrawn.

2.4 Dose in Patients with Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment of lisinopril tablets is required in patients with creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min. In patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 10 mL/min and ≤ 30 mL/min, reduce the initial dose of lisinopril tablets to half of the usual recommended dose i.e., hypertension, 5 mg; systolic heart failure, 2.5 mg and acute MI, 2.5 mg. Up titrate as tolerated to a maximum of 40 mg daily. For patients on hemodialysis or creatinine clearance < 10 mL/min, the recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg once daily [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Senna

Senna

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Pantoprazole Sodium

Pantoprazole Sodium

2.1 Recommended Dosing Schedule

Pantoprazole sodium is supplied as delayed-release tablets. The recommended dosages are outlined in Table 1.
Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets
* For adult patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8-week course of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets may be considered.

** Dosage regimens should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 240 mg daily have been administered.
Indication Dose Frequency Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis Associated With GERD Adults 40 mg Once daily for up to 8 weeks* Children (5 years and older) ≥ 15 kg to < 40 kg ≥ 40 kg 20 mg 40 mg Once daily for up to 8 weeks Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis Adults 40 mg Once daily Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome Adults 40 mg Twice daily**
2.2 Administration Instructions

Directions for method of administration are presented in Table 2.
Table 2: Administration Instructions * Patients should be cautioned that pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets should not be split, chewed, or crushed. Formulation Route Instructions* Delayed-Release Tablets Oral Swallowed whole, with or without food
Pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets

Pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets should be swallowed whole, with or without food in the stomach. If patients are unable to swallow a 40 mg tablet, two 20 mg tablets may be taken. Concomitant administration of antacids does not affect the absorption of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets.
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride

Oxycodone hydrochloride tablets are intended for the management of moderate to severe pain in patients who require treatment with an oral opioid analgesic. The dose should be individually adjusted according to severity of pain, patient response and patient size. If the pain increases in severity, if analgesia is not adequate, or if tolerance occurs, a gradual increase in dosage may be required.

Patients who have not been receiving opioid analgesics should be started on oxycodone hydrochloride tablets in a dosing range of 5 to 15 mg every 4 to 6 hours as needed for pain. The dose should be titrated based upon the individual patient's response to their initial dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets. Patients with chronic pain should have their dosage given on an around-the-clock basis to prevent the reoccurrence of pain rather than treating the pain after it has occurred. This dose can then be adjusted to an acceptable level of analgesia taking into account side effects experienced by the patient.

For control of severe chronic pain, oxycodone hydrochloride tablets should be administered on a regularly scheduled basis, every 4-6 hours, at the lowest dosage level that will achieve adequate analgesia.

As with any potent opioid, it is critical to adjust the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience. Although it is not possible to list every condition that is important to the selection of the initial dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets, attention should be given to: 1) the daily dose, potency, and characteristics of a pure agonist or mixed agonist/antagonist the patient has been taking previously, 2) the reliability of the relative potency estimate to calculate the dose of oxycodone needed, 3) the degree of opioid tolerance, 4) the general condition and medical status of the patient, and 5) the balance between pain control and adverse experiences.

Conversion From Fixed-Ratio Opioid/Acetaminophen, Opioid/Aspirin, or Opioid/Nonsteroidal Combination Drugs:

When converting patients from fixed ratio opioid/non-opioid drug regimens a decision should be made whether or not to continue the non-opioid analgesic. If a decision is made to discontinue the use of non-opioid analgesic, it may be necessary to titrate the dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets in response to the level of analgesia and adverse effects afforded by the dosing regimen. If the non-opioid regimen is continued as a separate single entity agent, the starting dose oxycodone hydrochloride tablets should be based upon the most recent dose of opioid as a baseline for further titration of oxycodone. Incremental increases should be gauged according to side effects to an acceptable level of analgesia.

Patients Currently on Opioid Therapy:

If a patient has been receiving opioid-containing medications prior to taking oxycodone hydrochloride tablets, the potency of the prior opioid relative to oxycodone should be factored into the selection of the total daily dose (TDD) of oxycodone.

In converting patients from other opioids to oxycodone hydrochloride tablets close observation and adjustment of dosage based upon the patient's response to oxycodone hydrochloride tablets is imperative. Administration of supplemental analgesia for breakthrough or incident pain and titration of the total daily dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets may be necessary, especially in patients who have disease states that are changing rapidly.

Maintenance of Therapy:

Continual re-evaluation of the patient receiving oxycodone hydrochloride tablets is important, with special attention to the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of side effects associated with therapy. If the level of pain increases, effort should be made to identify the source of increased pain, while adjusting the dose as described above to decrease the level of pain.

During chronic therapy, especially for non-cancer-related pain (or pain associated with other terminal illnesses), the continued need for the use of opioid analgesics should be re-assessed as appropriate.

Cessation of Therapy:

When a patient no longer requires therapy with oxycodone hydrochloride tablets or other opioid analgesics for the treatment of their pain, it is important that therapy be gradually discontinued over time to prevent the development of an opioid abstinence syndrome (narcotic withdrawal). In general, therapy can be decreased by 25% to 50% per day with careful monitoring for signs and symptoms of withdrawal (see DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE section for description of the signs and symptoms of withdrawal). If the patient develops these signs or symptoms, the dose should be raised to the previous level and titrated down more slowly, either by increasing the interval between decreases, decreasing the amount of change in dose, or both. It is not known at what dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets that treatment may be discontinued without risk of the opioid abstinence syndrome.
Allegra Allergy

Allegra Allergy

Omeprazole delayed-release capsules should be taken before eating. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with omeprazole.

Patients should be informed that the omeprazole delayed-release capsule should be swallowed whole.

For patients unable to swallow an intact capsule, alternative administration options are available [See Dosage and Administration (2.8)].

2.1 Short-Term Treatment of Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose of omeprazole delayed-release capsules is 20 mg once daily. Most patients heal within four weeks. Some patients may require an additional four weeks of therapy.

2.2 H. pylori Eradication for the Reduction of the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin/amoxicillin) The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg plus clarithromycin 500 mg plus amoxicillin 1000 mg each given twice daily for 10 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin) The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 40 mg once daily plus clarithromycin 500 mg three times daily for 14 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 14 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

2.3 Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose is 40 mg once daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.4 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with symptomatic GERD and no esophageal lesions is 20 mg daily for up to 4 weeks. The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with erosive esophagitis and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 mg daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.5 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg daily [See Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.6 Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions

The dosage of omeprazole delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 120 mg three times daily have been administered. Daily dosages of greater than 80 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with omeprazole delayed-release capsules for more than 5 years.

2.7 Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of GERD and maintenance of healing of erosive esophagitis, the recommended daily dose for pediatric patients 2 to 16 years of age is as follows:
Patient Weight Omeprazole Daily Dose
10 < 20 kg

10 mg

≥ 20 kg

20 mg

On a per kg basis, the doses of omeprazole required to heal erosive esophagitis in pediatric patients are greater than those for adults.

Alternative administrative options can be used for pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule [See Dosage and Administration (2.8)].

2.8 Alternative Administration Options

Omeprazole is available as a delayed-release capsule.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of an omeprazole delayed-release capsule can be added to applesauce.

One tablespoon of applesauce should be added to an empty bowl and the capsule should be opened. All of the pellets inside the capsule should be carefully emptied on the applesauce. The pellets should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The pellets should not be chewed or crushed. The pellets/applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.
Ursodiol

Ursodiol

Gallstone Dissolution

The recommended dose for Ursodiol treatment of radiolucent gallbladder stones is 8-10 mg/kg/day given in 2 or 3 divided doses.

Ultrasound images of the gallbladder should be obtained at 6-month intervals for the first year of Ursodiol therapy to monitor gallstone response. If gallstones appear to have dissolved, Ursodiol therapy should be continued and dissolution confirmed on a repeat ultrasound examination within 1 to 3 months. Most patients who eventually achieve complete stone dissolution will show partial or complete dissolution at the first on-treatment re-evaluation. If partial stone dissolution is not seen by 12 months of Ursodiol therapy, the likelihood of success is greatly reduced.

Gallstone Prevention

The recommended dosage of Ursodiol for gallstone prevention in patients undergoing rapid weight loss is 600 mg/day (300 mg b.i.d.).
Dimaphen Dm

Dimaphen Dm

• do not take more than 6 doses in any 24-hour period
age

dose

adults and children 12 years and over

4 tsp every 4-6 hours

children 6 to under 12 years

2 tsp every 4-6 hours

children 4 to under 6 years

do not use unless directed by a doctor

children under 4 years

do not use
Dimaphen

Dimaphen

• do not take more than 6 doses in any 24-hour period
age

dose

adults and children 12 years and over

4 tsp every 4-6 hours

children 6 to under 12 years

2 tsp every 4-6 hours

children 4 to under 6 years

do not use unless directed by a doctor

children under 4 years

do not use
All Nite

All Nite

• take only as directed – see Overdose warning • use dose cup • do not exceed 4 doses per 24 hrs
adults & children 12 yrs & over

30 mL (2 TBSP) every 6 hrs

children 4 to under 12 yrs

ask a doctor

children under 4 yrs

do not use
Venlafaxine Hydrochlori...

Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

Venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules should be administered in a single dose with food either in the morning or in the evening at approximately the same time each day. Each capsule should be swallowed whole with fluid and not divided, crushed, chewed, or placed in water, or it may be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the entire contents on a spoonful of applesauce. This drug/food mixture should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets.

Initial Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder

For most patients, the recommended starting dose for venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules is 75 mg/day, administered in a single dose. In the clinical trials establishing the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules in moderately depressed outpatients, the initial dose of venlafaxine was 75 mg/day. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 37.5 mg/day for 4 to 7 days, to allow new patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 75 mg/day. While the relationship between dose and antidepressant response for venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules has not been adequately explored, patients not responding to the initial 75 mg/day dose may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of approximately 225 mg/day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg/day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 4 days, since steady state plasma levels of venlafaxine and its major metabolites are achieved in most patients by day 4. In the clinical trials establishing efficacy, upward titration was permitted at intervals of 2 weeks or more; the average doses were about 140 to 180 mg/day (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

It should be noted that, while the maximum recommended dose for moderately depressed outpatients is also 225 mg/day for venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets (immediate release), more severely depressed inpatients in one study of the development program for that product responded to a mean dose of 350 mg/day (range of 150 to 375 mg/day). Whether or not higher doses of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules are needed for more severely depressed patients is unknown; however, the experience with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsule doses higher than 225 mg/day is very limited. (See PRECAUTIONS-General-Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness.)

Social Anxiety Disorder (Social Phobia)

The recommended dose is 75 mg/day, administered in a single dose. There was no evidence that higher doses confer any additional benefit. (See the Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness section of PRECAUTIONS.)

Panic Disorder

It is recommended that initial single doses of 37.5 mg/day of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules be used for 7 days. In clinical trials establishing the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules in outpatients with panic disorder, initial doses of 37.5 mg/day for 7 days were followed by doses of 75 mg/day and subsequent weekly dose increases of 75 mg/day to a maximum dose of 225 mg/day. Although a dose-response relationship for effectiveness in patients with panic disorder was not clearly established in fixed-dose studies, certain patients not responding to 75 mg/day may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of approximately 225 mg/day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg/day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 7 days. (See the Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness section of PRECAUTIONS.)

Switching Patients from Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Tablets

Depressed patients who are currently being treated at a therapeutic dose with venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets (immediate release) may be switched to venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent dose (mg/day), e.g., 37.5 mg venlafaxine two-times-a-day to 75 mg venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily. However, individual dosage adjustments may be necessary.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders: At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules. Conversely, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules With Other MAOls, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue: Do not start venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 7 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules are unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules, other SNRIs, or SSRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance and increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with hepatic cirrhosis and mild and moderate hepatic impairment compared with normal subjects (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between subjects with cirrhosis, it may be necessary to reduce the dose even more than 50%, and individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients.

Patients with Renal Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance for venlafaxine and the increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with renal impairment (GFR = 10 to 70 mL/min) compared with normal subjects (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 25% to 50%. In patients undergoing hemodialysis, it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50%. Because there was much individual variability in clearance between patients with renal impairment, individualization of dosage may be desirable in some patients.

Elderly Patients

No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients solely on the basis of age. As with any drug for the treatment of major depressive disorder, Social Anxiety Disorder, or panic disorder, however, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose.

Maintenance Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long patients with major depressive disorder, Social Anxiety Disorder, or panic disorder, should be treated with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. In one study, in which patients responding during 8 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules (75, 150, or 225 mg/day, qAM) during 26 weeks of maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, longer-term efficacy was demonstrated. A second longer-term study has demonstrated the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets in maintaining a response in patients with recurrent major depressive disorder who had responded and continued to be improved during an initial 26 weeks of treatment and were then randomly assigned to placebo or venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets for periods of up to 52 weeks on the same dose (100 to 200 mg/day, on a b.i.d. schedule) (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether or not the dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets/venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

In patients with Social Anxiety Disorder, venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules have been shown to be effective in a 6-month clinical trial. The need for continuing medication in patients with Social Anxiety Disorder who improve with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsule treatment should be periodically reassessed.

In a study of panic disorder in which patients responding during 12 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules (75, 150, or 225 mg/day), patients continuing venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules experienced a significantly longer time to relapse than patients randomized to placebo. The need for continuing medication in patients with panic disorder who improve with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsule treatment should be periodically reassessed.

Discontinuing venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules, other SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate. In clinical trials with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules, tapering was achieved by reducing the daily dose by 75 mg at 1 week intervals. Individualization of tapering may be necessary.
Gas Relief Extra Streng...

Gas Relief Extra Strength

adults: swallow with water 1 or 2 softgels as needed after meals and at bedtime do not exceed 4 softgels in 24 hours unless directed by a doctor
Dok

Dok

adults and children 12 years of age and over: take 1 softgel daily or as directed by a doctor children under 12 years of age: ask a doctor
Kao Tin

Kao Tin

adults and children 12 years of age and over: take 1 softgel daily or as directed by a doctor children under 12 years of age: ask a doctor
Voriconazole

Voriconazole

2.1 Instructions for Use in All Patients

Voriconazole tablets should be taken at least one hour before or after a meal.

2.3 Recommended Dosing in Adults

Invasive Aspergillosis and Serious Fungal Infections due to Fusarium Spp. and Scedosporium Apiospermum

See Table 1. Therapy must be initiated with the specified loading dose regimen of intravenous voriconazole on Day 1 followed by the recommended maintenance dose regimen. Intravenous treatment should be continued for at least 7 days. Once the patient has clinically improved and can tolerate medication given by mouth, the oral tablet form or oral suspension form of voriconazole may be utilized. The recommended oral maintenance dose of 200 mg achieves a voriconazole exposure similar to 3 mg/kg IV; a 300 mg oral dose achieves an exposure similar to 4 mg/kg IV. Switching between the intravenous and oral formulations is appropriate because of the high bioavailability of the oral formulation in adults [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12)].

Candidemia in Non-neutropenic Patients and Other Deep Tissue Candida Infections

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for at least 14 days following resolution of symptoms or following last positive culture, whichever is longer.

Esophageal Candidiasis

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for a minimum of 14 days and for at least 7 days following resolution of symptoms.
Table 1 Recommended Dosing Regimen
Infection

Loading Dose

Maintenance Dosea,b

IV

IV

Oralc

Invasive Aspergillosisd

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

Candidemia in nonneutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

3 to 4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

Esophageal Candidiasis

f

f

200 mg q12h

Scedosporiosis and Fusariosis

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

a Increase dose when voriconazole is co-administered with phenytoin or efavirenz (7); Decrease dose in patients with hepatic impairment (2.7)

bIn healthy volunteer studies, the 200 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 3 mg/kg IV q12h dose; the 300 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 4 mg/kg IV q12h dose [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12)].

c Adult patients who weigh less than 40 kg should receive half of the oral maintenance dose.

d In a clinical study of invasive aspergillosis, the median duration of intravenous voriconazole therapy was 10 days (range 2 to 85 days). The median duration of oral voriconazole therapy was 76 days (range 2 to 232 days) [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

e In clinical trials, patients with candidemia received 3 mg/kg IV q12h as primary therapy, while patients with other deep tissue Candida infections received 4 mg/kg q12h as salvage therapy. Appropriate dose should be based on the severity and nature of the infection

f Not evaluated in patients with esophageal candidiasis.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment

If patient response is inadequate, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 200 mg every 12 hours (similar to 3 mg/kg IV q12h) to 300 mg every 12 hours (similar to 4 mg/kg IV q12h). For adult patients weighing less than 40 kg, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 100 mg every 12 hours to 150 mg every 12 hours. If patient is unable to tolerate 300 mg orally every 12 hours, reduce the oral maintenance dose by 50 mg steps to a minimum of 200 mg every 12 hours (or to 100 mg every 12 hours for adult patients weighing less than 40 kg).

If patient is unable to tolerate 4 mg/kg IV q12h, reduce the intravenous maintenance dose to 3 mg/kg q12h.

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be increased when co-administered with phenytoin or efavirenz [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7)].

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be reduced in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, Child-Pugh Class A and B [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.7)]. There are no PK data to allow for dosage adjustment recommendations in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C).

Duration of therapy should be based on the severity of the patient’s underlying disease, recovery from immunosuppression, and clinical response.

2.7 Use in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

In the clinical program, patients were included who had baseline liver function tests (ALT, AST) up to 5 times the upper limit of normal. No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with this degree of abnormal liver function, but continued monitoring of liver function tests for further elevations is recommended [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.9)].

It is recommended that the standard loading dose regimens be used but that the maintenance dose be halved in patients with mild to moderate hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class A and B) [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Voriconazole tablets have not been studied in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class C) or in patients with chronic hepatitis B or chronic hepatitis C disease. Voriconazole tablets have been associated with elevations in liver function tests and clinical signs of liver damage, such as jaundice, and should only be used in patients with severe hepatic impairment if the benefit outweighs the potential risk. Patients with hepatic insufficiency must be carefully monitored for drug toxicity.

2.8 Use in Patients With Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of orally administered voriconazole tablets are not significantly affected by renal impairment. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary for oral dosing in patients with mild to severe renal impairment [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

In patients with moderate or severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), accumulation of the intravenous vehicle, SBECD, occurs. Oral voriconazole should be administered to these patients, unless an assessment of the benefit/risk to the patient justifies the use of intravenous voriconazole. Serum creatinine levels should be closely monitored in these patients, and, if increases occur, consideration should be given to changing to oral voriconazole therapy [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.10)].

Voriconazole is hemodialyzed with clearance of 121 mL/min. The intravenous vehicle, SBECD, is hemodialyzed with clearance of 55 mL/min. A 4-hour hemodialysis session does not remove a sufficient amount of voriconazole to warrant dose adjustment.
Temazepam

Temazepam

While the recommended usual adult dose is 15 mg before retiring, 7.5 mg may be sufficient for some patients, and others may need 30 mg. In transient insomnia, a 7.5 mg dose may be sufficient to improve sleep latency. In elderly or debilitated patients, it is recommended that therapy be initiated with 7.5 mg until individual responses are determined.
Oxycodone And Acetamino...

Oxycodone And Acetaminophen

Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. It may occasionally be necessary to exceed the usual dosage recommended below in cases of more severe pain or in those patients who have become tolerant to the analgesic effect of opioids. If pain is constant, the opioid analgesic should be given at regular intervals on an around-the-clock schedule. Oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets are given orally. The usual adult dosage is one tablet every 6 hours as needed for pain. The total daily dose of acetaminophen should not exceed 4 grams. The maximal daily dose of oxycodone and acetaminophen 5 mg/325 mg is 12 tablets.

Cessation of Therapy

In patients treated with oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets for more than a few weeks who no longer require therapy, doses should be tapered gradually to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient.

Cessation of Therapy

In patients treated with oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets for more than a few weeks who no longer require therapy, doses should be tapered gradually to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient.
Sore Throat Cherry

Sore Throat Cherry

Adults and children 6 years of age and older: Apply to the affected area (one spray). Allow to remain in place for at least 15 seconds, then spit out. Use every 2 hours or as directed by a doctor or dentist.

Children under 12 years of age should be supervised in the use of this product.

Children under 6 years of age: Consult a doctor or dentist.
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Promethazine hydrochloride tablets are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age (see WARNINGS: Black Box Warning and Use in Pediatric Patients).

Allergy

The average oral dose is 25 mg taken before retiring; however, 12.5 mg may be taken before meals and on retiring, if necessary. Single 25 mg doses at bedtime or 6.25 mg to 12.5 mg taken 3 times daily will usually suffice. After initiation of treatment, in children or adults, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The administration of promethazine HCl in 25 mg doses will control minor transfusion reactions of an allergic nature.

Motion Sickness

The average adult dose is 25 mg taken twice daily. The initial dose should be taken one-half to one hour before anticipated travel and be repeated 8 to 12 hours later if necessary. On succeeding days of travel, it is recommended that 25 mg be given on arising and again before the evening meal. For children, promethazine hydrochloride tablets, syrup, or rectal suppositories, 12.5 mg to 25 mg, twice daily, may be administered.

Nausea and Vomiting

Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see WARNINGS: Use in Pediatric Patients).

The average effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride tablets for the active therapy of nausea and vomiting in children or adults is 25 mg. When oral medication cannot be tolerated, the dose should be given parenterally or by rectal suppository. 12.5 mg to 25 mg doses may be repeated, as necessary, at 4 to 6 hour intervals.

For nausea and vomiting in children, the usual dose is 0.5 mg per pound of body weight, and the dose should be adjusted to the age and weight of the patient and the severity of the condition being treated.

For prophylaxis of nausea and vomiting, as during surgery and the postoperative period, the average dose is 25 mg repeated at 4 to 6 hour intervals, as necessary.

Sedation

This product relieves apprehension and induces a quiet sleep from which the patient can be easily aroused. Administration of 12.5 mg to 25 mg promethazine HCl by the oral route or by rectal suppository at bedtime will provide sedation in children. Adults usually require 25 mg to 50 mg for nighttime, presurgical, or obstetrical sedation.

Pre- and Postoperative Use

Promethazine HCl in 12.5 mg to 25 mg doses for children and 50 mg doses for adults the night before surgery relieves apprehension and produces a quiet sleep.

For preoperative medication, children require doses of 0.5 mg per pound of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine like drug.

Usual adult dosage is a 50 mg promethazine HCl with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the required amount of a belladonna alkaloid.

Postoperative sedation and adjunctive use with analgesics may be obtained by the administration of 12.5 mg to 25 mg in children and 25 mg to 50 mg doses in adults. Promethazine hydrochloride tablets are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age.
Peg 3350

Peg 3350

Directions

-do not take more than directed unless advised by your doctor

-the bottle top is a measuring cap marked to contain 17 grams of powder when filled to the indicated line

-adults and children 17 years of age and older:

    -fill to top of line in cap which is marked to indicate the correct dose (17 g)

    -stir and dissolve in any 4 to 8 ounces of beverage (cold, hot or room temperature) and then drink

    -use once a day

    -use no more than 7 days

-Children 16 years of age or under: ask a doctor
Dok

Dok

take with a glass of water take only by mouth. Doses may be taken as a single daily dose or in divided doses. adults and children 12 years and over take 1 to 3 capsules daily children 2 to under 12 years of age take 1 capsule daily children under 2 years of age ask a doctor
Kds Dye-free Allergy

Kds Dye-free Allergy

• this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use • do not give more than directed • shake well before using • find right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise use age. • use only enclosed measuring cup • if needed, repeat dose every 6-8 hours • do not use more than 4 times a day • replace original bottle cap to maintain child resistance • wash dosage cup after each use
Dosing Chart

Weight (lbs)

Age (yrs)

Dose (teaspoonful or mL)

under 2 years

ask a doctor

24-35 lbs

2-3 years

1 tsp or 5 mL

36-47 lbs

4-5 years

1 ½ tsp or 7.5 mL

48-59 lbs

6-8 years

2 tsp or 10 mL

60-71 lbs

9-10 years

2 ½ tsp or 12.5 mL

72-95 lbs

11 years
3 tsp or 15 mL
Nystatin

Nystatin

Very moist lesions are best treated with the topical dusting powder.

Adults and Pediatric Patients (Neonates and Older)

Apply to candidal lesions two or three times daily until healing is complete. For fungal infection of the feet caused by Candida species, the powder should be dusted on the feet, as well as, in all foot wear.
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride

Oxycodone hydrochloride tablets are intended for the management of moderate to severe pain in patients who require treatment with an oral opioid analgesic. The dose should be individually adjusted according to severity of pain, patient response and patient size. If the pain increases in severity, if analgesia is not adequate, or if tolerance occurs, a gradual increase in dosage may be required.

Patients who have not been receiving opioid analgesics should be started on oxycodone hydrochloride tablets in a dosing range of 5 to 15 mg every 4 to 6 hours as needed for pain. The dose should be titrated based upon the individual patient's response to their initial dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets. Patients with chronic pain should have their dosage given on an around-the-clock basis to prevent the reoccurrence of pain rather than treating the pain after it has occurred. This dose can then be adjusted to an acceptable level of analgesia taking into account side effects experienced by the patient.

For control of severe chronic pain, oxycodone hydrochloride tablets should be administered on a regularly scheduled basis, every 4-6 hours, at the lowest dosage level that will achieve adequate analgesia.

As with any potent opioid, it is critical to adjust the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience. Although it is not possible to list every condition that is important to the selection of the initial dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets, attention should be given to: 1) the daily dose, potency, and characteristics of a pure agonist or mixed agonist/antagonist the patient has been taking previously, 2) the reliability of the relative potency estimate to calculate the dose of oxycodone needed, 3) the degree of opioid tolerance, 4) the general condition and medical status of the patient, and 5) the balance between pain control and adverse experiences.

Conversion From Fixed-Ratio Opioid/Acetaminophen, Opioid/Aspirin, or Opioid/Nonsteroidal Combination Drugs:

When converting patients from fixed ratio opioid/non-opioid drug regimens a decision should be made whether or not to continue the non-opioid analgesic. If a decision is made to discontinue the use of non-opioid analgesic, it may be necessary to titrate the dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets in response to the level of analgesia and adverse effects afforded by the dosing regimen. If the non-opioid regimen is continued as a separate single entity agent, the starting dose oxycodone hydrochloride tablets should be based upon the most recent dose of opioid as a baseline for further titration of oxycodone. Incremental increases should be gauged according to side effects to an acceptable level of analgesia.

Patients Currently on Opioid Therapy:

If a patient has been receiving opioid-containing medications prior to taking oxycodone hydrochloride tablets, the potency of the prior opioid relative to oxycodone should be factored into the selection of the total daily dose (TDD) of oxycodone.

In converting patients from other opioids to oxycodone hydrochloride tablets close observation and adjustment of dosage based upon the patient's response to oxycodone hydrochloride tablets is imperative. Administration of supplemental analgesia for breakthrough or incident pain and titration of the total daily dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets may be necessary, especially in patients who have disease states that are changing rapidly.

Maintenance of Therapy:

Continual re-evaluation of the patient receiving oxycodone hydrochloride tablets is important, with special attention to the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of side effects associated with therapy. If the level of pain increases, effort should be made to identify the source of increased pain, while adjusting the dose as described above to decrease the level of pain.

During chronic therapy, especially for non-cancer-related pain (or pain associated with other terminal illnesses), the continued need for the use of opioid analgesics should be re-assessed as appropriate.

Cessation of Therapy:

When a patient no longer requires therapy with oxycodone hydrochloride tablets or other opioid analgesics for the treatment of their pain, it is important that therapy be gradually discontinued over time to prevent the development of an opioid abstinence syndrome (narcotic withdrawal). In general, therapy can be decreased by 25% to 50% per day with careful monitoring for signs and symptoms of withdrawal (see DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE section for description of the signs and symptoms of withdrawal). If the patient develops these signs or symptoms, the dose should be raised to the previous level and titrated down more slowly, either by increasing the interval between decreases, decreasing the amount of change in dose, or both. It is not known at what dose of oxycodone hydrochloride tablets that treatment may be discontinued without risk of the opioid abstinence syndrome.
Hydrocodone Bitartate A...

Hydrocodone Bitartate And Acetaminophen

Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. However, it should be kept in mind that tolerance to hydrocodone can develop with continued use and that the incidence of untoward effects is dose related.

The usual adult dosage is one or two tablets every four to six hours as needed for pain. The total daily dosage should not exceed 8 tablets.
Unit Dose Bisacodyl

Unit Dose Bisacodyl

take with a glass of water
adults and children 12 years and over

take 1 to 3 tablets in a single daily dose

children 6 to under 12 years of age

take 1 tablet in a single daily dose

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor
Safe Sea

Safe Sea

The dose of verapamil hydrochloride must be individualized by titration. The usefulness and safety of dosages exceeding 480 mg/day have not been established; therefore, this daily dosage should not be exceeded. Since the half-life of verapamil increases during chronic dosing, maximum response may be delayed.

Angina

Clinical trials show that the usual dose is 80 mg to 120 mg three times a day. However, 40 mg three times a day may be warranted in patients who may have an increased response to verapamil (e.g., decreased hepatic function, elderly, etc.). Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety evaluated approximately eight hours after dosing. Dosage may be increased at daily (e.g., patients with unstable angina) or weekly intervals until optimum clinical response is obtained.

Arrhythmias

The dosage in digitalized patients with chronic atrial fibrillation (see PRECAUTIONS) ranges from 240 to 320 mg/day in divided (three times a day or four times a day) doses. The dosage for prophylaxis of PSVT (non-digitalized patients) ranges from 240 to 480 mg/day in divided (three times a day or four times a day) doses. In general, maximum effects for any given dosage will be apparent during the first 48 hours of therapy.

Essential Hypertension

Dose should be individualized by titration. The usual initial monotherapy dose in clinical trials was 80 mg three times a day (240 mg/day). Daily dosages of 360 and 480 mg have been used but there is no evidence that dosages beyond 360 mg provided added effect. Consideration should be given to beginning titration at 40 mg three times per day in patients who might respond to lower doses, such as the elderly or people of small stature. The antihypertensive effects of verapamil are evident within the first week of therapy. Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy, assessed at the end of the dosing interval.
Tacrolimus

Tacrolimus

2.1 Dosage in Adult Kidney, Liver, or Heart Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for adult patients with kidney, liver, or heart transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 1. The initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours after transplantation in the liver and heart transplant patients. In kidney transplant patients, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules may be administered within 24 hours of transplantation, but should be delayed until renal function has recovered. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration ( 2.6).
Table 1. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Adults * In a second smaller trial, the initial dose of tacrolimus was 0.15 to 0.2 mg/kg/day and observed tacrolimus concentrations were 6 to 16 ng/mL during month 1 to 3 and 5 to 12 ng/mL during month 4 to 12 [see Clinical Studies ( 14.1)]. Patient Population
Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial

Oral Dosage
Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations Adult kidney transplant patients In combination with azathioprine
0.2 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 7 to 20 ng/mL

month 4 to 12: 5 to 15 ng/mL
In combination with MMF/IL-2 receptor antagonist *
0.1 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 4 to 11 ng/mL
Adult liver transplant patients 0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg/day month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL Adult heart transplant patients 0.075 mg/kg/day
month 1 to 3 : 10 to 20 ng/mL

month ≥4: 5 to 15 ng/mL

Dosing should be titrated based on clinical assessments of rejection and tolerability. Lower tacrolimus capsules dosages than the recommended initial dosage may be sufficient as maintenance therapy. Adjunct therapy with adrenal corticosteroids is recommended early post-transplant.

The data in kidney transplant patients indicate that the Black patients required a higher dose to attain comparable trough concentrations compared to Caucasian patients ( Table 2).
Table 2. Comparative Dose and Trough Concentrations Based on Race Time After Transplant
Caucasian
n=114
Black
n=56
Dose
(mg/kg)
Trough Concentrations
(ng/mL)
Dose
(mg/kg) Trough Concentrations (ng/mL) Day 7 0.18 12.0 0.23 10.9 Month 1 0.17 12.8 0.26 12.9 Month 6 0.14 11.8 0.24 11.5 Month 12 0.13 10.1 0.19 11.0
Initial Dose – Injection Tacrolimus injection should be used only as a continuous IV infusion and when the patient cannot tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules. Tacrolimus injection should be discontinued as soon as the patient can tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, usually within 2 to 3 days. In a patient receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

The observed trough concentrations described above pertain to oral administration of tacrolimus only; while monitoring tacrolimus concentrations in patients receiving tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion may have some utility, the observed concentrations will not represent comparable exposures to those estimated by the trough concentrations observed in patients on oral therapy.

The recommended starting dose of tacrolimus injection is 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day in kidney and liver transplant and 0.01 mg/kg/day in heart transplant given as a continuous IV infusion. Adult patients should receive doses at the lower end of the dosing range. Concomitant adrenal corticosteroid therapy is recommended early post-transplantation.

Anaphylactic reactions have occurred with injectables containing castor oil derivatives, such as tacrolimus injection [see Warnings and Precautions ( 5.11)]

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Liver Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for pediatric patients with liver transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 3. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration ( 2.6). If necessary, pediatric patients may start on an IV dose of 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day.
Table 3. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Children Patient Population
Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage
Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations Pediatric liver transplant patients 0.15 to 0.20 mg/kg/day Month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL
Pediatric liver transplantation patients without pre-existing renal or hepatic dysfunction have required and tolerated higher doses than adults to achieve similar blood concentrations.

Experience in pediatric kidney and heart transplantation patients is limited.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Due to its potential for nephrotoxicity, consideration should be given to dosing tacrolimus capsules at the lower end of the therapeutic dosing range in patients who have received a liver or heart transplant and have pre-existing renal impairment. Further reductions in dose below the targeted range may be required.

In kidney transplant patients with post-operative oliguria, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours and within 24 hours of transplantation, but may be delayed until renal function shows evidence of recovery.

2.4 Dosage Adjustments in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Due to the reduced clearance and prolonged half-life, patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child Pugh ≥ 10) may require lower doses of tacrolimus capsules. Close monitoring of blood concentrations is warranted.

The use of tacrolimus capsules in liver transplant recipients experiencing post-transplant hepatic impairment may be associated with increased risk of developing renal insufficiency related to high whole-blood concentrations of tacrolimus. These patients should be monitored closely and dosage adjustments should be considered. Some evidence suggests that lower doses should be used in these patients [see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1), Use in Specific Populations ( 8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology ( 12.3)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

It is recommended that patients initiate oral therapy with tacrolimus capsules if possible.

Initial dosage and observed tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations for adults are shown in Table 1 and for pediatrics in Table 3[see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1, 2.2)] ; for blood concentration monitoring details in kidney transplant patients [see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1)].

It is important to take tacrolimus capsules consistently every day either with or without food because the presence and composition of food decreases the bioavailability of tacrolimus capsules [see Clinical Pharmacology ( 12.3)].

Patients should not eat grapefruit or drink grapefruit juice in combination with tacrolimus capsules [see Drug Interactions ( 7.2)].

Tacrolimus capsules should not be used simultaneously with cyclosporine. Tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine should be discontinued at least 24 hours before initiating the other. In the presence of elevated tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine concentrations, dosing with the other drug usually should be further delayed.

In patients unable to take oral tacrolimus capsules, therapy may be initiated with tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion. If IV therapy is necessary, conversion from IV to oral tacrolimus is recommended as soon as oral therapy can be tolerated. This usually occurs within 2 to 3 days. In patients receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

2.6 Therapeutic Drug Monitoring

Monitoring of tacrolimus blood concentrations in conjunction with other laboratory and clinical parameters is considered an essential aid to patient management for the evaluation of rejection, toxicity, dose adjustments and compliance. Observed whole blood trough concentrations can be found in Table 1. Factors influencing frequency of monitoring include but are not limited to hepatic or renal dysfunction, the addition or discontinuation of potentially interacting drugs and the post-transplant time. Blood concentration monitoring is not a replacement for renal and liver function monitoring and tissue biopsies. Data from clinical trials show that tacrolimus whole blood concentrations were most variable during the first week post-transplantation.

The relative risks of toxicity and efficacy failure are related to tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations. Therefore, monitoring of whole blood trough concentrations is recommended to assist in the clinical evaluation of toxicity and efficacy failure.

Methods commonly used for the assay of tacrolimus include high performance liquid chromatography with tandem mass spectrometric detection (HPLC/MS/MS) and immunoassays. Immunoassays may react with metabolites as well as parent compound. Therefore assay results obtained with immunoassays may have a positive bias relative to results of HPLC/MS. The bias may depend upon the specific assay and laboratory. Comparison of the concentrations in published literature to patient concentrations using the current assays must be made with detailed knowledge of the assay methods and biological matrices employed. Whole blood is the matrix of choice and specimens should be collected into tubes containing ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) anti-coagulant. Heparin anti-coagulation is not recommended because of the tendency to form clots on storage. Samples which are not analyzed immediately should be stored at room temperature or in a refrigerator and assayed within 7 days; see assay instructions for specifics. If samples are to be kept longer they should be deep frozen at -20° C. One study showed drug recovery > 90% for samples stored at -20° C for 6 months, with reduced recovery observed after 6 months.

2.1 Dosage in Adult Kidney, Liver, or Heart Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for adult patients with kidney, liver, or heart transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 1. The initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours after transplantation in the liver and heart transplant patients. In kidney transplant patients, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules may be administered within 24 hours of transplantation, but should be delayed until renal function has recovered. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration ( 2.6).
Table 1. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Adults * In a second smaller trial, the initial dose of tacrolimus was 0.15 to 0.2 mg/kg/day and observed tacrolimus concentrations were 6 to 16 ng/mL during month 1 to 3 and 5 to 12 ng/mL during month 4 to 12 [see Clinical Studies ( 14.1)]. Patient Population
Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial

Oral Dosage
Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations Adult kidney transplant patients In combination with azathioprine
0.2 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 7 to 20 ng/mL

month 4 to 12: 5 to 15 ng/mL
In combination with MMF/IL-2 receptor antagonist *
0.1 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 4 to 11 ng/mL
Adult liver transplant patients 0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg/day month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL Adult heart transplant patients 0.075 mg/kg/day
month 1 to 3 : 10 to 20 ng/mL

month ≥4: 5 to 15 ng/mL

Dosing should be titrated based on clinical assessments of rejection and tolerability. Lower tacrolimus capsules dosages than the recommended initial dosage may be sufficient as maintenance therapy. Adjunct therapy with adrenal corticosteroids is recommended early post-transplant.

The data in kidney transplant patients indicate that the Black patients required a higher dose to attain comparable trough concentrations compared to Caucasian patients ( Table 2).
Table 2. Comparative Dose and Trough Concentrations Based on Race Time After Transplant
Caucasian
n=114
Black
n=56
Dose
(mg/kg)
Trough Concentrations
(ng/mL)
Dose
(mg/kg) Trough Concentrations (ng/mL) Day 7 0.18 12.0 0.23 10.9 Month 1 0.17 12.8 0.26 12.9 Month 6 0.14 11.8 0.24 11.5 Month 12 0.13 10.1 0.19 11.0
Initial Dose – Injection Tacrolimus injection should be used only as a continuous IV infusion and when the patient cannot tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules. Tacrolimus injection should be discontinued as soon as the patient can tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, usually within 2 to 3 days. In a patient receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

The observed trough concentrations described above pertain to oral administration of tacrolimus only; while monitoring tacrolimus concentrations in patients receiving tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion may have some utility, the observed concentrations will not represent comparable exposures to those estimated by the trough concentrations observed in patients on oral therapy.

The recommended starting dose of tacrolimus injection is 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day in kidney and liver transplant and 0.01 mg/kg/day in heart transplant given as a continuous IV infusion. Adult patients should receive doses at the lower end of the dosing range. Concomitant adrenal corticosteroid therapy is recommended early post-transplantation.

Anaphylactic reactions have occurred with injectables containing castor oil derivatives, such as tacrolimus injection [see Warnings and Precautions ( 5.11)]

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Liver Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for pediatric patients with liver transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 3. For blood concentration monitoring details see Dosage and Administration ( 2.6). If necessary, pediatric patients may start on an IV dose of 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day.
Table 3. Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Children Patient Population
Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage
Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations Pediatric liver transplant patients 0.15 to 0.20 mg/kg/day Month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL
Pediatric liver transplantation patients without pre-existing renal or hepatic dysfunction have required and tolerated higher doses than adults to achieve similar blood concentrations.

Experience in pediatric kidney and heart transplantation patients is limited.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Due to its potential for nephrotoxicity, consideration should be given to dosing tacrolimus capsules at the lower end of the therapeutic dosing range in patients who have received a liver or heart transplant and have pre-existing renal impairment. Further reductions in dose below the targeted range may be required.

In kidney transplant patients with post-operative oliguria, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules should be administered no sooner than 6 hours and within 24 hours of transplantation, but may be delayed until renal function shows evidence of recovery.

2.4 Dosage Adjustments in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Due to the reduced clearance and prolonged half-life, patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child Pugh ≥ 10) may require lower doses of tacrolimus capsules. Close monitoring of blood concentrations is warranted.

The use of tacrolimus capsules in liver transplant recipients experiencing post-transplant hepatic impairment may be associated with increased risk of developing renal insufficiency related to high whole-blood concentrations of tacrolimus. These patients should be monitored closely and dosage adjustments should be considered. Some evidence suggests that lower doses should be used in these patients [see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1), Use in Specific Populations ( 8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology ( 12.3)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

It is recommended that patients initiate oral therapy with tacrolimus capsules if possible.

Initial dosage and observed tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations for adults are shown in Table 1 and for pediatrics in Table 3[see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1, 2.2)] ; for blood concentration monitoring details in kidney transplant patients [see Dosage and Administration ( 2.1)].

It is important to take tacrolimus capsules consistently every day either with or without food because the presence and composition of food decreases the bioavailability of tacrolimus capsules [see Clinical Pharmacology ( 12.3)].

Patients should not eat grapefruit or drink grapefruit juice in combination with tacrolimus capsules [see Drug Interactions ( 7.2)].

Tacrolimus capsules should not be used simultaneously with cyclosporine. Tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine should be discontinued at least 24 hours before initiating the other. In the presence of elevated tacrolimus capsules or cyclosporine concentrations, dosing with the other drug usually should be further delayed.

In patients unable to take oral tacrolimus capsules, therapy may be initiated with tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion. If IV therapy is necessary, conversion from IV to oral tacrolimus is recommended as soon as oral therapy can be tolerated. This usually occurs within 2 to 3 days. In patients receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

2.6 Therapeutic Drug Monitoring

Monitoring of tacrolimus blood concentrations in conjunction with other laboratory and clinical parameters is considered an essential aid to patient management for the evaluation of rejection, toxicity, dose adjustments and compliance. Observed whole blood trough concentrations can be found in Table 1. Factors influencing frequency of monitoring include but are not limited to hepatic or renal dysfunction, the addition or discontinuation of potentially interacting drugs and the post-transplant time. Blood concentration monitoring is not a replacement for renal and liver function monitoring and tissue biopsies. Data from clinical trials show that tacrolimus whole blood concentrations were most variable during the first week post-transplantation.

The relative risks of toxicity and efficacy failure are related to tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations. Therefore, monitoring of whole blood trough concentrations is recommended to assist in the clinical evaluation of toxicity and efficacy failure.

Methods commonly used for the assay of tacrolimus include high performance liquid chromatography with tandem mass spectrometric detection (HPLC/MS/MS) and immunoassays. Immunoassays may react with metabolites as well as parent compound. Therefore assay results obtained with immunoassays may have a positive bias relative to results of HPLC/MS. The bias may depend upon the specific assay and laboratory. Comparison of the concentrations in published literature to patient concentrations using the current assays must be made with detailed knowledge of the assay methods and biological matrices employed. Whole blood is the matrix of choice and specimens should be collected into tubes containing ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) anti-coagulant. Heparin anti-coagulation is not recommended because of the tendency to form clots on storage. Samples which are not analyzed immediately should be stored at room temperature or in a refrigerator and assayed within 7 days; see assay instructions for specifics. If samples are to be kept longer they should be deep frozen at -20° C. One study showed drug recovery > 90% for samples stored at -20° C for 6 months, with reduced recovery observed after 6 months.
Colace Clear

Colace Clear

• flush the affected eye(s) as needed • control the rate of flow of solution by pressure on the bottle
When using an eye cup
• rinse the cup with clean water immediately before each use • avoid contamination of the rim and inside surfaces of the cup • fill the cup half full and apply the cup to the affected eye(s), pressing tightly to prevent the escape of the liquid • tilt the head backward. Open eyelids wide and rotate eyeball to ensure thorough bathing with the wash or lotion • rinse the cup with clean water after each use
Other information
• store at 15º–30ºC (59º–86ºF) • keep tightly closed
Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablet is an extended-release product intended for once-a-day oral administration. Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and should not be crushed or chewed.

2.1 Mania

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are administered orally. The recommended initial dose is 25 mg/kg/day given once daily. The dose should be increased as rapidly as possible to achieve the lowest therapeutic dose which produces the desired clinical effect or the desired range of plasma concentrations. In a placebo-controlled clinical trial of acute mania or mixed type, patients were dosed to a clinical response with a trough plasma concentration between 85 and 125 mcg/mL. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer term management of a patient who improves during divalproex sodium extended-release tablets treatment of an acute manic episode. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no data to support the benefits of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks).

2.2 Epilepsy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are administered orally, and must be swallowed whole. As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, concentrations of clonazepam, diazepam, ethosuximide, lamotrigine, tolbutamide, phenobarbital, carbamazepine, and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions(7.2)].

Complex Partial Seizures

For adults and children 10 years of age or older.

Monotherapy (Initial Therapy)

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been systematically studied as initial therapy. Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

The probability of thrombocytopenia increases significantly at total trough valproate plasma concentrations above 110 mcg/mL in females and 135 mcg/mL in males. The benefit of improved seizure control with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

Conversion to Monotherapy

Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to   10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

Concomitant antiepilepsy drug (AED) dosage can ordinarily be reduced by approximately 25% every 2 weeks. This reduction may be started at initiation of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets therapy, or delayed by 1 to 2 weeks if there is a concern that seizures are likely to occur with a reduction. The speed and duration of withdrawal of the concomitant AED can be highly variable, and patients should be monitored closely during this period for increased seizure frequency.

Adjunctive Therapy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets may be added to the patient's regimen at a dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

In a study of adjunctive therapy for complex partial seizures in which patients were receiving either carbamazepine or phenytoin in addition to valproate, no adjustment of carbamazepine or phenytoin dosage was needed [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, since valproate may interact with these or other concurrently administered AEDs as well as other drugs, periodic plasma concentration determinations of concomitant AEDs are recommended during the early course of therapy [see Drug Interactions(7)].

Simple and Complex Absence Seizures

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg/kg/day, increasing at one week intervals by 5 to 10 mg/kg/day until seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increases. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

A good correlation has not been established between daily dose, serum concentrations, and therapeutic effect. However, therapeutic valproate serum concentration for most patients with absence seizures is considered to range from 50 to 100 mcg/mL. Some patients may be controlled with lower or higher serum concentrations [see Clinical Pharmacology(12.3)].

As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, blood concentrations of phenobarbital and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Antiepilepsy drugs should not be abruptly discontinued in patients in whom the drug is administered to prevent major seizures because of the strong possibility of precipitating status epilepticus with attendant hypoxia and threat to life.

2.3 Migraine

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are indicated for prophylaxis of migraine headaches in adults.

The recommended starting dose is 500 mg once daily for 1 week, thereafter increasing to 1000 mg once daily. Although doses other than 1000 mg once daily of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been evaluated in patients with migraine, the effective dose range of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets in these patients is 500 to 1000 mg/day. As with other valproate products, doses of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be individualized and dose adjustment may be necessary. If a patient requires smaller dose adjustments than that available with divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets should be used instead.

2.4 Conversion from Divalproex Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets to Divalproex Sodium Extended-Release Tablets

In adult patients and pediatric patients 10 years of age or older with epilepsy previously receiving divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be administered once-daily using a dose 8 to 20% higher than the total daily dose of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets (Table 1). For patients whose divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose cannot be directly converted to divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, consideration may be given at the clinician’s discretion to increase the patient’s divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets.

Table 1. Dose Conversion
Divalproex Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets Total Daily Dose (mg) Divalproex Sodium Extended-Release Tablets (mg) 500* - 625 750 750* - 875 1000 1000*-1125 1250 1250-1375 1500 1500-1625 1750 1750 2000 1875-2000 2250 2125-2250 2500 2375 2750 2500-2750 3000 2875 3250 3000-3125 3500
*   These total daily doses of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets cannot be directly converted to an 8 to 20% higher total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets because the required dosing strengths of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are not available. Consideration may be given at the clinician's discretion to increase the patient's divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets.

There is insufficient data to allow a conversion factor recommendation for patients with divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets doses above 3125 mg/day. Plasma valproate Cmin concentrations for divalproex sodium extended-release tablets on average are equivalent to divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, but may vary across patients after conversion. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

2.5 General Dosing Advice

Dosing in Elderly Patients

Due to a decrease in unbound clearance of valproate and possibly a greater sensitivity to somnolence in the elderly, the starting dose should be reduced in these patients. Starting doses in the elderly lower than 250mg can only be achieved by the use of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets. Dosage should be increased more slowly and with regular monitoring for fluid and nutritional intake, dehydration, somnolence, and other adverse reactions. Dose reductions or discontinuation of valproate should be considered in patients with decreased food or fluid intake and in patients with excessive somnolence. The ultimate therapeutic dose should be achieved on the basis of both tolerability and clinical response [see Warnings and Precautions(5.14), Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology(12.3)].

Dose-Related Adverse Reactions

The frequency of adverse effects (particularly elevated liver enzymes and thrombocytopenia) may be dose-related. The probability of thrombocytopenia appears to increase significantly at total valproate concentrations of ≥ 110 mcg/mL (females) or ≥ 135 mcg/mL (males) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)]. The benefit of improved therapeutic effect with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

G.I. Irritation

Patients who experience G.I. irritation may benefit from administration of the drug with food or by slowly building up the dose from an initial low level.

Compliance

Patients should be informed to take divalproex sodium extended-release tablets every day as prescribed. If a dose is missed it should be taken as soon as possible, unless it is almost time for the next dose. If a dose is skipped, the patient should not double the next dose.
Zenpep

Zenpep

this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use shake well before using if possible, use weight to dose; otherwise use age use only with enclosed syringe. Do not use with any other dosing device push air out of syringe. Firmly push syringe into bottle opening. turn bottle upside-down and pull syringe to the correct dose dispense liquid slowly into child's mouth, towards inner cheek give dose every 4 hours while symptoms last do not give more than 5 doses in 24 hours
24-35 lbs (2-3 years); 5 mL

Under 24 lbs (under 2 years); ask a doctor
Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablet is an extended-release product intended for once-a-day oral administration. Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and should not be crushed or chewed.

2.1 Mania

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are administered orally. The recommended initial dose is 25 mg/kg/day given once daily. The dose should be increased as rapidly as possible to achieve the lowest therapeutic dose which produces the desired clinical effect or the desired range of plasma concentrations. In a placebo-controlled clinical trial of acute mania or mixed type, patients were dosed to a clinical response with a trough plasma concentration between 85 and 125 mcg/mL. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer term management of a patient who improves during divalproex sodium extended-release tablets treatment of an acute manic episode. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no data to support the benefits of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks).

2.2 Epilepsy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are administered orally, and must be swallowed whole. As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, concentrations of clonazepam, diazepam, ethosuximide, lamotrigine, tolbutamide, phenobarbital, carbamazepine, and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions(7.2)].

Complex Partial Seizures

For adults and children 10 years of age or older.

Monotherapy (Initial Therapy)

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been systematically studied as initial therapy. Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

The probability of thrombocytopenia increases significantly at total trough valproate plasma concentrations above 110 mcg/mL in females and 135 mcg/mL in males. The benefit of improved seizure control with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

Conversion to Monotherapy

Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to   10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

Concomitant antiepilepsy drug (AED) dosage can ordinarily be reduced by approximately 25% every 2 weeks. This reduction may be started at initiation of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets therapy, or delayed by 1 to 2 weeks if there is a concern that seizures are likely to occur with a reduction. The speed and duration of withdrawal of the concomitant AED can be highly variable, and patients should be monitored closely during this period for increased seizure frequency.

Adjunctive Therapy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets may be added to the patient's regimen at a dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

In a study of adjunctive therapy for complex partial seizures in which patients were receiving either carbamazepine or phenytoin in addition to valproate, no adjustment of carbamazepine or phenytoin dosage was needed [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, since valproate may interact with these or other concurrently administered AEDs as well as other drugs, periodic plasma concentration determinations of concomitant AEDs are recommended during the early course of therapy [see Drug Interactions(7)].

Simple and Complex Absence Seizures

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg/kg/day, increasing at one week intervals by 5 to 10 mg/kg/day until seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increases. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

A good correlation has not been established between daily dose, serum concentrations, and therapeutic effect. However, therapeutic valproate serum concentration for most patients with absence seizures is considered to range from 50 to 100 mcg/mL. Some patients may be controlled with lower or higher serum concentrations [see Clinical Pharmacology(12.3)].

As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, blood concentrations of phenobarbital and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Antiepilepsy drugs should not be abruptly discontinued in patients in whom the drug is administered to prevent major seizures because of the strong possibility of precipitating status epilepticus with attendant hypoxia and threat to life.

2.3 Migraine

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are indicated for prophylaxis of migraine headaches in adults.

The recommended starting dose is 500 mg once daily for 1 week, thereafter increasing to 1000 mg once daily. Although doses other than 1000 mg once daily of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been evaluated in patients with migraine, the effective dose range of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets in these patients is 500 to 1000 mg/day. As with other valproate products, doses of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be individualized and dose adjustment may be necessary. If a patient requires smaller dose adjustments than that available with divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets should be used instead.

2.4 Conversion from Divalproex Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets to Divalproex Sodium Extended-Release Tablets

In adult patients and pediatric patients 10 years of age or older with epilepsy previously receiving divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be administered once-daily using a dose 8 to 20% higher than the total daily dose of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets (Table 1). For patients whose divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose cannot be directly converted to divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, consideration may be given at the clinician’s discretion to increase the patient’s divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets.

Table 1. Dose Conversion
Divalproex Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets Total Daily Dose (mg) Divalproex Sodium Extended-Release Tablets (mg) 500* - 625 750 750* - 875 1000 1000*-1125 1250 1250-1375 1500 1500-1625 1750 1750 2000 1875-2000 2250 2125-2250 2500 2375 2750 2500-2750 3000 2875 3250 3000-3125 3500
*   These total daily doses of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets cannot be directly converted to an 8 to 20% higher total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets because the required dosing strengths of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are not available. Consideration may be given at the clinician's discretion to increase the patient's divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets.

There is insufficient data to allow a conversion factor recommendation for patients with divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets doses above 3125 mg/day. Plasma valproate Cmin concentrations for divalproex sodium extended-release tablets on average are equivalent to divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, but may vary across patients after conversion. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL) [see Clinical Pharmacology(12.2)].

2.5 General Dosing Advice

Dosing in Elderly Patients

Due to a decrease in unbound clearance of valproate and possibly a greater sensitivity to somnolence in the elderly, the starting dose should be reduced in these patients. Starting doses in the elderly lower than 250mg can only be achieved by the use of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets. Dosage should be increased more slowly and with regular monitoring for fluid and nutritional intake, dehydration, somnolence, and other adverse reactions. Dose reductions or discontinuation of valproate should be considered in patients with decreased food or fluid intake and in patients with excessive somnolence. The ultimate therapeutic dose should be achieved on the basis of both tolerability and clinical response [see Warnings and Precautions(5.14), Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology(12.3)].

Dose-Related Adverse Reactions

The frequency of adverse effects (particularly elevated liver enzymes and thrombocytopenia) may be dose-related. The probability of thrombocytopenia appears to increase significantly at total valproate concentrations of ≥ 110 mcg/mL (females) or ≥ 135 mcg/mL (males) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)]. The benefit of improved therapeutic effect with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

G.I. Irritation

Patients who experience G.I. irritation may benefit from administration of the drug with food or by slowly building up the dose from an initial low level.

Compliance

Patients should be informed to take divalproex sodium extended-release tablets every day as prescribed. If a dose is missed it should be taken as soon as possible, unless it is almost time for the next dose. If a dose is skipped, the patient should not double the next dose.
Aspirin Enteric Coated

Aspirin Enteric Coated

2.1 Acute Coronary Syndrome

Clopidogrel tablets can be administered with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
For patients with non-ST-elevation ACS (UA/NSTEMI), initiate clopidogrel tablets with a single 300 mg oral loading dose and then continue at 75 mg once daily. Initiate aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily) and continue in combination with clopidogrel tablets [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. For patients with STEMI, the recommended dose of clopidogrel is 75 mg once daily orally, administered in combination with aspirin (75 to 325 mg once daily), with or without thrombolytics. Clopidogrel may be initiated with or without a loading dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].
2.2 Recent MI, Recent Stroke, or Established Peripheral Arterial Disease

The recommended daily dose of clopidogrel is 75 mg once daily orally, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 CYP2C19 Poor Metabolizers

CYP2C19 poor metabolizer status is associated with diminished antiplatelet response to clopidogrel. Although a higher dose regimen in poor metabolizers increases antiplatelet response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.5)], an appropriate dose regimen for this patient population has not been established.

2.4 Use with Proton Pump Inhibitors (PPI)

Avoid using omeprazole or esomeprazole with clopidogrel. Omeprazole and esomeprazole significantly reduce the antiplatelet activity of clopidogrel. When concomitant administration of a PPI is required, consider using another acid-reducing agent with minimal or no CYP2C19 inhibitory effect on the formation of clopidogrel active metabolite [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Flormar Delicious Lipst...

Flormar Delicious Lipstick Stylo Sunscreen Broad Spectrum Spf 15 Ds03 Doll Photomontage

Escitalopram tablets, USP should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adolescents

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets, USP is 10 mg once daily. A flexible-dose trial of escitalopram tablets, USP (10 to 20 mg/day) demonstrated the effectiveness of escitalopram tablets, USP [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of three weeks.

Adults

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets, USP is 10 mg once daily. A fixed-dose trial of escitalopram oxalate demonstrated the effectiveness of both 10 mg and 20 mg of escitalopram oxalate, but failed to demonstrate a greater benefit of 20 mg over 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of continuing escitalopram oxalate 10 or 20 mg/day in adults patients with major depressive disorder who responded while taking escitalopram oxalate during an 8-week, acute-treatment phase demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use escitalopram oxalate for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adults

The recommended starting dose of escitalopram tablets, USP is 10 mg once daily. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

Generalized anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition. The efficacy of escitalopram oxalate in the treatment of GAD beyond 8 weeks has not been systematically studied. The physician who elects to use escitalopram oxalate for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Special Populations

10 mg/day is the recommended dose for most elderly patients and patients with hepatic impairment.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Escitalopram tablets, USP should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

2.4 Discontinuation of Treatment with Escitalopram Tablets, USP

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of escitalopram tablets, USP and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with escitalopram tablets, USP. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping escitalopram tablets, USP before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.6 Use of Escitalopram Tablet, USP with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start escitalopram tablets, USP in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving escitalopram tablets, USP therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, escitalopram tablets, USP should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with escitalopram tablets, USP may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with escitalopram tablets, USP is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Major Regular Strength ...

Major Regular Strength Assorted Flavors

• Chew 2-4 tablets as symptoms occur, or as directed by a doctor.
Good Neighbor Pharmacy ...

Good Neighbor Pharmacy Sinus Relief

Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsule USP, 0.4 mg once daily is recommended as the dose for the treatment of the signs and symptoms of BPH. It should be administered approximately one-half hour following the same meal each day.

For those patients who fail to respond to the 0.4 mg dose after 2 to 4 weeks of dosing, the dose of tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, USP can be increased to 0.8 mg once daily. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, USP 0.4 mg should not be used in combination with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (e.g., ketoconazole) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

If tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, USP administration is discontinued or interrupted for several days at either the 0.4 mg or 0.8 mg dose, therapy should be started again with the 0.4 mg once-daily dose.
Tussin Cf Maximum Stren...

Tussin Cf Maximum Strength

■ drink a full glass of water with each dose

■ adults and children 12 years and over: take 4 to 8 tablets every 4 hours not to exceed 48 tablets in 24 hours unless directed by a doctor

■ children under 12 years: consult a doctor
Dove Men Plus Care Clea...

Dove Men Plus Care Clean Comfort Antiperspirant

• find right dose on chart below • use only enclosed dosing cup designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device. • take every 4 to 6 hours • do not take more than 6 doses in 24 hours
Age (yr)

Dose

children under 2 years

do not use

children 2 to 5 years

do not use unless directed by a doctor

children 6 to 11 years

5 to 10 mL (1 to 2 tsp)

Attention: use only enclosed dosing cup designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device
Atorvastatin Calcium

Atorvastatin Calcium

2.1 Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin calcium tablets should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin calcium tablets, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 years of age)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines, Clinical Pharmacology (12), and Indications and Usage (1.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The dosage of atorvastatin calcium tablets in patients with homozygous FH is 10 to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. The combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates should generally be used with caution [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

2.5 Dosage in Patients With Renal Impairment

Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors

In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), therapy with atorvastatin should be avoided. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, caution should be used when prescribing atorvastatin and the lowest dose necessary employed. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, therapy with atorvastatin should be limited to 20 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, therapy with atorvastatin should be limited to 40 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].
Butalbital Compound

Butalbital Compound

One or two tablets every 4 hours. Total daily dose should not exceed 6 tablets.
Azo Gesic

Azo Gesic

Directions
Adults: Take 2 tablets 3 times daily with or after meals as needed for up to two days. Take with a full glass of water. Do not use for more than 2 days (12 tablets) without consulting a doctor. Children under 12: Do not use without consulting a doctor. See enclosed insert for more information
Ibuprofen

Ibuprofen

• do not take more than directed • the smallest effective dose should be used
adults and children 12 years and

older
• take 1 caplet every 4 to 6 hours while symptoms persist • if pain or fever does not respond to 1 caplet, 2 caplets may be used • do not exceed 6 caplets in 24 hours, unless directed by a doctor
children under 12 years
• ask a doctor
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

may be taken with or without water adults and children 6 years and over one 10 mg tablet once daily; do not take more than one 10 mg tablet in 24 hours. A 5 mg product may be appropriate for less severe symptoms. adults 65 years and over ask a doctor children under 6 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Other information
Store between 20 to 25 C (68 to 77 F) See end flap for expiration date and lot number
Ropinirole Hydrochlorid...

Ropinirole Hydrochloride

General Dosing Considerations for Parkinson’s Disease and RLS

Ropinirole hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food. Patients may be advised that taking ropinirole hydrochloride tablets with food may reduce the occurrence of nausea. However, this has not been established in controlled clinical trials.

If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole hydrochloride has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.

Geriatric Use

Pharmacokinetic studies demonstrated a reduced clearance of ropinirole in the elderly (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Dose adjustment is not necessary since the dose is individually titrated to clinical response.

Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole were not altered in patients with moderate renal impairment (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Therefore, no dosage adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment. The use of ropinirole hydrochloride in patients with severe renal impairment has not been studied.

Hepatic Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole have not been studied in patients with hepatic impairment. Since patients with hepatic impairment may have higher plasma levels and lower clearance, ropinirole hydrochloride should be titrated with caution in these patients.

Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level and gradually titrated to therapeutic response. The dosage should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of nausea, dizziness, somnolence, and dyskinesia.

The recommended starting dose for Parkinson’s disease is 0.25 mg 3 times daily. Based on individual patient response, dosage should then be titrated with weekly increments as described in Table 5. After week 4, if necessary, daily dosage may be increased by 1.5 mg/day on a weekly basis up to a dose of 9 mg/day, and then by up to 3 mg/day weekly to a total dose of 24 mg/day. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been tested in clinical trials.
Table 5. Ascending-Dose Schedule of Ropinirole Hydrochloride Tablets for Parkinson’s Disease Week Dosage Total Daily Dose 1 0.25 mg 3 times daily 0.75 mg 2 0.5 mg 3 times daily 1.5 mg 3 0.75 mg 3 times daily 2.25 mg 4 1 mg 3 times daily 3 mg
When ropinirole hydrochloride tablets are administered as adjunct therapy to L-dopa, the concurrent dose of L-dopa may be decreased gradually as tolerated. L-dopa dosage reduction was allowed during the advanced Parkinson’s disease (with L-dopa) study if dyskinesias or other dopaminergic effects occurred. Overall, reduction of L-dopa dose was sustained in 87% of patients treated with ropinirole hydrochloride and in 57% of patients on placebo. On average the L-dopa dose was reduced by 31% in patients treated with ropinirole hydrochloride.

Ropinirole hydrochloride tablets for Parkinson’s disease patients should be discontinued gradually over a 7 day period. The frequency of administration should be reduced from 3 times daily to twice daily for 4 days. For the remaining 3 days, the frequency should be reduced to once daily prior to complete withdrawal of ropinirole hydrochloride tablets.

Dosing for Restless Legs Syndrome

In all clinical trials, the dose for ropinirole was initiated at 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. Patients were titrated based on clinical response and tolerability.

The recommended adult starting dosage for RLS is 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. After 2 days, the dosage can be increased to 0.5 mg once daily and to 1 mg once daily at the end of the first week of dosing, then as shown in Table 6 as needed to achieve efficacy. For RLS, the safety and effectiveness of doses greater than 4 mg once daily have not been established.
Table 6. Dose Titration Schedule for RLS Day/Week Dosage to be taken once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime Days 1 and 2 0.25 mg Days 3 to 7 0.5 mg Week 2 1 mg Week 3 1.5 mg Week 4 2 mg Week 5 2.5 mg Week 6 3 mg Week 7 4 mg
In clinical trials of patients being treated for RLS with doses up to 4 mg once daily, ropinirole was discontinued without a taper.
Topiramate

Topiramate

Epilepsy

In the controlled add-on trials, no correlation has been demonstrated between trough plasma concentrations of topiramate and clinical efficacy. No evidence of tolerance has been demonstrated in humans. Doses above 400 mg/day (600, 800 or 1000 mg/day) have not been shown to improve responses in dose-response studies in adults with partial onset seizures.

It is not necessary to monitor topiramate plasma concentrations to optimize topiramate tablet therapy. On occasion, the addition of topiramate tablets to phenytoin may require an adjustment of the dose of phenytoin to achieve optimal clinical outcome. Addition or withdrawal of phenytoin and/or carbamazepine during adjunctive therapy with topiramate tablets may require adjustment of the dose of topiramate tablets. Because of the bitter taste, tablets should not be broken.

Topiramate tablets can be taken without regard to meals.

Monotherapy Use

The recommended dose for topiramate tablet monotherapy in adults and children 10 years of age and older is 400 mg/day in two divided doses. Approximately 58% of patients randomized to 400 mg/day achieved this maximal dose in the monotherapy controlled trial; the mean dose achieved in the trial was 275 mg/day. The dose should be achieved by titrating according to the following schedule:
Morning Dose Evening Dose Week 1 25 mg 25 mg Week 2 50 mg 50 mg Week 3 75 mg 75 mg Week 4 100 mg 100 mg Week 5 150 mg 150 mg Week 6 200 mg 200 mg
Adjunctive Therapy Use

Adults (17 Years of Age and Over) - Partial Seizures, Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures or Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome

The recommended total daily dose of topiramate tablets as adjunctive therapy in adults with partial seizures is 200 to 400 mg/day in two divided doses, and 400 mg/day in two divided doses as adjunctive treatment in adults with primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures. It is recommended that therapy be initiated at 25 to 50 mg/day followed by titration to an effective dose in increments of 25 to 50 mg/week. Titrating in increments of 25 mg/week may delay the time to reach an effective dose. Daily doses above 1600 mg have not been studied.

In the study of primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures the initial titration rate was slower than in previous studies; the assigned dose was reached at the end of 8 weeks (see CLINICAL STUDIES: Adjunctive Therapy Controlled Trials in Patients with Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures).

Pediatric Patients (Ages 2 to 16 Years) - Partial Seizures, Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures or Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome

The recommended total daily dose of topiramate tablets as adjunctive therapy for patients with partial seizures, primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures or seizures associated with Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome is approximately 5 to 9 mg/kg/day in two divided doses. Titration should begin at 25 mg (or less, based on a range of 1 to 3 mg/kg/day) nightly for the first week. The dosage should then be increased at 1- or 2-week intervals by increments of 1 to 3 mg/kg/day (administered in two divided doses), to achieve optimal clinical response. Dose titration should be guided by clinical outcome.

In the study of primary generalized tonic-clonic seizures the initial titration rate was slower than in previous studies; the assigned dose of 6 mg/kg/day was reached at the end of 8 weeks (see CLINICAL STUDIES: Adjunctive Therapy Controlled Trial in Patients with Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures).

Patients with Renal Impairment

In renally impaired subjects (creatinine clearance less than 70 mL/min/1.73m2), one-half of the usual adult dose is recommended. Such patients will require a longer time to reach steady-state at each dose.

Geriatric Patients (Ages 65 Years and Over)

Dosage adjustment may be indicated in the elderly patient when impaired renal function (creatinine clearance rate ≤ 70 mL/min/1.73 m2) is evident (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Patients with Renal Impairment and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Special Populations: Age, Gender, and Race).

Patients Undergoing Hemodialysis

Topiramate is cleared by hemodialysis at a rate that is 4 to 6 times greater than a normal individual. Accordingly, a prolonged period of dialysis may cause topiramate concentration to fall below that required to maintain an anti-seizure effect. To avoid rapid drops in topiramate plasma concentration during hemodialysis, a supplemental dose of topiramate may be required. The actual adjustment should take into account 1) the duration of dialysis period, 2) the clearance rate of the dialysis system being used, and 3) the effective renal clearance of topiramate in the patient being dialyzed.

Patients with Hepatic Disease

In hepatically impaired patients topiramate plasma concentrations may be increased. The mechanism is not well understood.
Fexofenadine Hydrochlor...

Fexofenadine Hydrochloride

2.1 Fexofenadine Hydrochloride Tablets

Seasonal Allergic Rhinitis and Chronic Idiopathic Urticaria

Adults and Children 12 Years and Older: The recommended dose of fexofenadine hydrochloride tablets is 60 mg twice daily or 180 mg once daily with water. A dose of 60 mg once daily is recommended as the starting dose in patients with decreased renal function [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Children 6 to 11 Years: The recommended dose of fexofenadine hydrochloride tablets is 30 mg twice daily with water. A dose of 30 mg once daily is recommended as the starting dose in pediatric patients with decreased renal function [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Hypertension

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily in single or divided doses, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. The effective dosage range is 100 to 450 mg per day. Dosages above 450 mg per day have not been studied. While once-daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, lower doses (especially 100 mg) may not maintain a full effect at the end of the 24-hour period, and larger or more frequent daily doses may be required. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. Beta1 selectivity diminishes as the dose of metoprolol tartrate is increased.

Angina Pectoris

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in two divided doses. The dosage may be gradually increased at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The effective dosage range is 100 to 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, the dosage should be reduced gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks (see WARNINGS).

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with metoprolol tartrate can be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Treatment in this early phase should begin with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; the injections should be given at approximately 2-minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol tartrate, blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram should be carefully monitored.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, should be initiated 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continued for 48 hours. Thereafter, patients should receive a maintenance dosage of 100 mg twice daily (see Late Treatment below).

Patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, treatment with metoprolol tartrate should be discontinued (see WARNINGS).

Late Treatment

Patients with contraindications to treatment during the early phase of suspected or definite myocardial infarction, patients who appear not to tolerate the full early treatment, and patients in whom the physician wishes to delay therapy for any other reason should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets, 100 mg twice daily, as soon as their clinical condition allows. Therapy should be continued for at least 3 months. Although the efficacy of metoprolol tartrate beyond 3 months has not been conclusively established, data from studies with other beta-blockers suggest that treatment should be continued for 1 to 3 years.
Digoxin

Digoxin

General: Recommended dosages of digoxin may require considerable modification because of individual sensitivity of the patient to the drug, the presence of associated conditions, or the use of concurrent medications. In selecting a dose of digoxin, the following factors must be considered:
The body weight of the patient. Doses should be calculated based upon lean (i.e., ideal) body weight. The patient's renal function, preferably evaluated on the basis of estimated creatinine clearance. The patient's age. Infants and children require different doses of digoxin than adults. Also, advanced age may be indicative of diminished renal function even in patients with normal serum creatinine concentration (i.e., below 1.5 mg/dL). Concomitant disease states, concurrent medications, or other factors likely to alter the pharmacokinetic or pharma-codynamic profile of digoxin (see PRECAUTIONS).

Serum Digoxin Concentrations: In general, the dose of digoxin used should be determined on clinical grounds. However, measurement of serum digoxin concentrations can be helpful to the clinician in determining the adequacy of digoxin therapy and in assigning certain probabilities to the likelihood of digoxin intoxication. About two-thirds of adults considered adequately digitalized (without evidence of toxicity) have serum digoxin concentrations ranging from 0.8 to 2 ng/mL. However, digoxin may produce clinical benefits even at serum concentrations below this range. About two-thirds of adult patients with clinical toxicity have serum digoxin concentrations greater than 2 ng/mL. However, since one-third of patients with clinical toxicity have concentrations less than 2 ng/mL, values below 2 ng/mL do not rule out the possibility that a certain sign or symptom is related to digoxin therapy. Rarely, there are patients who are unable to tolerate digoxin at serum concentrations below 0.8 ng/mL. Consequently, the serum concentration of digoxin should always be interpreted in the overall clinical context, and an isolated measurement should not be used alone as the basis for increasing or decreasing the dose of the drug.

To allow adequate time for equilibration of digoxin between serum and tissue, sampling of serum concentrations should be done just before the next scheduled dose of the drug. If this is not possible, sampling should be done at least 6 to 8 hours after the last dose, regardless of the route of administration or the formulation used. On a once-daily dosing schedule, the concentration of digoxin will be 10% to 25% lower when sampled at 24 versus 8 hours, depending upon the patient's renal function. On a twice-daily dosing schedule, there will be only minor differences in serum digoxin concentrations whether sampling is done at 8 or 12 hours after a dose.

If a discrepancy exists between the reported serum concentration and the observed clinical response, the clinician should consider the following possibilities:
Analytical problems in the assay procedure. Inappropriate serum sampling time. Administration of a digitalis glycoside other than digoxin. Conditions (described in WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS) causing an alteration in the sensitivity of the patient to digoxin. Serum digoxin concentration may decrease acutely during periods of exercise without any associated change in clinical efficacy due to increased binding of digoxin to skeletal muscle.

Heart Failure: Adults: Digitalization may be accomplished by either of two general approaches that vary in dosage and frequency of administration, but reach the same endpoint in terms of total amount of digoxin accumulated in the body.
If rapid digitalization is considered medically appropriate, it may be achieved by administering a loading dose based upon projected peak digoxin body stores. Maintenance dose can be calculated as a percentage of the loading dose More gradual digitalization may be obtained by beginning an appropriate maintenance dose, thus allowing digoxin body stores to accumulate slowly. Steady-state serum digoxin concentrations will be achieved in approximately five half-lives of the drug for the individual patient. Depending upon the patient's renal function, this will take between 1 and 3 weeks.

Rapid Digitalization with a Loading Dose: Peak digoxin body stores of 8 to 12 mcg/kg should provide therapeutic effect with minimum risk of toxicity in most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm. Because of altered digoxin distribution and elimination, projected peak body stores for patients with renal insufficiency should be conservative (i.e., 6 to 10 mcg/kg) [see PRECAUTIONS].

The loading dose should be administered in several portions, with roughly half the total given as the first dose. Additional fractions of this planned total dose may be given at 6- to-8-hour intervals, with careful assessment of clinical response before each additional dose. If the patient's clinical response necessitates a change from the calculated loading dose of digoxin, then calculation of the maintenance dose should be based upon the amount actually given.

A single initial dose of 500 to 750 mcg (0.5 to 0.75 mg) of digoxin tablets usually produces a detectable effect in 0.5 to 2 hours that becomes maximal in 2 to 6 hours. Additional doses of 125 to 375 mcg (0.125 to 0.375 mg) may be given cautiously at 6-to 8-hour intervals until clinical evidence of an adequate effect is noted. The usual amount of digoxin tablets that a 70 kg patient requires to achieve 8 to 12 mcg/kg peak body stores is 750 to 1250 mcg (0.75 to 1.25 mg).

Digoxin Injection is frequently used to achieve rapid digitalization with conversion to digoxin tablets or digoxin solution in capsules for maintenance therapy. If patients are switched from intravenous to oral digoxin formulations, allowances must be made for differences in bioavailability when calculating maintenance dosages (see Table 1, CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Maintenance Dosing: The doses of digoxin used in controlled trials in patients with heart failure have ranged from 125 to 500 mcg (0.125 to 0.5 mg) once daily. In these studies, the digoxin dose has been generally titrated according to the patient's age, lean body weight, and renal function. Therapy is generally initiated at a dose of 250 mcg (0.25 mg) once daily in patients under age 70 with good renal function, at a dose of 125 mcg (0.125 mg) once daily in patients over age 70 or with impaired renal function, and at a dose of 62.5 mcg (0.0625 mg) in patients with marked renal impairment. Doses may be increased every 2 weeks according to clinical response.

In a subset of approximately 1800 patients enrolled in the DIG trial (wherein dosing was based on an algorithm similar to that in Table 5) the mean (± SD) serum digoxin concentrations at 1 month and 12 months were 1.01 ± 0.47 ng/mL and 0.97 ± 0:43 ng/mL, respectively.

The maintenance dose should be based upon the percentage of the peak body stores lost each day through elimination. The following formula has had wide clinical use:
Maintenance Dose = Peak Body Stores (i.e., Loading Dose) x % Daily Loss 100 Where: % Daily Loss = 14 + Ccr/5 (Ccr is creatinine clearance, corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m2 body surface area.)
Table 5 provides average daily maintenance dose requirements of digoxin tablets for patients with heart failure based upon lean body weight and renal function:
Table 5: Usual Daily Maintenance Dose Requirements (mcg) of Digoxin for Estimated Peak Body Stores of 10 mcg/kg
* Ccr is creatinine clearance, corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m2 body surface area. For adults, if only serum creatinine concentrations (Scr) are available, a Ccr (corrected to 70 kg body weight) may be estimated in men as (140 - Age)/Scr. For women, this result should be multiplied by 0.85. Note: This equation cannot be used for estimating creatinine clearance in infants or children.

† lf no loading dose administered.

‡ 62.5 mcg = 0.0625 mg
Corrected Ccr Lean Body Weight Number of (mL/min kg 50 60 70 80 90 100 Days Before per 70 kg)* lb 110 132 154 176 198 220 Steady State Achieved† 0 62.5‡ 125 125 125 187.5 187.5 22 10 125 125 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 19 20 125 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 250 16 30 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 250 250 14 40 125 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 13 50 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 250 12 60 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 375 11 70 187.5 250 250 250 250 375 10 80 187.5 250 250 250 375 375 9 90 187.5 250 250 250 375 500 8 100 250 250 250 375 375 500 7

Example: Based on Table 5, a patient in heart failure with an estimated lean body weight of 70 kg and a Ccr of 60 mL/min should be given a dose of 250 mcg (0.25 mg) daily of digoxin tablets, usually taken after the morning meal. If no loading dose is administered, steady-state serum concentrations in this patient should be anticipated at approximately 11 days.

Infants and Children: In general, divided daily dosing is recommended for infants and young children (under age 10). In the newborn period, renal clearance of digoxin is diminished and suitable dosage adjustments must be observed. This is especially pronounced in the premature infant. Beyond the immediate newborn period, children generally require proportionally larger doses than adults on the basis of body weight or body surface area. Children over 10 years of age require adult dosages in proportion to their body weight. Some researchers have suggested that infants and young children tolerate slightly higher serum concentrations than do adults.

Daily maintenance doses for each age group are given in Table 6 and should provide therapeutic effects with minimum risk of toxicity in most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm. These recommendations assume the presence of normal renal function:
Table 6: Daily Maintenance Doses in Children with Normal Renal Function Age Daily Maintenance Dose (mcg/kg) 2 to 5 Years 10 to 15 5 to 10 Years 7 to 10 Over 10 Years 3 to 5
In children with renal disease, digoxin must be carefully; titrated; based upon clinical response.

It cannot be overemphasized that both the adult and pediatric dosage guidelines provided are based upon average patient response and substantial individual variation can be expected. Accordingly, ultimate dosage selection must be based upon clinical assessment of the patient.

Atrial Fibrillation: Peak digoxin body stores larger than the 8 to 12 mcg/kg required for most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm have been used for control of ventricular rate in patients with atrial fibrillation. Doses of digox-in used for the treatment of chronic atrial fibrillation should be titrated to the minimum dose that achieves the desired ventricular rate control without causing undesirable side effects. Data are not available to establish the appropriate resting or exercise target rates that should be achieved.

Dosage Adjustment When Changing Preparations: The difference in bioavailability between digoxin injection or digoxin solution in capsules and digoxin pediatric elixir or digoxin tablets must be considered when changing patients from one dosage form to another.

Doses of 100 mcg (0.1. mg) and 200 mcg (0.2 mg) of digoxin solution in capsules are approximately equivalent to 125 mcg (0.125 mg) and 250 mcg (0.25 mg) doses of digoxin tablets and digoxin pediatric elixir, respectively (see Table 1 in CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride Extended Release

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily doses. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10-16 years of age). The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets in adults is 2000 mg.

Metformin hydrochloride tablets should be given in divided doses with meals while metformin hydrochloride extended release tablets should generally be given once daily with the evening meal. Metformin hydrochloride tablets should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin hydrochloride tablets or metformin hydrochloride extended release tablets and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets or metformin hydrochloride extended release tablets, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole and never crushed or chewed. Occasionally, the inactive ingredients of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets will be eliminated in the feces as a soft, hydrated mass (see PATIENT INFORMATION printed below).

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults - In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin hydrochloride tablets may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets is 500 mg once daily with the evening meal. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly, up to a maximum of 2000 mg once daily with the evening meal. If glycemic control is not achieved on metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets 2000 mg once daily, a trial of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets 1000 mg twice daily should be considered. If higher doses of metformin are required, metformin hydrochloride tablets should be used at total daily doses up to 2550 mg administered in divided daily doses, as described above. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies.)

In a randomized trial, patients currently treated with metformin hydrochloride tablets were switched to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets. Results of this trial suggest that patients receiving metformin hydrochloride tablets treatment may be safely switched to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets once daily at the same total daily dose, up to 2000 mg once daily. Following a switch from metformin hydrochloride tablets to metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets, glycemic control should be closely monitored and dosage adjustments made accordingly (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies).

Pediatrics - The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Safety and effectiveness of metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets in pediatric patients have not been established.

Transfer From Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy In Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin hydrochloride tablets and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin hydrochloride tablets 500mg and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken (see Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea).

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin.

Concomitant Metformin and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin therapy. Metformin therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin hydrochloride tablets and 2000 mg for metformin hydrochloride extended-release tablets. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin is not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin hydrochloride tablets are not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years. Metformin hydrochloride extended release tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients (below the age of 17 years).

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride tablets or metformin hydrochloride extended release tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets and metformin hydrochloride extended release tablets.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in geriatric patients (see WARNINGS).
Buspirone Hydrochloride...

Buspirone Hydrochloride

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg daily (7.5 mg b.i.d.). To achieve an optimal therapeutic response, at intervals of 2 to 3 days the dosage may be increased 5 mg per day, as needed. The maximum daily dosage should not exceed 60 mg per day. In clinical trials allowing dose titration, divided doses of 20 to 30 mg per day were commonly employed.

The bioavailability of buspirone is increased when given with food as compared to the fasted state (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Consequently, patients should take buspirone in a consistent manner with regard to the timing of dosing; either always with or always without food.

When buspirone is to be given with a potent inhibitor of CYP3A4 the dosage recommendations described in the PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions section should be followed.
Neomycin Sulfate

Neomycin Sulfate

To minimize the risk of toxicity, use the lowest possible dose and the shortest possible treatment period to control the condition. Treatment for periods longer than two weeks is not recommended.

Hepatic coma

For use as an adjunct in the management of hepatic coma, the recommended dose is 4-12 grams per day given in the following regimen:
Withdraw protein from diet. Avoid use of diuretic agents. Give supportive therapy, including blood products, as indicated. Give Neomycin Sulfate Tablets in doses of 4-12 grams of neomycin sulfate per day (eight to 24 tablets) in divided doses. Treatment should be continued over a period of five to six days, during which time protein should be returned incrementally to the diet. If less potentially toxic drugs cannot be used for chronic hepatic insufficiency, neomycin in doses of up to four grams daily (eight tablets per day) may be necessary. The risk for the development of neomycin-induced toxicity progressively increases when treatment must be extended to preserve the life of a patient with hepatic encephalopathy who has failed to fully respond. Frequent periodic monitoring of these patients to ascertain the presence of drug toxicity is mandatory (see PRECAUTIONS). Also, neomycin serum concentrations should be monitored to avoid potentially toxic levels. The benefits to the patient should be weighed against the risks of nephrotoxicity, permanent ototoxicity and neuromuscular blockade following the accumulation of neomycin in the tissues.
Preoperative Prophylaxis for Elective Colorectal Surgery

Listed below is an example of a recommended bowel preparation regimen. A proposed surgery time of 8:00 a.m. has been used.

Pre-op Day 3: Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Bisacodyl, 1 tablet orally at 6:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 2: Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m., 2:00 p.m., and 6:00 p.m. Enema at 7:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 1: Clear liquid diet. Supplemental (IV) fluids as needed. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m., and 2:00 p.m. Neomycin sulfate (1 g) and erythromycin base (1 g) orally at 1:00 p.m., 2:00 p.m. and 11:00 p.m. No enema.

Day of Operation: Patient evacuates rectum at 6:30 a.m. for scheduled operation at 8:00 a.m.
Spironolactone

Spironolactone

Primary Hyperaldosteronism: Spironolactone may be employed as an initial diagnostic measure to provide presumptive evidence of primary hyperaldosteronism while patients are on normal diets.

Long Test:Spironolactone is administered at a daily dosage of 400 mg for three to four weeks. Correction of hypokalemia and of hypertension provides presumptive evidence for the diagnosis of primary hyperaldosteronism.

Short Test: Spironolactone is administered at a daily dosage of 400 mg for four days. If serum potassium increases during spironolactone administration but drops when spironolactone is discontinued, a presumptive diagnosis of primary hyperaldosteronism should be considered.

After the diagnosis of hyperaldosteronism has been established by more definitive testing procedures, spironolactone may be administered in doses of 100 to 400 mg daily in preparation for surgery. For patients who are considered unsuitable for surgery, spironolactone may be employed for long-term maintenance therapy at the lowest effective dosage determined for the individual patient.

Edema In Adults (Congestive Heart Failure, Hepatic Cirrhosis, Or Nephrotic Syndrome). An initial daily dosage of 100 mg of spironolactone administered in either single or divided doses is recommended, but may range from 25 to 200 mg daily. When given as the sole agent for diuresis, spironolactone should be continued for at least five days at the initial dosage level, after which it may be adjusted to the optimal therapeutic or maintenance level administered in either single or divided daily doses. If, after five days, an adequate diuretic response to spironolactone has not occurred, a second diuretic which acts more proximally in the renal tubule may be added to the regimen. Because of the additive effect of spironolactone when administered concurrently with such diuretics, an enhanced diuresis usually begins on the first day of combined treatment; combined therapy is indicated when more rapid diuresis is desired. The dosage of spironolactone should remain unchanged when other diuretic therapy is added.

Essential Hypertension: For adults, an initial daily dosage of 50 to 100 mg of spironolactone administered in either single or divided doses is recommended. Spironolactone may also be given with diuretics which act more proximally in the renal tubule or with other antihypertensive agents. Treatment with spironolactone should be continued for at least two weeks, since the maximum response may not occur before this time. Subsequently, dosage should be adjusted according to the response of the patient.

Hypokalemia: Spironolactone in a dosage ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg daily is useful in treating a diuretic-induced hypokalemia, when oral potassium supplements or other potassium-sparing regimens are considered inappropriate.

Severe heart failure (NYHA class III – IV): Treatment should be initiated with spironolactone 25 mg once daily if the patient’s serum potassium is ≤5.0 mEq/L and the patient’s serum creatinine is ≤ 2.5 mg/dL. Patients who tolerate 25 mg once daily may have their dosage increased to 50 mg once daily as clinically indicated. Patients who do not tolerate 25 mg once-daily dose may have their dosage reduced to 25 mg every other day. See WARNINGS: Hyperkalemia in patients with severe heart failure for advice on monitoring serum potassium and serum creatinine.
Methotrexate

Methotrexate

Neoplastic Diseases

Oral administration in tablet form is often preferred when low doses are being administered since absorption is rapid and effective serum levels are obtained.

Choriocarcinoma and similar trophoblastic diseases: Methotrexate is administered orally or intramuscularly in doses of 15 to 30 mg daily for a five-day course. Such courses are usually repeated for 3 to 5 times as required, with rest periods of one or more weeks interposed between courses, until any manifesting toxic symptoms subside. The effectiveness of therapy is ordinarily evaluated by 24 hour quantitative analysis of urinary chorionic gonadotropin (hCG), which should return to normal or less than 50 IU/24 hr usually after the third or fourth course and usually be followed by a complete resolution of measurable lesions in 4 to 6 weeks. One to two courses of methotrexate after normalization of hCG is usually recommended. Before each course of the drug careful clinical assessment is essential. Cyclic combination therapy of methotrexate with other antitumor drugs has been reported as being useful.

Since hydatidiform mole may precede choriocarcinoma, prophylactic chemotherapy with methotrexate has been recommended.

Chorioadenoma destruens is considered to be an invasive form of hydatidiform mole. Methotrexate is administered in these disease states in doses similar to those recommended for choriocarcinoma. Leukemia: Acute lymphoblastic leukemia in pediatric patients and young adolescents is the most responsive to present day chemotherapy. In young adults and older patients, clinical remission is more difficult to obtain and early relapse is more common.

Methotrexate alone or in combination with steroids was used initially for induction of remission in acute lymphoblastic leukemias. More recently corticosteroid therapy, in combination with other antileukemic drugs or in cyclic combinations with methotrexate included, has appeared to produce rapid and effective remissions. When used for induction, methotrexate in doses of 3.3 mg/m2 in combination with 60 mg/m2 of prednisone, given daily, produced remissions in 50% of patients treated, usually within a period of 4 to 6 weeks. Methotrexate in combination with other agents appears to be the drug of choice for securing maintenance of drug-induced remissions. When remission is achieved and supportive care has produced general clinical improvement, maintenance therapy is initiated, as follows: Methotrexate is administered 2 times weekly either by mouth or intramuscularly in total weekly doses of 30 mg/m2. It has also been given in doses of 2.5 mg/kg intravenously every 14 days. If and when relapse does occur, reinduction of remission can again usually be obtained by repeating the initial induction regimen.

A variety of combination chemotherapy regimens have been used for both induction and maintenance therapy in acute lymphoblastic leukemia. The physician should be familiar with the new advances in antileukemic therapy.

Lymphomas: In Burkitt’s tumor, Stages I-II, methotrexate has produced prolonged remissions in some cases. Recommended dosage is 10 to 25 mg/day orally for 4 to 8 days. In Stage III, methotrexate is commonly given concomitantly with other anti-tumor agents. Treatment in all stages usually consists of several courses of the drug interposed with 7 to 10 day rest periods. Lymphosarcomas in Stage III may respond to combined drug therapy with methotrexate given in doses of 0.625 to 2.5 mg/kg daily.

Mycosis Fungoides (cutaneous T cell lymphoma): Therapy with methotrexate as a single agent appears to produce clinical responses in up to 50% of patients treated. Dosage in early stages is usuallly 5 to 50 mg once weekly. Dose reduction or cessation is guided by patient response and hematologic monitoring. Methotrexate has also been administered twice weekly in doses ranging from 15 to 37.5 mg in patients who have responded poorly to weekly therapy.

Psoriasis, Rheumatoid Arthritis, and Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

Adult Rheumatoid Arthritis: Recommended Starting Dosage Schedules
Single oral doses of 7.5 mg once weekly. Divided oral dosages of 2.5 mg at 12 hour intervals for 3 doses given as a course once weekly
Polyarticular-Course Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis: The recommended starting dose is 10 mg/m2 given once weekly.

For either adult RA or polyarticular-course JRA dosages may be adjusted gradually to achieve an optimal response. Limited experience shows a significant increase in the incidence and severity of serious toxic reactions, especially bone marrow suppression, at doses greater than 20 mg/wk in adults. Although there is experience with doses up to 30 mg/m2/wk in children, there are too few published data to assess how doses over 20 mg/m2/wk might affect the risk of serious toxicity in children. Experience does suggest, however, that children receiving 20 to 30 mg/m2/wk (0.65 to 1.0 mg/kg/wk) may have better absorption and fewer gastrointestinal side effects if methotrexate is administered either intramuscularly or subcutaneously.

Therapeutic response usually begins within 3 to 6 weeks and the patient may continue to improve for another 12 weeks or more.

The optimal duration of therapy is unknown. Limited data available from long-term studies in adults indicate that the initial clinical improvement is maintained for at least two years with continued therapy. When methotrexate is discontinued, the arthritis usually worsens within 3 to 6 weeks.

The patient should be fully informed of the risks involved and should be under constant supervision of the physician. (See Information for Patients under PRECAUTIONS.) Assessment of hematologic, hepatic, renal, and pulmonary function should be made by history, physical examination, and laboratory tests before beginning, periodically during, and before reinstituting methotrexate therapy. (See PRECAUTIONS.) Appropriate steps should be taken to avoid conception during methotrexate therapy. (See PRECAUTIONS and CONTRAINDICATIONS.)

All schedules should be continually tailored to the individual patient. An initial test dose may be given prior to the regular dosing schedule to detect any extreme sensitivity to adverse effects. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.) Maximal myelosuppression usually occurs in seven to ten days.

Psoriasis: Recommended Starting Dose Schedules
Weekly single oral, IM or IV dose schedule: 10 to 25 mg per week until adequate response is achieved. Divided oral dose schedule: 2.5 mg at 12-hour intervals for three doses.
Dosages in each schedule may be gradually adjusted to achieve optimal clinical response; 30 mg/week should not ordinarily be exceeded.

Once optimal clinical response has been achieved, each dosage schedule should be reduced to the lowest possible amount of drug and to the longest possible rest period. The use of methotrexate may permit the return to conventional topical therapy, which should be encouraged.
Major Childrens Ibuprof...

Major Childrens Ibuprofen

this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use do not give more than directed do not give longer than 10 days, unless directed by a doctor (see Warnings) shake well before using find right dose on chart below. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise use age. use only with enclosed measuring cup if needed, repeat dose every 6-8 hours do not use more than 4 times a day replace original bottle cap to maintain child resistance wash dosage cup after each use Dosing Chart Weight (lb) Age(yrs) Dose (teaspoonful or mL) under 2 years ask a doctor 24-35 lbs 2-3 years 1 tsp or 5 mL 36-47 lbs 4-5 years 1 ½ tsp or 7.5 mL 48-59 lbs 6-8 years 2 tsp or 10 mL 60-71 lbs 9-10 years 2 ½ tsp or 12.5 mL 72-95 lbs 11 years 3 tsp or 15 mL
Ranitidine 75

Ranitidine 75

adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water 30 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn can be used up to twice daily (do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours) children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Bicalutamide

Bicalutamide

The recommended dose for bicalutamide therapy in combination with an LHRH analog is one 50 mg tablet once daily (morning or evening), with or without food. It is recommended that bicalutamide tablets be taken at the same time each day. Treatment with bicalutamide should be started at the same time as treatment with an LHRH analog.

2.1. Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.2. Dosage Adjustment in Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. In patients with severe liver impairment (n=4), although there was a 76% increase in the half-life (5.9 and 10.4 days for normal and impaired patients, respectively) of the active enantiomer of bicalutamide no dosage adjustment is necessary [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].
Nabumetone

Nabumetone

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of nabumetone and other treatment options before deciding to use nabumetone. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with nabumetone, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Osteoarthritis and Rheumatoid Arthritis

The recommended starting dose is 1000 mg taken as a single dose with or without food. Some patients may obtain more symptomatic relief from 1500 mg to 2000 mg per day. Nabumeton can be given in either a single or twice-daily dose. Dosages greater than 2000 mg per day have not been studied. The lowest effective dose should be used for chronic treatment (see WARNINGS, Renal Effects). Patients weighing under 50 kg may be less likely to require dosages beyond 1000 mg; therefore, after observing the response to initial therapy, the dose should be adjusted to meet individual patients’ requirements.
Potassium Chloride Solu...

Potassium Chloride Solution

To minimize gastrointestinal irritation, patients must follow direction regarding dilution. Each tablespoonful (15mL) should be diluted with three (3) fluid ounce or more of water or other liquid.

USUAL ADULT DOSE

One (1) tablespoonful (15mL) twice daily (after morning or evening meals) supplies 40 mEq of potassium.
Carvedilol

Carvedilol

Carvedilol tablets should be taken with food to slow the rate of absorption and reduce the incidence of orthostatic effects.

2.1 Heart Failure

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND CLOSELY MONITORED BY A PHYSICIAN DURING UP-TITRATION. Prior to initiation of carvedilol tablets, it is recommended that fluid retention be minimized. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol tablets is 3.125 mg twice daily for 2 weeks. If tolerated, patients may have their dose increased to 6.25, 12.5, and 25 mg twice daily over successive intervals of at least 2 weeks. Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. A maximum dose of 50 mg twice daily has been administered to patients with mild-to-moderate heart failure weighing over 85 kg (187 lbs).

Patients should be advised that initiation of treatment and (to a lesser extent) dosage increases may be associated with transient symptoms of dizziness or lightheadedness (and rarely syncope) within the first hour after dosing. During these periods, patients should avoid situations such as driving or hazardous tasks, where symptoms could result in injury. Vasodilatory symptoms often do not require treatment, but it may be useful to separate the time of dosing of carvedilol tablets from that of the ACE inhibitor or to reduce temporarily the dose of the ACE inhibitor. The dose of carvedilol tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure or vasodilation have been stabilized.

Fluid retention (with or without transient worsening heart failure symptoms) should be treated by an increase in the dose of diuretics.The dose of carvedilol tablets should be reduced if patients experience bradycardia (heart rate < 55 beats/minute).

Episodes of dizziness or fluid retention during initiation of carvedilol tablets can generally be managed without discontinuation of treatment and do not preclude subsequent successful titration of, or a favorable response to, carvedilol.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol tablets may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol tablets be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol tablets is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol tablets is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol tablets should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see Contraindications (4)].
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Patients controlled on diltiazem alone or in combination with other medications may be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Higher doses of diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be needed in some patients. Patients should be closely monitored. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may be necessary and should be initiated as clinically warranted. There is limited general clinical experience with doses above 360 mg, but doses to 540 mg have been studied in clinical trials. The incidence of side effects increases as the dose increases with first-degree AV block, dizziness, and sinus bradycardia bearing the strongest relationship to dose.

Hypertension: Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, reasonable starting doses are 180 to 240 mg once daily, although some patients may respond to lower doses. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 240 to 360 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 480 mg once daily.

Angina: Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient’s needs, starting with a dose of 120 or 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 480 mg once daily. When necessary, titration may be carried out over a 7- to 14-day period.

CONCOMITANT USE WITH OTHER CARDIOVASCULAR AGENTS:

1. Sublingual NTG - May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules therapy.

2. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy - Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be safely coadministered with short-and long-acting nitrates.

3. Beta-Blockers: (See WARNINGSand PRECAUTIONS).

4. Antihypertensives - Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules have an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other.
Acyclovir

Acyclovir

Acute Treatment of Herpes Zoster: 800 mg every 4 hours orally, 5 times daily for 7 to 10 days.

Genital Herpes: Treatment of Initial Genital Herpes: 200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 10 days.

Chronic Suppressive Therapy for Recurrent Disease: 400 mg 2 times daily for up to 12 months, followed by re-evaluation. Alternative regimens have included doses ranging from 200 mg 3 times daily to 200 mg 5 times daily.

The frequency and severity of episodes of untreated genital herpes may change over time. After 1 year of therapy, the frequency and severity of the patient’s genital herpes infection should be re-evaluated to assess the need for continuation of therapy with acyclovir.

Intermittent Therapy: 200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 5 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom (prodrome) of recurrence.

Treatment of Chickenpox: Children (2 years of age and older): 20 mg/kg per dose orally 4 times daily (80 mg/kg/day) for 5 days. Children over 40 kg should receive the adult dose for chickenpox.

Adults and children over 40 kg: 800 mg 4 times daily for 5 days.

Intravenous acyclovir is indicated for the treatment of varicella-zoster infections in immunocompromised patients.

When therapy is indicated, it should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of chickenpox. There is no information about the efficacy of therapy initiated more than 24 hours after onset of signs and symptoms.

Patients with Acute or Chronic Renal Impairment: In patients with renal impairment, the dose of Acyclovir capsules and tablets should be modified as shown in Table 3:
Table 3: Dosage Modification for Renal Impairment Normal Dosage Creatinine Clearance Adjusted Dosage Regimen Regimen (mL/min/1.73 m2) Dose(mg) Dosing Interval 200 mg every > 10 200 every 4 hours, 5 times daily 4 hours 0 to 10 200 every 12 hours 400 mg every > 10 400 every 12 hours 12 hours 0 to 10 200 every 12 hours 800 mg every > 25 800 every 4 hours, 5 times daily 4 hours 10 to 25 800 every 8 hours 0 to 10 800 every 12 hours
Hemodialysis: For patients who require hemodialysis, the mean plasma half-life of acyclovir during hemodialysis is approximately 5 hours. This results in a 60% decrease in plasma concentrations following a 6-hour dialysis period. Therefore, the patient’s dosing schedule should be adjusted so that an additional dose is administered after each dialysis.

Peritoneal Dialysis: No supplemental dose appears to be necessary after adjustment of the dosing interval.

Bioequivalence of Dosage Forms: Acyclovir suspension was shown to be bioequivalent to acyclovir capsules (n = 20) and one acyclovir 800 mg tablet was shown to be bioequivalent to four acyclovir 200 mg capsules (n = 24).
Pravastatin Sodium

Pravastatin Sodium

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving pravastatin sodium and should continue on this diet during treatment with pravastatin sodium (see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy).

Pravastatin sodium can be administered orally as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

Adult Patients

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily. If a daily dose of 40 mg does not achieve desired cholesterol levels, 80 mg once daily is recommended. In patients with a history of significant renal or hepatic dysfunction, a starting dose of 10 mg daily is recommended.

Pediatric Patients

Children (Ages 8 to 13 Years, Inclusive)

The recommended dose is 20 mg once daily in children 8 to 13 years of age. Doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Adolescents (Ages 14 to 18 Years)

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily in adolescents 14 to 18 years of age. Doses greater than 40 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Children and adolescents treated with pravastatin should be reevaluated in adulthood and appropriate changes made to their cholesterol-lowering regimen to achieve adult goals for LDL-C (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE: Hyperlipidemia, NCEP Treatment Guidelines ).

In patients taking immunosuppressive drugs such as cyclosporine (see WARNINGS: Skeletal Muscle ) concomitantly with pravastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of pravastatin once-a-day at bedtime and titration to higher doses should be done with caution. Most patients treated with this combination received a maximum pravastatin dose of 20 mg/day.

Concomitant Therapy

The lipid-lowering effects of pravastatin sodium on total and LDL cholesterol are enhanced when combined with a bile-acid-binding resin. When administering a bile-acid-binding resin (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol) and pravastatin, pravastatin sodium should be given either 1 hour or more before or at least 4 hours following the resin. (See also ADVERSE REACTIONS: Concomitant Therapy .)
Paroxetine

Paroxetine

Major Depressive Disorder:

Usual Initial Dosage:

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended initial dose is 20 mg/day. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine in the treatment of major depressive disorder. As with all drugs effective in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the full effect may be delayed. Some patients not responding to a 20-mg dose may benefit from dose increases, in 10-mg/day increments, up to a maximum of 50 mg/day. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least 1 week.

Maintenance Therapy:

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine should remain on it. It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Systematic evaluation of the efficacy of paroxetine has shown that efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 1 year with doses that averaged about 30 mg.

Obsessive Compulsive Disorder:

Usual Initial Dosage:

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended dose of paroxetine in the treatment of OCD is 40 mg daily. Patients should be started on 20 mg/day and the dose can be increased in 10-mg/day increments. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least 1 week. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine in the treatment of OCD. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy:

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 6-month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with OCD assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY - Clinical Trials). OCD is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Panic Disorder:

Usual Initial Dosage:

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The target dose of paroxetine in the treatment of panic disorder is 40 mg/day. Patients should be started on 10 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10-mg/day increments and at intervals of at least 1 week. Patients were dosed in a range of 10 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy:

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 3-month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with panic disorder assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY -Clinical Trials). Panic disorder is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Social Anxiety Disorder:

Usual Initial Dosage:

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended and initial dosage is 20 mg/day. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day. While the safety of paroxetine has been evaluated in patients with social anxiety disorder at doses up to 60 mg/day, available information does not suggest any additional benefit for doses above 20 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY -Clinical Trials).

Maintenance Therapy:

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine should remain on it. Although the efficacy of paroxetine beyond 12 weeks of dosing has not been demonstrated in controlled clinical trials, social anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation of treatment for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Generalized Anxiety Disorder:

Usual Initial Dosage:

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day. The recommended starting dosage and the established effective dosage is 20 mg/day. There is not sufficient evidence to suggest a greater benefit to doses higher than 20 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least 1 week.

Maintenance Therapy:

Systematic evaluation of continuing paroxetine for periods of up to 24 weeks in patients with Generalized Anxiety Disorder who had responded while taking paroxetine during an 8-week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY - Clinical Trials). Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Posttraumatic Stress Disorder:

Usual Initial Dosage:

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended starting dosage and the established effective dosage is 20 mg/day. In one clinical trial, the effectiveness of paroxetine was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day. However, in a fixed dose study, there was not sufficient evidence to suggest a greater benefit for a dose of 40 mg/day compared to 20 mg/day. Dose changes, if indicated, should occur in 10 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least 1 week.

Maintenance Therapy:

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine should remain on it. Although the efficacy of paroxetine beyond 12 weeks of dosing has not been demonstrated in controlled clinical trials, PTSD is recognized as a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation of treatment for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Special Populations:

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester:

Neonates exposed to paroxetine and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see WARNINGS). When treating pregnant women with paroxetine during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. The physician may consider tapering paroxetine in the third trimester.

Dosage for Elderly or Debilitated Patients, and Patients With Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment:

The recommended initial dose is 10 mg/day for elderly patients, debilitated patients, and/or patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment. Increases may be made if indicated. Dosage should not exceed 40 mg/day.

Switching Patients to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor:

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of therapy with paroxetine. Similarly, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping paroxetine before starting an MAOI.

Discontinuation of Treatment With Paroxetine:

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of paroxetine have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment, regardless of the indication for which paroxetine is being prescribed. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Salsalate

Salsalate

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Salsalate tablet, USP and other treatment options before deciding to use Salsalate tablet, USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with Salsalate tablet, USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs. Salsalate is indicated for relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis and related rheumatic disorder.

Adults: The usual dosage is 3000 mg daily, given in divided doses as follows: 1) two doses of two 750 mg tablets; 2) two doses of three 500 mg tablets; or 3) three doses of two 500 mg tablets. Some patients, e.g., the elderly, may require a lower dosage to achieve therapeutic blood concentrations and to avoid the more common side effects such as auditory.

Alleviation of symptoms is gradual, and full benefit may not be evident for 3 to 4 days, when plasma salicylate levels have achieved steady state. There is no evidence for development of tissue tolerance (tachyphylaxis), but salicylate therapy may induce increased activity of metabolizing liver enzymes, causing a greater rate of salicyluric acid production and excretion, with a resultant increase in dosage requirement for maintenance of therapeutic serum salicylate levels.

Children: Dosage recommendations and indications for salsalate use in children have not been established.
Lithium Carbonate

Lithium Carbonate

Doses of extended-release tablets are usually given b.i.d. (approximately 12-hour intervals). When initiating therapy with extended-release lithium, dosage must be individualized according to serum levels and clinical response.

When switching a patient from immediate-release capsules to the lithium carbonate extended-release tablets, give the same total daily dose when possible. Most patients on maintenance therapy are stabilized on 900 mg daily, e.g., 450 mg lithium carbonate extended-release b.i.d. When the previous dosage of immediate-release lithium is not a multiple of 450 mg, for example, 1500 mg, initiate lithium extended-release tablet at the multiple of 450 mg nearest to, but below, the original daily dosage, i.e., 1350 mg. When the two doses are unequal, give the larger dose in the evening. In the above example, with a total daily dosage of 1350 mg, generally 450 mg lithium carbonate extended-release should be given in the morning and 900 mg lithium carbonate extended-release in the evening. If desired, the total daily dosage of 1350 mg can be given in three equal 450 mg lithium carbonate extended-release doses. These patients should be monitored at 1 to 2 week intervals, and dosage adjusted if necessary, until stable and satisfactory serum levels and clinical state are achieved.

When patients require closer titration than that available with doses of lithium carbonate extended-release in increments of 450 mg, immediate-release capsules should be used.

Acute Mania

Optimal patient response to lithium carbonate can usually be established and maintained with 1800 mg per day in divided doses. Such doses will normally produce the desired serum lithium level ranging between 1 and 1.5 mEq/L.

Dosage must be individualized according to serum levels and clinical response. Regular monitoring of the patient's clinical state and serum lithium levels is necessary. Serum levels should be determined twice per week during the acute phase, and until the serum level and clinical condition of the patient have been stabilized.

Long-Term Control

The desirable serum lithium levels are 0.6 to 1.2 mEq/L. Dosage will vary from one individual to another, but usually 900 mg to 1200 mg per day in divided doses will maintain this level. Serum lithium levels in uncomplicated cases receiving maintenance therapy during remission should be monitored at least every two months.

Patients unusually sensitive to lithium may exhibit toxic signs at serum levels below 1 mEq/L.

N.B.

Blood samples for serum lithium determinations should be drawn immediately prior to the next dose when lithium concentrations are relatively stable (i.e., 8 to 12 hours after the previous dose). Total reliance must not be placed on serum levels alone. Accurate patient evaluation requires both clinical and laboratory analysis.

Elderly patients often respond to reduced dosage, and may exhibit signs of toxicity at serum levels ordinarily tolerated by younger patients.
Isoniazid

Isoniazid

(See also INDICATIONS): NOTE: For preventive therapy of tuberculous infection and treatment of tuberculosis, it is recommended that physicians be familiar with the following publications: (1) the recommendations of the Advisory Council for the Elimination of Tuberculosis, published in the MMWR: vol 42; RR-4, 1993 and (2) Treatment of Tuberculosis and Tuberculosis Infection in Adults and Children, American Journal of Respiratory and Critical Care Medicine: vol 149; 1359-1374, 1994.

For Treatment of Tuberculosis - Isoniazid is used in conjunction with other effective anti-tuberculosis agents. Drug susceptibility testing should be performed on the organisms initially isolated from all patients with newly diagnosed tuberculosis. If the bacilli becomes resistant, therapy must be changed to agents to which the bacilli are susceptible.

Usual Oral Dosage (depending on the regimen used):
Adults: 5 mg/kg up to 300 mg daily in a single dose; or 15 mg/kg up to 900 mg day, two or three times/week Children: 10-15 mg/kg up to 300 mg daily in a single dose; or 20-40 mg/kg up to 900 mg/day, two or three time/week
Patients with Pulmonary Tuberculosis Without HIV Infection

There are 3 regimen options for the initial treatment of tuberculosis in children and adults:

Option 1: Daily isoniazid, rifampin, and pyrazinamide for 8 weeks followed by 16 weeks of isoniazid and rifampin daily or 2-3 times weekly. Ethambutol or streptomycin should be added to the initial regimen until sensitivity to isoniazid and rifampin is demonstrated. The addition of a fourth drug is optional if the relative prevalence of isoniazid-resistant Mycobacterium tuberculosis isolates in the community is less than or equal to four percent.

Option 2: Daily isoniazid, rifampin, pyrazinamide, and streptomycin or ethambutol for 2 weeks followed by twice weekly administration of the same drugs for 6 weeks, subsequently twice weekly isoniazid and rifampin for 16 weeks.

Option 3: Three times weekly with isoniazid, rifampin, pyrazinamide, and ethambutol or streptomycin for 6 months.

*All regimens given twice weekly or 3 times weekly should be administered by directly observed therapy (see also Directly Observed Therapy).

The above treatment guidelines apply only when the disease is caused by organisms that are susceptible to the standard antituberculous agents. Because of the impact of resistance to isoniazid and rifampin on the response to therapy, it is essential that physicians initiating therapy for tuberculosis be familiar with the prevalence of drug resistance in their communities. It is suggested that ethambutol not be used in children whose visual acuity cannot be monitored.

Patients with Pulmonary Tuberculosis and HIV Infection

The response of the immunologically impaired host to treatment may not be as satisfactory as that of a person with normal host responsiveness. For this reason, therapeutic decisions for the impaired host must be individualized. Since patients co-infected with HIV may have problems with malabsorption, screening of antimycobacterial drug levels, especially in patients with advanced HIV disease, may be necessary to prevent the emergence of MDRTB.

Patients with Extra pulmonary Tuberculosis

The basic principles that underlie the treatment of pulmonary tuberculosis also apply to Extra pulmonary forms of the disease. Although there have not been the same kinds of carefully conducted controlled trials of treatment of Extra pulmonary tuberculosis as for pulmonary disease, increasing clinical experience indicates that a 6 to 9 month short-course regimen is effective. Because of the insufficient data, miliary tuberculosis, bone/joint tuberculosis, and tuberculous meningitis in infants and children should receive 12 months therapy.

Bacteriologic evaluation of Extra pulmonary tuberculosis may be limited by the relative inaccessibility of the sites of disease. Thus, response to treatment often must be judged on the basis of clinical and radiographic findings.

The use of adjunctive therapies such as surgery and corticosteroids is more commonly required in Extra pulmonary tuberculosis than in pulmonary disease. Surgery may be necessary to obtain specimens for diagnosis and to treat such processes as constrictive pericarditis and spinal cord compression from Pott's Disease. Corticosteriods have been shown to be of benefit in preventing cardiac constriction from tuberculous pericarditis and in decreasing the neurologic sequelae of all stages of tuberculosis meningitis, especially when administered early in the course of the disease.

Pregnant Women with Tuberculosis

The options listed above must be adjusted for the pregnant patient. Streptomycin interferes with in utero development of the ear and may cause congenital deafness. Routine use of pyrazinamide is also not recommended in pregnancy because of inadequate teratogenicity data. The initial treatment regimen should consist of isoniazid and rifampin. Ethambutol should be included unless primary isoniazid resistance is unlikely (isoniazid resistance rate documented to be less than 4%).

Treatment of Patients with Multi-Drug Resistant Tuberculosis (MDRTB)

Multiple-drug resistant tuberculosis (i.e., resistance to at least isoniazid and rifampin) presents difficult treatment problems. Treatment must be individualized and based on susceptibility studies. In such cases, consultation with an expert in tuberculosis is recommended.

Directly Observed Therapy (DOT)

A major cause of drug-resistant tuberculosis is patient non-compliance with treatment. The use of DOT can help assure patient compliance with drug therapy. DOT is the observation of the patient by a health care provider or other responsible person as the patient ingests anti-tuberculosis medications. DOT can be achieved with daily, twice weekly or thrice weekly regimens, and is recommended for all patients.

For Preventative Therapy of Tuberculosis

Before isoniazid preventive therapy is initiated, bacteriologically positive or radiographically progressive tuberculosis must be excluded. Appropriate evaluations should be performed if Extra pulmonary tuberculosis is suspected.

Adults over 30 Kg: 300 mg per day in a single dose.

Infants and Children: 10 mg/kg (up to 300 mg daily) in a single dose. In situations where adherence with daily preventative therapy cannot be assured, 20-30 mg/kg (not to exceed 900 mg) twice weekly under the direct observation of a health care worker at the time of administration8.

Continuous administration of isoniazid for a sufficient period is an essential part of the regimen because relapse rates are higher if chemotherapy is stopped prematurely. In the treatment of tuberculosis, resistant organisms may multiply and the emergence of resistant organisms during the treatment may necessitate a change in the regimen.

For following patient compliance: the Potts-Cozart test9, a simple colorimetric6 method of checking for isoniazid in the urine, is a useful tool for assuring patient compliance, which is essential for effective tuberculosis control. Additionally, isoniazid test strips are also available to check patient compliance.

Concomitant administration of pyridoxine (B6) is recommended in the malnourished and in those predisposed to neuropathy (e.g., alcoholics and diabetics).
Methocarbamol

Methocarbamol

500 mg – Adults: Initial dosage, 3 tablets q.i.d.; maintenance dosage, 2 tablets q.i.d.750 mg – Adults: Initial dosage, 2 tablets q.i.d.; maintenance dosage, 1 tablet q.4h. or 2 tablets t.i.d.

Six grams a day are recommended for the first 48 to 72 hours of treatment. (For severe conditions 8 grams a day may be administered.) Thereafter, the dosage can usually be reduced to approximately 4 grams a day.
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron hydrochloride is 24 mg given as three 8-mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single-day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8 mg Ondansetron Hydrochloride Tablet given twice a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered twice a day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4 mg ondansetron tablet given three times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation, one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron hydrochloride tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of Ondansetron Hydrochloride Tablets in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8 mg Ondansetron Hydrochloride Tablets 1 hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of Ondansetron Hydrochloride Tablets in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Adult Glycerin Laxative...

Adult Glycerin Laxative

Adults and children 6 years of age and older: carefully insert one suppository well into the rectum Do not use more than once per day Generally produces a bowel movement in 15 minutes to 1 hour Children under 6 years of age: ask a doctor.
Mapap Infants Concentra...

Mapap Infants Concentrated

do not give more than directed (see Liver warning) shake well before using find right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise use age. use only enclosed dropper designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device. fill to dose level dispense liquid slowly into child’s mouth, toward inner cheek if needed, repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms last do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor replace dropper tightly to maintain child resistance this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use Dosing Chart Weight(lb) Age(yr) Dose (mL) under 24 under 2 years ask a doctor 24-35 2–3 years 1.6 mL (0.8 + 0.8 mL)
Attention: use only enclosed dropper specifically designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device.
Tussin Original

Tussin Original

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Childrens Plus Cough An...

Childrens Plus Cough And Runny Nose

• do not exceed recommended dosage(see overdose warning) • do not use in infants• shake well before using• find right dose on chart below. If possible, useweight to dose; otherwise, use age• if needed, repeat dose every 4 hours whilesymptoms last• do not give more than 5 times in 24 hoursWeight (lb) Age (yr) Dose (tsp or mL)under 36 under 4 do not use36-47 4-5 do not use unlessdirected by a doctor48-95 6-11 2 tsps or 10 mL
Cough Relief Orange

Cough Relief Orange

• take recommended dosage or as directed by a doctor

age doseadults and children 12 years and over.................2 teaspoonfuls every 6-8 hours, not to exceed 4 doses in 24 hourschildren 6 years to under 12 years........................1 teaspoonful every 6-8 hours, not to exceed 4 doses in 24 hourschildren 4 years to under 6 years..........................do not use unless directed by a doctorchildren under 4 years............................................do not use
Banophen

Banophen

do not use more than directed adults and children 2 years of age and older: apply to affected area no more than 3 to 4 times daily children under 2 years of age: ask a doctor
Isopropyl Alcohol Prep ...

Isopropyl Alcohol Prep Pad

Wipe injection site vigorously and discard
Tussin Sugar Free Cough...

Tussin Sugar Free Cough

• do not exceed 6 doses in a 24-hour period• this adult product is not intended for use inchildren under 12 years of age

Age Dose adults and children 12 years and over 2 teaspoonfuls (tsps) every 4 hourschildren under 12 years do not use
Tussin Dm

Tussin Dm

do not exceed 6 doses in a 24-hour period• this adult product is not intended for use inchildren under 12 years of age

adults and children 12 years and over 2 teaspoonfuls (tsps) every 4 hours children under 12 years do not use
Doxazosin Mesylate

Doxazosin Mesylate

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The initial dosage of doxazosin mesylate tablet in patients with hypertension and/or BPH is 1 mg given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. This starting dose is intended to minimize the frequency of postural hypotension and first dose syncope associated with doxazosin mesylate tablet. Postural effects are most likely to occur between 2 and 6 hours after a dose. Therefore blood pressure measurements should be taken during this time period after the first dose and with each increase in dose. If doxazosin mesylate tablet administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be restarted using the initial dosing regimen.

A. Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia 1-8 mg once daily

The initial dosage of doxazosin mesylate tablet is 1 mg, given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. Depending on the individual patient’s urodynamics and BPH symptomatology, dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter to 4 mg and 8 mg once daily, the maximum recommended dose for BPH. The recommended titration interval is 1-2 weeks. Blood pressure should be evaluated routinely in these patients.

B. Hypertension 1-16 mg once daily

The initial dosage of doxazosin mesylate tablet is 1 mg given once daily. Depending on the individual patient’s standing blood pressure response (based on measurements taken at 2-6 hours post-dose and 24 hours post-dose), dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter if necessary to 4 mg , 8 mg and 16 mg to achieve the desired reduction in blood pressure.

Increases in dose beyond 4 mg increase the likelihood of excessive postural effects including syncope, postural dizziness/vertigo and postural hypotension. At a titrated dose of 16 mg once daily the frequency of postural effects is about 12% compared to 3% for placebo.
Folic Acid

Folic Acid

Oral administration is preferred. Although most patients with malabsorption cannot absorb food folates, they are able to absorb folic acid given orally. Parenteral administration is not advocated but may be necessary in some individuals (e.g., patients receiving parenteral or enteral alimentation). Doses greater than 0.1 mg should not be used unless anemia due to vitamin B12 deficiency has been ruled out or is being adequately treated with a cobalamin. Daily doses greater than 1 mg do not enhance the hematologic effect, and most of the excess is excreted unchanged in the urine.

The usual therapeutic dosage in adults and children (regardless of age) is up to 1 mg daily. Resistant cases may require larger doses.

When clinical symptoms have subsided and the blood picture has become normal, a daily maintenance level should be used, i.e., 0.1 mg for infants and up to 0.3 mg for children under 4 years of age, 0.4 mg for adults and children 4 or more years of age, and 0.8 mg for pregnant and lactating women, but never less than 0.1 mg/day. Patients should be kept under close supervision and adjustment of the maintenance level made if relapse appears imminent.

In the presence of alcoholism, hemolytic anemia, anticonvulsant therapy, or chronic infection, the maintenance level may need to be increased.
Neocidin

Neocidin

Apply the ointment every 3 or 4 hours for 7 to 10 days, depending on the severity of the infection.
Neomycin And Polymyxin ...

Neomycin And Polymyxin B Sulfates And Dexamethasone

Apply a small amount into the conjunctival sac(s) up to three or four times daily, or may be used adjunctively with Neomycin and Polymyxin B Sulfates and Dexamethasone Ophthalmic Suspension at bedtime.

How to apply Neomycin and Polymyxin B Sulfates and Dexamethasone Ophthalmic Ointment:

1. Tilt your head back.

2. Place a finger on your cheek just under your eye and gently pull down until a "V" pocket is formed between your eyeball and your lower lid.

3. Place a small amount (about 1/2 inch) of Neomycin and Polymyxin B Sulfates and Dexamethasone Ophthalmic Ointment in the "V" pocket. Do not let the tip of the tube touch your eye.

4. Look downward before closing your eye.

Not more than 8 grams should be prescribed initially and the prescription should not be refilled without further evaluation as outlined in PRECAUTIONS above.
Cortomycin

Cortomycin

Apply the ointment in the affected eye every 3 or 4 hours, depending on the severity of the condition.

Not more than 8 grams should be prescribed initially and the prescription should not be refilled without further evaluation as outlined in PRECAUTIONS: above.
Peg 3350

Peg 3350

do not take more than directed unless advised by your doctor the enclosed scoop is a measuring device designed to contain 17 grams of powder when filled to the top (level scoop) adults and children 17 years of age and older: fill scoop completely with product to obtain the correct dose (17 g). Level scoop with knife or flat object. stir and dissolve in any 4 to 8 ounces of beverage (cold, hot or room temperature) then drink use once a day use no more than 7 days children 16 years of age or under: ask a doctor
Dexamethasone Sodium Ph...

Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate Solution Drops

The duration of treatment will vary with the type of lesion and may extend from a few days to several weeks, according to therapeutic response. Relapses, more common in chronic active lesions than in self-limited conditions, usually respond to retreatment.

Eye: Instill one or two drops of solution into the conjunctival sac every hour during the day and every two hours during the night as initial therapy. When a favorable response is observed, reduce dosage to one drop every four hours. Later, further reduction in dosage to one drop three or four times daily may suffice to control symptoms.

Ear: Clean the aural canal thoroughly and sponge dry. Instill the solution directly into the aural canal. A suggested initial dosage is three or four drops two or three times a day. When a favorable response is obtained, reduce dosage gradually and eventually discontinue.

If preferred, the aural canal may be packed with a gauze wick saturated with solution. Keep the wick moist with the preparation and remove from the ear after 12 to 24 hours. Treatment may be repeated as often as necessary at the discretion of the physician.
Anastrozole

Anastrozole

2. DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

2.1. Recommended Dose The dose of anastrozole tablets are one 1 mg tablet taken once a day. For patients with advanced breast cancer, anastrozole tablets should be continued until tumor progression. Anastrozole tablets can be taken with or without food. For adjuvant treatment of early breast cancer in postmenopausal women, the optimal duration of therapy is unknown. In the ATAC trial anastrozole tablets were administered for five years. [see Clinical Studies (14.1)] No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment or for elderly patients. [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)]

2.2. Patients with Hepatic Impairment No changes in dose are recommended for patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic impairment. Anastrozole tablets have not been studied in patients with severe hepatic impairment. [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)]
Anu-med

Anu-med

when practical, cleanse the affected area by patting or blotting with an appropriate cleansing wipe. gently dry by patting or blotting with a tissue or a soft cloth before insertion of suppository. detach one suppository from the strip separate the two tabs of the white plastic wrap with thumb and forefinger of each hand, grasp the tabs and peel downward, unwrapping the suppository insert one suppository into the rectum
adults and children 12 years and over: insert one suppository rectally up to 4 times daily

children under 12 years: ask a doctor
All Day Relief

All Day Relief

do not take more than directed the smallest effective dose should be used do not take longer than 10 days, unless directed by a doctor (see Warnings) drink a full glass of water with each dose
Adults and

children

12 years
and older take 1 tablet every 8 to 12 hours while symptoms last for the first dose you may take 2 tablets within the first hour do not exceed 2 tablets in any 8- to 12-hour period do not exceed 3 tablets in a 24-hour period
Children

under 12
years ask a doctor
All Day Relief

All Day Relief

do not take more than directed the smallest effective dose should be used do not take longer than 10 days, unless directed by a doctor (see Warnings) drink a full glass of water with each dose
Adults and

children

12 years
and older take 1 caplet every 8 to 12 hours while symptoms last for the first dose you may take 2 caplets within the first hour do not exceed 2 caplets in any 8- to 12-hour period do not exceed 3 caplets in a 24-hour period
Children

under 12
years ask a doctor
Ranitidine

Ranitidine

Active Duodenal Ulcer: The current recommended adult dosage of Ranitidine Tablets, USP for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg twice daily is as effective as the 150-mg dose.

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal Ulcers: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome):

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. In some patients it may be necessary to administer Ranitidine Tablets, USP 150-mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

Benign Gastric Ulcer: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

GERD: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Erosive Esophagitis: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg four times a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Pediatric Use: The safety and effectiveness of Ranitidine Tablets, USP have been established in the age-group of 1 month to 16 years. There is insufficient information about the pharmacokinetics of Ranitidine Tablets, USP in neonatal patients (less than 1 month of age) to make dosing recommendations.

The following 3 subsections provide dosing information for each of the pediatric indications.

Treatment of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers: The recommended oral dose for the treatment of active duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg twice daily to a maximum of 300 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers: The recommended oral dose for the maintenance of healing of duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg once daily to a maximum of 150 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Treatment of GERD and Erosive Esophagitis: Although limited data exist for these conditions in pediatric patients, published literature supports a dosage of 5 to 10 mg/kg per day, usually given as two divided doses.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function: On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with Ranitidine Tablets, USP, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min is 150 mg every 24 hours. Should the patient's condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.

Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: Geriatrics and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of naproxen tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use naproxen tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with naproxen tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although Naproxen Tablets circulates in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differents that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen.

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients:

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients with Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment:

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) (see WARNINGS: Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis
Naproxen Tablets 250 mgor 375 mgor 500 mg twice dailytwice dailytwice daily
During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Management of Pain, Primary Dysmenorrhea, and Acute Tendonitis and Bursitis:

Because the sodium salt of naproxen is more rapidly absorbed, naproxen sodium is recommended for the management of acute painful conditions when prompt onset of pain relief is desired. Naproxen may also be used. The recommended starting dose of Naproxen is 500 mg, followed by 500 mg every 12 hours or 250 mg every 6 to 8 hours as required. The initial total daily dose should not exceed 1250 mg of naproxen. Thereafter, the total daily dose should not exceed 1000 mg of naproxen.

Acute Gout:

The recommended starting dose is 750 mg of naproxen tablets followed by 250 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided.
Guanfacine Hydrochlorid...

Guanfacine Hydrochloride

The recommended initial dose of guanfacine tablets when given alone or in combination with another antihypertensive drug is 1 mg daily given at bedtime to minimize somnolence. If after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy, 1 mg does not give a satisfactory result, a dose of 2 mg may be given, although most of the effect of guanfacine is seen at 1 mg (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Higher daily doses have been used, but adverse reactions increase significantly with doses above 3 mg/day.

The frequency of rebound hypertension is low, but it can occur. When rebound occurs, it does so after 2 to 4 days, which is delayed compared with clonidine hydrochloride. This is consistent with the longer half-life of guanfacine. In most cases, after abrupt withdrawal of guanfacine, blood pressure returns to pretreatment levels slowly (within 2 to 4 days) without ill effects.
Nasal

Nasal

adults and children 6 to under 12 years of age (with adult supervision): 2 or 3 sprays in each nostril not more often than every 10 to 12 hours do not exceed 2 doses within any 24-hour period children under 6 years of age: consult a doctor
To spray, squeeze bottle quickly and firmly. Do not tilt head backward while spraying. Wipe nozzle clean after use
Gemfibrozil

Gemfibrozil

The recommended dose for adults is 1200 mg administered in two divided doses 30 minutes before the morning and evening meal (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).
Naproxen Sodium

Naproxen Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of naproxen sodium tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use naproxen sodium tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with naproxen sodium tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. The difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen tablets, naproxen suspension, naproxen delayed-release tablets, and naproxen sodium tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 30 minutes in patients taking naproxen sodium and within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen. Because naproxen delayed-release tablets dissolve in the small intestine rather than in the stomach, the absorption of the drug is delayed compared to the other naproxen formulations (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) (see WARNINGS: Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis

During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen sodium 1650 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of antiinflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen sodium 1650 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Juvenile Arthritis

For the relief of juvenile arthritis, the recommended dose is approximately 10 mg/kg given orally in 2 divided doses (i.e., 5 mg/kg given twice a day). Naproxen sodium tablets are not well suited to this dosage so use of naproxen oral suspension is recommended for this indication.

Management of Pain, Primary Dysmenorrhea, and Acute Tendonitis and Bursitis:

The recommended starting dose is 550 mg of naproxen sodium followed by 550 mg every 12 hours or 275 mg every 6 to 8 hours as required. The initial total daily dose should not exceed 1375 mg of naproxen sodium. Thereafter, the total daily dose should not exceed 1100 mg of naproxen sodium. Because the sodium salt of naproxen is more rapidly absorbed, naproxen sodium tablets are recommended for the management of acute painful conditions when prompt onset of pain relief is desired.

Acute Gout: The recommended starting dose is 825 mg of naproxen sodium tablets followed by 275 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided.
Sulfasalazine

Sulfasalazine

The dosage of sulfasalazine tablets should be adjusted to each individual's response and tolerance.

Initial Therapy

Adults: 3 to 4 g daily in evenly divided doses with dosage intervals not exceeding eight hours. In some cases, it is advisable to initiate therapy with a smaller dosage, e.g., 1 to 2 g daily, to reduce possible gastrointestinal intolerance. If daily doses exceeding 4 g are required to achieve desired effects, the increased risk of toxicity should be kept in mind.

Children, six years of age and older: 40 to 60 mg/kg body weight in each 24-hour period, divided into 3 to 6 doses.

Maintenance Therapy

Adults: 2 g daily.

Children, six years of age and older: 30 mg/kg body weight in each 24-hour period, divided into 4 doses.

The response of acute ulcerative colitis to sulfasalazine tablets can be evaluated by clinical criteria, including the presence of fever, weight changes, and degree and frequency of diarrhea and bleeding, as well as by sigmoidoscopy and the evaluation of biopsy samples. It is often necessary to continue medication even when clinical symptoms, including diarrhea, have been controlled. When endoscopic examination confirms satisfactory improvement, the dosage of sulfasalazine should be reduced to a maintenance level. If diarrhea recurs, the dosage should be increased to previously effective levels. If symptoms of gastric intolerance (anorexia, nausea, vomiting, etc.) occur after the first few doses of sulfasalazine, they are probably due to increased serum levels of total sulfapyridine and may be alleviated by halving the daily dose of sulfasalazine and subsequently increasing it gradually over several days. If gastric intolerance continues, the drug should be stopped for 5 to 7 days, then reintroduced at a lower daily dose.

Some patients may be sensitive to treatment with sulfasalazine. Various desensitization-like regimens have been reported to be effective in 34 of 53 patients,4 7 of 8 patients,5 and 19 of 20 patients.6 These regimens suggest starting with a total daily dose of 50 to 250 mg sulfasalazine initially, and doubling it every 4 to 7 days until the desired therapeutic level is achieved. If the symptoms of sensitivity recur, sulfasalazine should be discontinued. Desensitization should not be attempted in patients who have a history of agranulocytosis, or who have experienced an anaphylactoid reaction while previously receiving sulfasalazine.
Acebutolol Hydrochlorid...

Acebutolol Hydrochloride

HYPERTENSION: The initial dosage of acebutolol in uncomplicated mild-to-moderate hypertension is 400 mg. This can be given as a single daily dose, but in occasional patients twice daily dosing may be required for adequate 24-hour blood-pressure control. An optimal response is usually achieved with dosages of 400 to 800 mg per day, although some patients have been maintained on as little as 200 mg per day. Patients with more severe hypertension or who have demonstrated inadequate control may respond to a total of 1200 mg daily (administered b.i.d.), or to the addition of a second antihypertensive agent. Beta-1 selectivity diminishes as dosage is increased.

VENTRICULAR ARRHYTHMIA: The usual initial dose of acebutolol is 400 mg daily given as 200 mg b.i.d. Dosage should be increased gradually until an optimal clinical response is obtained, generally at 600 to 1200 mg per day. If treatment is to be discontinued, the dosage should be reduced gradually over a period of about two weeks.

USE IN OLDER PATIENTS: Older patients have an approximately 2-fold increase in bioavailability and may require lower maintenance doses. Doses above 800 mg/day should be avoided in the elderly.
Sulindac

Sulindac

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of sulindac tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use sulindac tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with sulindac tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Sulindac tablets should be administered orally twice a day with food. The maximum dosage is 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day are not recommended.

In osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended starting dosage is 150 mg twice a day. The dosage may be lowered or raised depending on the response.

A prompt response (within one week) can be expected in about one-half of patients with osteoarthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, and rheumatoid arthritis. Others may require longer to respond.

In acute painful shoulder (acute subacromial bursitis/supraspinatus tendinitis) and acute gouty arthritis, the recommended dosage is 200 mg twice a day. After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the dosage may be reduced according to the response. In acute painful shoulder, therapy for 7–14 days is usually adequate. In acute gouty arthritis, therapy for 7 days is usually adequate.
Extended Phenytoin Sodi...

Extended Phenytoin Sodium

Serum concentrations should be monitored in changing from extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP to prompt phenytoin sodium capsules, USP, and from the sodium salt to the free acid form.

Extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP are formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

General:

Dosage should be individualized to provide maximum benefit. In some cases, serum blood level determinations may be necessary for optimal dosage adjustments—the clinically effective serum level is usually 10-20 mcg/mL. With recommended dosage, a period of seven to ten days may be required to achieve steady-state blood levels with phenytoin and changes in dosage (increase or decrease) should not be carried out at intervals shorter than seven to ten days.

Adult Dosage:

Divided daily dosage:

Patients who have received no previous treatment may be started on one 100-mg extended phenytoin sodium capsule, USP three times daily and the dosage then adjusted to suit individual requirements. For most adults, the satisfactory maintenance dosage will be one capsule three to four times a day. An increase up to two capsules three times a day may be made, if necessary.

Once-a-day dosage:

In adults, if seizure control is established with divided doses of three 100-mg extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP daily, once-a-day dosage with 300 mg of extended phenytoin sodium capsules may be considered. Studies comparing divided doses of 300 mg with a single daily dose of this quantity indicated absorption, peak plasma levels, biologic half-life, difference between peak and minimum values, and urinary recovery were equivalent. Once-a-day dosage offers a convenience to the individual patient or to nursing personnel for institutionalized patients and is intended to be used only for patients requiring this amount of drug daily. A major problem in motivating noncompliant patients may also be lessened when the patient can take this drug once a day. However, patients should be cautioned not to miss a dose, inadvertently.

Only extended phenytoin sodium capsules are recommended for once-a-day dosing. Inherent differences in dissolution characteristics and resultant absorption rates of phenytoin due to different manufacturing procedures and/or dosage forms preclude such recommendation for other phenytoin products. When a change in the dosage form or brand is prescribed, careful monitoring of phenytoin serum levels should be carried out.

Loading dose:

Some authorities have advocated use of an oral loading dose of phenytoin in adults who require rapid steady-state serum levels and where intravenous administration is not desirable. This dosing regimen should be reserved for patients in a clinic or hospital setting where phenytoin serum levels can be closely monitored. Patients with a history of renal or liver disease should not receive the oral loading regimen.

Initially, one gram of phenytoin capsules is divided into three doses (400 mg, 300 mg, 300 mg) and administered at two-hour intervals. Normal maintenance dosage is then instituted 24 hours after the loading dose, with frequent serum level determinations.

Pediatric Dosage:

Initially, 5 mg/kg/day in two or three equally divided doses, with subsequent dosage individualized to a maximum of 300 mg daily. A recommended daily maintenance dosage is usually 4 to 8 mg/kg. Children over 6 years old and adolescents may require the minimum adult dose (300 mg/day).
Primidone

Primidone

Adult Dosage

Patients 8 years of age and older who have received no previous treatment may be started on primidone according to the following regimen using either 50 mg or scored 250 mg primidone tablets:

Days 1 to 3: 100 to 125 mg at bedtime.Days 4 to 6: 100 to 125 mg b.i.d.Days 7 to 9: 100 to 125 mg t.i.d.Day 10 to maintenance: 250 mg t.i.d.

For most adults and children 8 years of age and over, the usual maintenance dosage is three to four 250 mg primidone tablets daily in divided doses (250 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.). If required, an increase to five or six 250 mg tablets daily may be made but daily doses should not exceed 500 mg q.i.d.

Dosage should be individualized to provide maximum benefit. In some cases, serum blood level determinations of primidone may be necessary for optimal dosage adjustment. The clinically effective serum level for primidone is between 5 to 12 µg/mL.

In Patients Already Receiving Other Anticonvulsants

Primidone should be started at 100 to 125 mg at bedtime and gradually increased to maintenance level as the other drug is gradually decreased. This regimen should be continued until satisfactory dosage level is achieved for the combination, or the other medication is completely withdrawn. When therapy with primidone alone is the objective, the transition from concomitant therapy should not be completed in less than two weeks.

Pediatric Dosage

For children under 8 years of age, the following regimen may be used:

Days 1 to 3: 50 mg at bedtime.Days 4 to 6: 50 mg b.i.d.Days 7 to 9: 100 mg b.i.d.Day 10 to maintenance: 125 mg t.i.d. to 250 mg t.i.d.

For children under 8 years of age, the usual maintenance dosage is 125 to 250 mg three times daily or 10 to 25 mg/kg/day in divided doses.
Benazepril Hydrochlorid...

Benazepril Hydrochloride

Hypertension

Adults

The recommended initial dose for patients not receiving a diuretic is 10 mg once-a-day. The usual maintenance dosage range is 20-40 mg per day administered as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. A dose of 80 mg gives an increased response, but experience with this dose is limited. The divided regimen was more effective in controlling trough (pre-dosing) blood pressure than the same dose given as a once-daily regimen. Dosage adjustment should be based on measurement of peak (2-6 hours after dosing) and trough responses. If a once-daily regimen does not give adequate trough response, an increase in dosage or divided administration should be considered. If blood pressure is not controlled with Benazepril hydrochloride alone, a diuretic can be added.

Total daily doses above 80 mg have not been evaluated.

Concomitant administration of Benazepril hydrochloride with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium (see PRECAUTIONS).

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of Benazepril hydrochloride. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued two to three days prior to beginning therapy with Benazepril hydrochloride (see WARNINGS). Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with Benazepril hydrochloride alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed.

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 5 mg benazepril hydrochloride should be used to avoid excessive hypotension.

Pediatrics

In children, doses of Benazepril hydrochloride between 0.1 and 0.6 mg/kg once daily have been studied, and doses greater than 0.1 mg/kg were shown to reduce blood pressure (see Pharmacodynamics). Based on this, the recommended starting dose of Benazepril hydrochloride in 0.2 mg/kg once per day as monotherapy. Doses above 0.6 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg daily) have not been studied in pediatric patients.

For pediatric patients who cannot swallow tablets, or for whom the calculated dosage (mg/kg) does not correspond to the available tablet strengths for benazepril hydrochloride, follow the suspension preparation instructions below to administer benazepril HCl as a suspension.

Treatment with benazepril hydrochloride is not advised for children below the age of 6 years (see PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use) and in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL, as there are insufficient data available to support a dosing recommendation in these groups.

For Hypertensive Patients with Renal Impairment

For patients with a creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (serum creatinine > 3 mg/dL), the recommended initial dose is 5 mg Benazepril hydrochloride once daily. Dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum total daily dose of 40 mg (see WARNINGS).

Preparation of Suspension (for 150 mL of a 2 mg/mL suspension)

Add 75 mL of Ora-Plus®*oral suspending vehicle to an amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing fifteen Benazepril hydrochloride 20 mg tablets, and shake for at least 2 minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of 1 hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of 1 additional minute. Add 75 mL of Ora-Sweet®*oral syrup vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2-8°C (36-46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days in the PET bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the suspension before each use.

*Ora-Plus® and Ora-Sweet® are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. Ora-Plus® contains carrageenan, citric acid, methylparaben, microcrystalline cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, potassium sorbate, simethicone, sodium phosphate monobasic, xanthan gum, and water. Ora-Sweet® contains citric acid, berry citrus flavorant, glycerin, methylparaben, potassium sorbate, sodium phosphate monobasic, sorbitol, sucrose, and water.
Dok

Dok

Adults and children 12 years of age and older: Take 1 tablet as needed, not to exceed more than 3 tablets daily, or as directed by a doctor Children under 12 years of age Consult a doctor before use.
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam is administered orally. For optimal results, dose, frequency of administration, and duration of therapy should be individualized according to patient response. To facilitate this, 0.5 mg, 1 mg and 2 mg tablets are available.

The usual range is 2 to 6 mg/day given in divided doses, the largest dose being taken before bedtime, but the daily dosage may vary from 1 to 10 mg/day.

For anxiety, most patients require an initial dose of 2 to 3 mg/day given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For insomnia due to anxiety or transient situational stress, a single daily dose of 2 to 4 mg may be given, usually at bedtime.

For elderly or debilitated patients, an initial dosage of 1 to 2 mg/day in divided doses is recommended, to be adjusted as needed and tolerated.

The dosage of Lorazepam should be increased gradually when needed to help avoid adverse effects. When higher dosage is indicated, the evening dose should be increased before the daytime doses.
Childrens Pain Relief

Childrens Pain Relief

this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use find the right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise, use age. dissolve in mouth or chew before swallowing if needed, repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms last do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor Weight (lb) Age (yr) Tablets Under 24 Under 2 Ask a doctor 24-35 2-3 2 36-47 4-5 3 48-59 6-8 4 60-71 9-10 5 72-95 11 6
Alcohol Prep

Alcohol Prep

Wipe injection site vigorously and discard
Extra Strength Mapap

Extra Strength Mapap

Do not take more than directed

Adults and children 12 years and over:
take 2 caplets every 4 to 6 hours while symptoms last do not take more than 8 caplets in 24 hours Do not take for more than 10 days unless directed by a doctor
Children under 12 years: do not use adult Extra Strength product in children under 12 years of age; this will provide more than the recommended dose (overdose) of acetaminophen and may cause liver damage.
Childrens Chewable Mapa...

Childrens Chewable Mapap

■ This products does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use. ■ Find right dose on the chart below. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise, use age. ■ Chew before swallowing ■ If needed, repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms lasts ■ Do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours ■ Do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor.
Weight Age Tablets Under 24 lbs Under 2 years Ask a doctor 24-35 lbs 2-3 years 2 tablets 36-47 lbs 4-5 years 3 tablets 48-59 lbs 6-8 years 4 tablets 60-71 lbs 9-10 years 5 tablets 72-95 lbs 11 years 6 tablets
Extra Strength Mapap Pm...

Extra Strength Mapap Pm

Do not take more than directed (see overdose warning)

Adults and children 12 years of age and over:
Take 2 caplets at bedtime if needed, or as directed by a doctor
Children under 12 years of age: Do not use this adult product in children under 12 years of age; this will provide more than the recommended dose (overdose) and may cause liver damage.
Senna-lax

Senna-lax

take preferably at bedtime or as directed by a doctor age starting dosage maximum dosage adults and children 12 years of age and older 2 tablets once a day 4 tablets twice a day children 6 to under 12 years of age 1 tablet once a day 2 tablets twice a day children 2 to under 6 years of age 1/2 tablet once a day 1 tablet twice a day children under 2 years of age ask a doctor ask a doctor
Carbidopa And Levodopa

Carbidopa And Levodopa

The optimum daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets must be determined by careful titration in each patient.

Carbidopa and levodopa tablets are available in a 1:4 ratio of carbidopa to levodopa (carbidopa and levodopa tablets, USP 25 mg/100 mg) as well as 1:10 ratio (carbidopa and levodopa tablets, USP 25 mg/250 mg and carbidopa and levodopa lablets, USP 10 mg/100 mg). Tablets of the two ratios may be given separately or combined as needed to provide the optimum dosage.

Studies show that peripheral dopa decarboxylase is saturated by carbidopa at approximately 70 to 100 mg a day. Patients receiving less than this amount of carbidopa are more likely to experience nausea and vomiting.

Usual Initial Dosage

Dosage is best initiated with one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg three times a day. This dosage schedule provides 75 mg of carbidopa per day. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day, as necessary, until a dosage of eight tablets of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg a day is reached.

If carbidopa and levodopa tablets10 mg/100 mg is used, dosage may be initiated with one tablet three or four times a day.

However, this will not provide an adequate amount of carbidopa for many patients. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day until a total of eight tablets (2 tablets q.i.d.) is reached.

How to Transfer Patients from Levodopa

Levodopa must be discontinued at least twelve hours before starting carbidopa and levodopa tablets. A daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets should be chosen that will provide approximately 25 percent of the previous levodopa dosage. Patients who are taking less than 1500 mg of levodopa a day should be started on one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg three or four times a day. The suggested starting dosage for most patients taking more than 1500 mg of levodopa is one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/250 mg three or four times a day

Maintenance

Therapy should be individualized and adjusted according to the desired therapeutic response. At least 70 to 100 mg of carbidopa per day should be provided. When a greater proportion of carbidopa is required, one tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg may be substituted for each tablet of carbidopa and levodopa 10 mg/100 mg. When more levodopa is required, carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/250 mg should be substituted for carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/100 mg or carbidopa and levodopa 10 mg/100 mg. If necessary, the dosage of carbidopa and levodopa 25 mg/250 mg may be increased by one-half or one tablet every day or every other day to a maximum of eight tablets a day. Experience with total daily dosages of carbidopa greater than 200 mg is limited.

Because both therapeutic and adverse responses occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa tablets than with levodopa alone, patients should be monitored closely during the dose adjustment period. Specifically, involuntary movements will occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa tablets than with levodopa. The occurrence of involuntary movements may require dosage reduction. Blepharospasm may be a useful early sign of excess dosage in some patients.

Addition of Other Antiparkinsonian Medications

Standard drugs for Parkinson's disease, other than levodopa without a decarboxylase inhibitor, may be used concomitantly while carbidopa and levodopa tablets are being administered, although dosage adjustments may be required.

Interruption of Therapy

Sporadic cases of a symptom complex resembling Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome (NMS) have been associated with dose reductions and withdrawal of carbidopa and levodopa tablets. Patients should be observed carefully if abrupt reduction or discontinuation of carbidopa and levodopa tablets is required, especially if the patient is receiving neuroleptics. (See WARNINGS.)

If general anesthesia is required, carbidopa and levodopa tablets may be continued as long as the patient is permitted to take fluids and medication by mouth.

If therapy is interrupted temporarily, the patient should be observed for symptoms resembling NMS, and the usual daily dosage may be administered as soon as the patient is able to take oral medication.
Mapap Childrens

Mapap Childrens

do not give more than directed (see Liver warning) shake well before using find right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise, use age. use only enclosed dosing cup designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device. if needed, repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms last do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use Weight(lb) Age(yr) Dose (tsp or mL) under 24 under 2 years ask a doctor 24-35 2–3 years 1 tsp or 5 mL 36–47 4–5 years 1 1/2 tsp or 7.5 mL 48–59 6–8 years 2 tsp or 10 mL 60-71 9–10 years 2 1/2 tsp or 12.5 mL 72-95 11 years 3 tsp or 15 mL
Attention: use only enclosed dosing cup specifically designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device.
Xolegel

Xolegel

Dosage should be adjusted according to the severity of the pain and the response of the patient. It may occasionally be necessary to exceed the usual dosage recommended below in cases of more severe pain or in those patients who have become tolerant to the analgesic effect of opioids. If pain is constant, the opioid analgesic should be given at regular intervals on an around-the-clock schedule. Oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets are given orally.

Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, USP, 7.5 mg/325 mg; Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, USP, 10 mg/325 mg

The usual adult dosage is one tablet every 6 hours as needed for pain. The total daily dose of acetaminophen should not exceed 4 grams.
Strength Maximal Daily Dose Oxycodone and acetaminophen 7.5 mg/325 mg 8 Tablets Oxycodone and acetaminophen 10 mg/325 mg 6 Tablets
Cessation of Therapy

In patients treated with oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets for more than a few weeks who no longer require therapy, doses should be tapered gradually to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient.

Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, USP, 7.5 mg/325 mg; Oxycodone and Acetaminophen Tablets, USP, 10 mg/325 mg

The usual adult dosage is one tablet every 6 hours as needed for pain. The total daily dose of acetaminophen should not exceed 4 grams.
Strength Maximal Daily Dose Oxycodone and acetaminophen 7.5 mg/325 mg 8 Tablets Oxycodone and acetaminophen 10 mg/325 mg 6 Tablets
Cessation of Therapy

In patients treated with oxycodone and acetaminophen tablets for more than a few weeks who no longer require therapy, doses should be tapered gradually to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient.
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Promethazine Hydrochloride Tablets, USP are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age (see WARNINGS: Black Box Warning and Use in Pediatric Patients).

Allergy: The average oral dose is 25 mg taken before retiring; however, 12.5 mg may be taken before meals and on retiring, if necessary. Single 25 mg doses at bedtime or 6.25 to 12.5 mg taken three times daily will usually suffice. After initiation of treatment, in children or adults, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The administration of promethazine hydrochloride in 25 mg doses will control minor transfusion reactions of an allergic nature.

Motion Sickness: The average adult dose is 25 mg taken twice daily. The initial dose should be taken one-half to one hour before anticipated travel and be repeated eight to twelve hours later, if necessary. On succeeding days of travel, it is recommended that 25 mg be given on arising and again before the evening meal. For children, Promethazine Hydrochloride Tablets, syrup, or rectal suppositories, 12.5 to 25 mg, twice daily, may be administered.

Nausea and Vomiting: Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see WARNINGS: Use in Pediatric Patients). The average effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride for the active therapy of nausea and vomiting in children or adults is 25 mg. When oral medication cannot be tolerated, the dose should be given parenterally or by rectal suppository. 12.5 to 25 mg doses may be repeated, as necessary, at four- to six-hour intervals. For nausea and vomiting in children, the usual dose is 0.5 mg per pound of body weight, and the dose should be adjusted to the age and weight of the patient and the severity of the condition being treated. For prophylaxis of nausea and vomiting, as during surgery and the postoperative period, the average dose is 25 mg repeated at four- to six-hour intervals, as necessary.

Sedation: This product relieves apprehension and induces a quiet sleep from which the patient can be easily aroused. Administration of 12.5 to 25 mg promethazine hydrochloride by the oral route or by rectal suppository at bedtime will provide sedation in children. Adults usually require 25 to 50 mg for nighttime, presurgical, or obstetrical sedation.

Pre- and Postoperative Use: Promethazine hydrochloride in 12.5 to 25 mg doses for children and 50 mg doses for adults the night before surgery relieves apprehension and produces a quiet sleep. For preoperative medication, children require doses of 0.5 mg per pound of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine-like drug. Usual adult dosage is 50 mg promethazine hydrochloride with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the required amount of a belladonna alkaloid. Postoperative sedation and adjunctive use with analgesics may be obtained by the administration of 12.5 to 25 mg in children and 25 to 50 mg doses in adults. Promethazine Hydrochloride Tablets are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age.
Aprodine

Aprodine

adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 tablet every 4 to 6 hours. Do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours. children under 12 years: do not use this product in children under 12 years of age
Ibuprofen

Ibuprofen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ibuprofen tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use ibuprofen tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with ibuprofen tablets the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Do not exceed 3200 mg total daily dose. If gastrointestinal complaints occur, administer Ibuprofen Tablets, USP with meals or milk.

Rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, including flare-ups of chronic disease:

Suggested Dosage: 1200 mg-3200 mg daily (300 mg qid; 400 mg, 600 mg or 800 mg tid or qid).

Individual patients may show a better response to 3200 mg daily, as compared with 2400 mg, although in well-controlled clinical trials patients on 3200 mg did not show a better mean response in terms of efficacy. Therefore, when treating patients with 3200 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset potential increased risk.

The dose should be tailored to each patient, and may be lowered or raised depending on the severity of symptoms either at time of initiating drug therapy or as the patient responds or fails to respond.

In general, patients with rheumatoid arthritis seem to require higher doses of ibuprofen tablets than do patients with osteoarthritis.

The smallest dose of ibuprofen tablets that yields acceptable control should be employed. A linear blood level dose-response relationship exists with single doses up to 800 mg (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY for effects of food on rate of absorption). The availability of four tablet strengths facilitates dosage adjustment.

In chronic conditions, a therapeutic response to therapy with ibuprofen tablets is sometimes seen in a few days to a week but most often is observed by two weeks. After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the patient's dose should be reviewed and adjusted as required.

Mild to moderate pain: 400 mg every 4 to 6 hours as necessary for relief of pain.

In controlled analgesic clinical trials, doses of ibuprofen tablets greater than 400 mg were no more effective than the 400 mg dose.

Dysmenorrhea: For the treatment of dysmenorrhea, beginning with the earliest onset of such pain, ibuprofen tablets should be given in a dose of 400 mg every 4 hours as necessary for the relief of pain.
Calendula

Calendula

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of sulindac and other treatment options before deciding to use sulindac. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with Sulindac Tablets USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Sulindac Tablets should be administered orally twice a day with food. The maximum dosage is 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day are not recommended.

In osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended starting dosage is 150 mg twice a day. The dosage may be lowered or raised depending on the response.

A prompt response (within one week) can be expected in about one-half of patients with osteoarthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, and rheumatoid arthritis. Others may require longer to respond.

In acute painful shoulder (acute subacromial bursitis/supraspinatus tendinitis) and acute gouty arthritis, the recommended dosage is 200 mg twice a day. After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the dosage may be reduced according to the response. In acute painful shoulder, therapy for 7-14 days is usually adequate. In acute gouty arthritis, therapy for 7 days is usually adequate.
Robafen Dm Max Non Drow...

Robafen Dm Max Non Drowsy

shake well before using do not take more than 6 doses in any 24-hour period this adult product is not intended for use in children under 12 years of age age dose adults and children 12 years and over 2 teaspoons every 4 hours children under 12 years do not use
Enema Mineral Oil

Enema Mineral Oil

Single daily dose

adults & children
12 years and over 1 bottle
children 2 to under
12 years one-half bottle
children under
2 years DO NOT USE
Anti Diarrheal

Anti Diarrheal

drink plenty of clear fluids to help prevent dehydration caused by diarrhea find right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise, use age. adults and children 12 years and over 2 caplets after the first loose stool; 1 caplet after each subsequent loose stool; but no more than 4 caplets in 24 hours children 9-11 years (60-95 lbs) 1 caplet after the first loose stool; 1/2 caplet after each subsequent loose stool; but no more than 3 caplets in 24 hours children 6-8 years (48-59 lbs) 1 caplet after the first loose stool; 1/2 caplet after each subsequent loose stool; but no more than 2 caplets in 24 hours children under 6 years (up to 47 lbs) ask a doctor
Topiramate

Topiramate

Do not take more than the directed (see overdose warning)

Adults and children 12 years and over:
Take 2 tablets every 6 hours while symptoms last. Do not take more than 6 tablets in 24 hours unless directed by a doctor Do not take for more than 10 days unless directed by a doctor
Children under 12 years: Do not use adult Extra Strength product in children under 12 years of age; this will provide more than the recommended dose (overdose) of acetaminophen and may cause liver damage.
Trauma Drama

Trauma Drama

Initiate therapy in gradually increasing dosages; adjust according to individual response. Start with 10 mg four times daily for the first 2 to 4 days, increase to 25 mg four times daily for the balance of the first week. For the second and subsequent weeks, increase dosage to 50 mg four times daily. For maintenance, adjust dosage to the lowest effective levels.

The incidence of toxic reactions, particularly the L.E. cell syndrome, is high in the group of patients receiving large doses of hydrALAZINE.

In a few resistant patients, up to 300 mg of hydrALAZINE daily may be required for a significant antihypertensive effect. In such cases, a lower dosage of hydrALAZINE combined with a thiazide and/or reserpine or a beta blocker may be considered. However, when combining therapy, individual titration is essential to ensure the lowest possible therapeutic dose of each drug.[/S]
Childrens All Day Aller...

Childrens All Day Allergy

use only with enclosed dosing cup adults and children 6 years and over 1 teaspoonful (5 mL) or 2 teaspoonfuls (10 mL) once daily depending upon severity of symptoms; do not take more than 2 teaspoonfuls (10 mL) in 24 hours. adults 65 years and over 1 teaspoonful (5 mL) once daily; do not take more than 1 teaspoonful (5 mL) in 24 hours. children 2 to under 6 years of age 1/2 teaspoonful (2.5 mL) once daily. If needed, dose can be increased to a maximum of 1 teaspoonful (5 mL) once daily or 1/2 teaspoonful (2.5 mL) every 12 hours. Do not give more than 1 teaspoonful (5 mL) in 24 hours. children under 2 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Fexofenadine Hydrochlor...

Fexofenadine Hydrochloride

adults and children 12 years of age and over take one 180 mg tablet with water once a day; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
Antacid

Antacid

chew 2 - 4 tablets as symptoms occur, or as directed by a doctor
Infants Acetaminophen

Infants Acetaminophen

do not give more than directed (see Liver warning) shake well before using find right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise use age. use only enclosed dropper designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device. fill to dose level dispense liquid slowly into child’s mouth, toward inner cheek if needed, repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms last do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor replace dropper tightly to maintain child resistance this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use Dosing Chart Weight(lb) Age(yr) Dose (mL) under 24 under 2 years ask a doctor 24-35 2–3 years 1.6 mL (0.8 + 0.8 mL)
Attention: use only enclosed dropper specifically designed for use with this product. Do not use any other dosing device.
Ibuprofen Pm

Ibuprofen Pm

do not take more than directed do not take longer than 10 days, unless directed by a doctor (see Warnings) adults and children 12 years and over: take 2 caplets at bedtime do not take more than 2 caplets in 24 hours
Antacid

Antacid

chew 2 - 4 tablets as symptoms occur, or as directed by a doctor
Antacid

Antacid

chew 2 - 4 tablets as symptoms occur, or as directed by a doctor
Liquitears

Liquitears

instill 1 to 2 drops in the affected eye(s) as needed
Opticlear

Opticlear

instill 1 to 2 drops in the affected eye(s) up to four times daily or as directed by a doctor
Natural Balance Tears

Natural Balance Tears

instill 1 to 2 drops in the affected eye(s) as needed
Allopurinol

Allopurinol

The dosage of allopurinol to accomplish full control of gout and to lower serum uric acid to normal or near-normal levels varies with the severity of the disease. The average is 200 to 300 mg per day for patients with mild gout and 400 to 600 mg per day for those with moderately severe tophaceous gout. The appropriate dosage may be administered in divided doses or as a single equivalent dose with the 300 mg tablet. Dosage requirements in excess of 300 mg should be administered in divided doses. The maximal recommended dosage is 800 mg daily. To reduce the possibility of flareup of acute gouty attacks, it is recommended that the patient start with a low dose of allopurinol (100 mg daily) and increase at weekly intervals by 100 mg until a serum uric acid level of 6 mg/dL or less is attained but without exceeding the maximal recommended dosage.

Normal serum urate levels are usually achieved in one to three weeks. The upper limit of normal is about 7 mg/dL for men and postmenopausal women and 6 mg/dL for premenopausal women. Too much reliance should not be placed on a single serum uric acid determination since, for technical reasons, estimation of uric acid may be difficult. By selecting the appropriate dosage and, in certain patients, using uricosuric agents concurrently, it is possible to reduce serum uric acid to normal or, if desired, to as low as 2 to 3 mg/dL and keep it there indefinitely.

While adjusting the dosage of allopurinol in patients who are being treated with colchicine and/or anti-inflammatory agents, it is wise to continue the latter therapy until serum uric acid has been normalized and there has been freedom from acute gouty attacks for several months.

In transferring a patient from a uricosuric agent to allopurinol, the dose of the uricosuric agent should be gradually reduced over a period of several weeks and the dose of allopurinol gradually increased to the required dose needed to maintain a normal serum uric acid level.

It should also be noted that allopurinol is generally better tolerated if taken following meals. A fluid intake sufficient to yield a daily urinary output of at least two liters and the maintenance of a neutral or, preferably, slightly alkaline urine are desirable.

Since allopurinol and its metabolites are primarily eliminated only by the kidney, accumulation of the drug can occur in renal failure, and the dose of allopurinol should consequently be reduced. With a creatinine clearance of 10 to 20 mL/min, a daily dosage of 200 mg of allopurinol is suitable. When the creatinine clearance is less than 10 mL/min, the daily dosage should not exceed 100 mg. With extreme renal impairment (creatinine clear- ance less than 3 mL/min) the interval between doses may also need to be lengthened.

The correct size and frequency of dosage for maintaining the serum uric acid just within the normal range are best determined by using the serum uric acid level as an index.

For the prevention of uric acid nephropathy during the vigorous therapy of neoplastic disease, treatment with 600 to 800 mg daily for two or three days is advisable together with a high fluid intake. Otherwise similar considerations to the above recommendations for treating patients with gout govern the regulation of dosage for maintenance purposes in secondary hyperuricemia.

The dose of allopurinol recommended for management of recurrent calcium oxalate stones in hyperuricosuric patients is 200 to 300 mg/day in divided doses or as the single equivalent. This dose may be adjusted up or down depending upon the resultant control of the hyperuricosuria based upon subsequent 24 hour urinary urate determinations. Clinical experience suggests that patients with recurrent calcium oxalate stones may also benefit from dietary changes such as the reduction of animal protein, sodium, refined sugars, oxalate-rich foods, and excessive calcium intake as well as an increase in oral fluids and dietary fiber.

Children, 6 to 10 years of age, with secondary hyperuricemia associated with malignancies may be given 300 mg allopurinol daily while those under 6 years are generally given 150 mg daily. The response is evaluated after approximately 48 hours of therapy and a dosage adjustment is made if necessary.
Sodium Chloride Hyperto...

Sodium Chloride Hypertonicity

pull down the lower lid of the affected eye
apply a small amount (1/4 inch) of ointment to the inside of eyelid

apply every 3 or 4 hours or as directed by a doctor
Sodium Chloride Hyperto...

Sodium Chloride Hypertonicity

instill 1 or 2 drops in the affected eye(s) every 3 or 4 hours, or as directed by a physician.
Enema

Enema

Do not use more unless directed by a doctor. See Warnings.
adults & children 12 years and over one bottle once daily children 2 to under 12 years ½ bottle once daily children under 2 years do not use
Bethanechol Chloride

Bethanechol Chloride

Dosage must be individualized, depending on the type and severity of the condition to be treated.

Preferably give the drug when the stomach is empty. If taken soon after eating, nausea and vomiting may occur.

The usual adult oral dose ranges from 10 to 50 mg three or four times a day. The minimum effective dose is determined by giving 5 to 10 mg initially and repeating the same amount at hourly intervals until satisfactory response occurs, or until a maximum of 50 mg has been given. The effects of the drug sometimes appear within 30 minutes and are usually maximal within 60 to 90 minutes. The drug effects persist for about one hour.

If necessary, the effects of the drug can be abolished promptly by atropine (see OVERDOSAGE).
Ziprasidone Hydrochlori...

Ziprasidone Hydrochloride

2.1 Schizophrenia

Dose Selection

Ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules should be administered at an initial daily dose of 20 mg twice daily with food. In some patients, daily dosage may subsequently be adjusted on the basis of individual clinical status up to 80 mg twice daily. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 2 days, as steady-state is achieved within 1 to 3 days. In order to ensure use of the lowest effective dose, patients should ordinarily be observed for improvement for several weeks before upward dosage adjustment.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 20 mg to 100 mg twice daily in short-term, placebo-controlled clinical trials. There were trends toward dose response within the range of 20 mg to 80 mg twice daily, but results were not consistent. An increase to a dose greater than 80 mg twice daily is not generally recommended. The safety of doses above 100 mg twice daily has not been systematically evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment

While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long a patient treated with ziprasidone should remain on it, a maintenance study in patients who had been symptomatically stable and then randomized to continue ziprasidone or switch to placebo demonstrated a delay in time to relapse for patients receiving ziprasidone hydrochloride. [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. No additional benefit was demonstrated for doses above 20 mg twice daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

Oral: Dosage adjustments are generally not required on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment. Ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules are not approved for use in children or adolescents.
Robafen Ac

Robafen Ac

Directions:

Take every 4 hours or as directed by a doctor. Do not exceed 6 doses in 24 hours.

Adults and children 12 years of age and over: Take 2 teaspoonfuls.

Children 6 to under 12 years of age: Give 1 teaspoonful.

Not intended for children under 6 years of age. Giving a higher dose than recommended by a doctor

could result n serious side effects for your child. Do not exceed recommended dosage.
Sodium Polystyrene Sulf...

Sodium Polystyrene Sulfonate

Suspension of this drug should be freshly prepared and not stored beyond 24 hours.

The average daily adult dose of the resin is 15 g to 60 g. This is best provided by administering 15 grams (approximately 4 level teaspoons) of Sodium Polystyrene Sulfonate one to four times daily. One gram of Sodium Polystyrene Sulfonate contains 4.1 mEq of sodium; one level teaspoon contains approximately 3.5 grams of Sodium Polystyrene Sulfonate and 15 mEq of sodium. (A heaping teaspoon may contain as much as 10 to 12 grams of Sodium Polystyrene Sulfonate) Since the in vivo efficiency of sodium-potassium exchange resins is approximately 33 percent, about one third of the resin's actual sodium content is being delivered to the body.

In smaller children and infants, lower doses should be employed by using as a guide a rate of 1 mEq of potassium per gram of resin as the basis for calculation.

Each dose should be given as a suspension in a small quantity of water or, for greater palatability, in syrup. The amount of fluid usually ranges from 20 to 100mL, depending on the dose, or may be simply determined by allowing 3 to 4 mL per gram resin.

The resin may be introduced into the stomach through a plastic tube and, if desired, mixed with a diet appropriate for a patient in renal failure.

The resin may also be given, although with less effective results, in an enema consisting (for adults) of 30 g to 50 g every six hours. Each dose is administered as a warm emulsion (at body temperature) in 100 mL of aqueous vehicle, such as sorbitol. The emulsion should be agitated gently during administration. The enema should be retained as long as possible and followed by a cleansing enema.

After an initial cleansing enema, a soft, large size (French 28) rubber tube is inserted into the rectum for a distance of about 20 cm, with the tip well into the sigmoid colon, and taped in place. The resin is then suspended in the appropriate amount of aqueous vehicle at body temperature and introduced by gravity, while the particles are kept in suspension by stirring. The suspension is flushed with 50 mL or 100 mL of fluid, following which the tube is clamped and left in place. If back leakage occurs, the hips are elevated on pillows or a knee-chest position is taken temporarily. A somewhat thicker suspension may be used, but care should be taken that no paste is formed, because the latter has a greatly reduced exchange surface and will be particularly ineffective if deposited in the rectal ampulla. The suspension is kept in the sigmoid colon for several hours, if possible. Then the colon is irrigated with nonsodium containing solution at body temperature in order to remove the resin. Two quarts of flushing solution may be necessary. The returns are drained constantly through a Y tube connection. Particular attention should be paid to this cleansing enema when sorbitol has been used.

The intensity and duration of therapy depend upon the severity and resistance of hyperkalemia.

Sodium Polystyrene Sulfonate should not be heated for to do so may alter the exchange properties of the resin.
Aspirin

Aspirin

drink a full glass of water with each dose

adults and children 12 years and over: take 4 to 8 tablets every 4 hours not to exceed 48 tablets in 24 hours unless directed by a doctor

children under 12 years: consult a doctor
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection— Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should 4 generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations — The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment —The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Pediatric dosing information in pediatric patients with schizophrenia is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine drug product labeling. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3-4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy — The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment — When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Pediatric dosing information in pediatric patients with bipolar I disorder is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine drug product labeling. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyaxa and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine
Use in Combination For Symbyax(mg/day) Olanzapine (mg/day) Fluoxetine(mg/day) 3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40+10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 40+10
a Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5-5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients <18 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Itchy Eye

Itchy Eye

Adults and children 3 years of age and older:
Put 1 drop in the affected eye(s) twice daily, every 8-12 hours, no more than twice per day.
Children under 3 years of age:
Consult a doctor.
Benztropine Mesylate

Benztropine Mesylate

Benztropine mesylate tablets should be used when patients are able to take oral medication.

The injection is especially useful for psychotic patients with acute dystonic reactions or other reactions that make oral medication difficult or impossible. It is recommended also when a more rapid response is desired than can be obtained with tablets.

Because of cumulative action, therapy should be initiated with a low dose which is increased gradually at five or six-day intervals to the smallest amount necessary for optimal relief. Increases should be made in increments of 0.5 mg to a maximum of 6 mg or until optimal results are obtained without excessive adverse reactions.

Postencephalitic and Idiopathic Parkinsonism

The usual daily dose is 1 to 2 mg with a range of 0.5 to 6 mg orally or parenterally.

As with any agent used in parkinsonism, dosage must be individualized according to age and weight, and the type of parkinsonism being treated. Generally, older patients, and thin patients cannot tolerate large doses. Most patients with postencephalitic parkinsonism need fairly large doses and tolerate them well. Patients with a poor mental outlook are usually poor candidates for therapy.

In idiopathic parkinsonism, therapy may be initiated with a single daily dose of 0.5 to 1 mg at bedtime. In some patients, this will be adequate; in others 4 to 6 mg a day may be required.

In postencephalitic parkinsonism, therapy may be initiated in most patients with 2 mg a day in one or more doses. In highly sensitive patients, therapy may be initiated with 0.5 mg at bedtime, and increased as necessary.

Some patients experience greatest relief by taking the entire dose at bedtime, others react more favorably to divided doses, two to four times a day. Frequently, one dose a day is sufficient and divided doses may be unnecessary or undesirable.

The long duration of action of this drug makes it particularly suitable for bedtime medication when its effects may last throughout the night, enabling patients to turn in bed during the night more easily, and to rise in the morning.

When benztropine mesylate is started, do not terminate therapy with other antiparkinsonian agents abruptly. If the other agents are to be reduced or discontinued, it must be done gradually. Many patients obtain greatest relief with combination therapy.

Benztropine mesylate may be used concomitantly with Carbidopa-Levodopa, or with levodopa, in which case periodic dosage adjustment may be required in order to maintain optimum response.

Drug-Induced Extrapyramidal Disorders

In treating extrapyramidal disorders due to neuroleptic drugs (e.g., phenothiazines), the recommended dosage is 1 to 4 mg once or twice a day orally or parenterally. Dosage must be individualized according to the need of the patient. Some patients require more than recommended; others do not need as much.

When extrapyramidal disorders develop soon after initiation of treatment with neuroleptic drugs (e.g., phenothiazines), they are likely to be transient. One to 2 mg of benztropine mesylate tablets two or three times a day usually provides relief within one or two days. After one or two weeks, the drug should be withdrawn to determine the continued need for it. If such disorders recur, benztropine mesylate can be reinstituted.

Certain drug-induced extrapyramidal disorders that develop slowly may not respond to benztropine mesylate.
Haloperidol

Haloperidol

There is considerable variation from patient to patient in the amount of medication required for treatment. As with all antipsychotic drugs, dosage should be individualized according to the needs and response of each patient. Dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, should be carried out as rapidly as practicable to achieve optimum therapeutic control.

To determine the initial dosage, consideration should be given to the patient’s age, severity of illness, previous response to other antipsychotic drugs, and any concomitant medication or disease state. Children, debilitated or geriatric patients, as well as those with a history of adverse reactions to antipsychotic drugs, may require less haloperidol. The optimal response in such patients is usually obtained with more gradual dosage adjustments and at lower dosage levels, as recommended below.

Clinical experience suggests the following recommendations:

Oral Administration

Initial Dosage Range

Adults
Moderate Symptomatology 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Severe Symptomatology 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.
To achieve prompt control, higher doses may be required in some cases.
Geriatric or Debilitated Patients 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Chronic or Resistant Patients 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Patients who remain severely disturbed or inadequately controlled may require dosage adjustment. Daily dosages up to 100 mg may be necessary in some cases to achieve an optimal response. Infrequently, haloperidol has been used in doses above 100 mg for severely resistant patients; however, the limited clinical usage has not demonstrated the safety of prolonged administration of such doses.
Children

The following recommendations apply to children between the ages of 3 and 12 years (weight range 15 to 40 kg). Haloperidol is not intended for children under 3 years old. Therapy should begin at the lowest dose possible (0.5 mg per day). If required, the dose should be increased by an increment of 0.5 mg at 5 to 7 day intervals until the desired therapeutic effect is obtained. (See chart below.)

The total dose may be divided, to be given b.i.d. or t.i.d.
Psychotic Disorders 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.15 mg/kg/day Non-Psychotic Behavior Disorders and Tourette’s Disorder 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.075 mg/kg/day Severely disturbed psychotic children may require higher doses. In severely disturbed, non-psychotic children or in hyperactive children with accompanying conduct disorders, who have failed to respond to psychotherapy or medications other than antipsychotics, it should be noted that since these behaviors may be short-lived, short-term administration of haloperidol may suffice. There is no evidence establishing a maximum effective dosage. There is little evidence that behavior improvement is further enhanced in dosages beyond 6 mg per day.
Maintenance Dosage

Upon achieving a satisfactory therapeutic response, dosage should then be gradually reduced to the lowest effective maintenance level.

Switchover Procedure

The oral form should supplant the injectable as soon as practicable. In the absence of bioavailability studies establishing bioequivalence between these two dosage forms, the following guidelines for dosage are suggested. For an initial approximation of the total daily dose required, the parenteral dose administered in the preceding 24 hours may be used. Since this dose is only an initial estimate, it is recommended that careful monitoring of clinical signs and symptoms, including clinical efficacy, sedation, and adverse effects, be carried out periodically for the first several days following the initiation of switchover. In this way, dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, can be quickly accomplished. Depending on the patient’s clinical status, the first oral dose should be given within 12-24 hours following the last parenteral dose.
Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin Chloride

Adults

The usual dose is one 5 mg tablet two to three times a day. The maximum recommended dose is one 5 mg tablet four times a day. A lower starting dose of 2.5 mg two or three times a day is recommended for the frail elderly.

Pediatric Patients Over 5 Years of Age

The usual dose is one 5 mg tablet two times a day. The maximum recommended dose is one 5 mg tablet three times a day.
Primidone

Primidone

Adult Dosage

Patients 8 years of age and older who have received no previous treatment may be started on primidone according to the following regimen using either 50 mg or scored 250 mg primidone tablets.

Days 1 to 3: 100 to 125 mg at bedtime

Days 4 to 6: 100 to 125 mg b.i.d.

Days 7 to 9: 100 to 125 mg t.i.d.

Day 10 to maintenance: 250 mg t.i.d.

For most adults and children 8 years of age and over, the usual maintenance dosage is three to four 250 mg primidone tablets in divided doses (250 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.). If required, an increase to five or six 250 mg tablets daily may be made but daily doses should not exceed 500 mg q.i.d.
INITIAL: ADULTS AND CHILDREN OVER 8 KEY: * = 50 mg tablet; • = 250 mg tablet DAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 AM ** ** ** NOON PM ** ** ** ** ** ** DAY 7 8 9 10 11 12 AM ** ** ** • Adjust to Maintenance NOON ** ** ** • PM ** ** ** •
Dosage should be individualized to provide maximum benefit. In some cases, serum blood level determinations of primidone may be necessary for optimal dosage adjustment. The clinically effective serum level for primidone is between 5 to 12 mcg/mL.

In Patients Already Receiving Other Anticonvulsants

Primidone should be started at 100 to 125 mg at bedtime and gradually increased to maintenance level as the other drug is gradually decreased. This regimen should be continued until satisfactory dosage level is achieved for the combination, or the other medication is completely withdrawn. When therapy with primidone alone is the objective, the transition from concomitant therapy should not be completed in less than two weeks.

Pediatric Dosage

For children under 8 years of age, the following regimen may be used:

Days 1 to 3: 50 mg at bedtime

Days 4 to 6: 50 mg b.i.d.

Days 7 to 9: 100 mg b.i.d.

Day 10 to maintenance: 125 mg t.i.d. to 250 mg t.i.d.

For children under 8 years of age, the usual maintenance dosage is 125 to 250 mg three times daily or, 10 to 25 mg/kg/day in divided doses.
Enalapril Maleate

Enalapril Maleate

Hypertension
In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally may occur following the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for two to three days before beginning therapy with Enalapril Maleate Tablets to reduce the likelihood of hypotension. (See WARNINGS.) If the patient's blood pressure is not controlled with Enalapril Maleate Tablets alone, diuretic therapy may be resumed. If the diuretic cannot be discontinued an initial dose of 2.5 mg should be used under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) The recommended initial dose in patients not on diuretics is 5 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 10 to 40 mg per day administered in a single dose or two divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, an increase in dosage or twice daily administration should be considered. If blood pressure is not controlled with Enalapril Maleate Tablets alone, a diuretic may be added. Concomitant administration of Enalapril Maleate Tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases of serum potassium (see PRECAUTIONS). Dosage Adjustment in Hypertensive Patients with Renal Impairment The usual dose of enalapril is recommended for patients with a creatinine clearance >30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥3 mg/dL), the first dose is 2.5 mg once daily. The dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum of 40 mg daily. Renal Status Creatinine-Clearanceml/min Initial Dosemg/day Normal Renal Function >80 mL/min 5 mg Mild Impairment ≤80> 30 mL/min 5 mg Moderate to Severe Impairment ≤30 mL/min 2.5 mg Dialysis Patients*** - - 2.5 mg on dialysis days† ***See WARNINGS, Anaphylactoid reactions during membrane exposure. †Dosage on nondialysis days should be adjusted depending on the blood pressure response. Heart FailureEnalapril Maleate Tablets are indicated for the treatment of symptomatic heart failure, usually in combination with diuretics and digitalis. In the placebo-controlled studies that demonstrated improved survival, patients were titrated as tolerated up to 40 mg, administered in two divided doses. The recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg. The recommended dosing range is 2.5 to 20 mg given twice a day. Doses should be titrated upward, as tolerated, over a period of a few days or weeks. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials was 40 mg in divided doses. After the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension. Asymptomatic Left Ventricular Dysfunction In the trial that demonstrated efficacy, patients were started on 2.5 mg twice daily and were titrated as tolerated to the targeted daily dose of 20 mg (in divided doses). After the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension. Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Heart Failure and Renal Impairment or Hyponatremia In patients with heart failure who have hyponatremia (serum sodium less than 130 mEq/L) or with serum creatinine greater than 1.6 mg/dL, therapy should be initiated at 2.5 mg daily under close medical supervision. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Heart Failure, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) The dose may be increased to 2.5 mg b.i.d., then 5 mg b.i.d. and higher as needed, usually at intervals of four days or more if at the time of dosage adjustment there is not excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function. The maximum daily dose is 40 mg. Pediatric Hypertensive Patients The usual recommended starting dose is 0.08 mg/kg (up to 5 mg) once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 0.58 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Pharmacology in Pediatric Patients.) Enalapril maleate is not recommended in neonates and in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/ min/1.73 m 2, as no data are available. Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 1.0 mg/mL suspension) Add 50 mL of Bicitra ®** to a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 20 mg tablets of Enalapril maleate and shake for at least 2 minutes. Let concentrate stand for 60 minutes. Following the 60-minute hold time, shake the concentrate for an additional minute. Add 150 mL of Ora-Sweet SF TM*** to the concentrate in the PET bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2-8°C (36-46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days. Shake the suspension before each use.
Hypertension
In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally may occur following the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for two to three days before beginning therapy with Enalapril Maleate Tablets to reduce the likelihood of hypotension. (See WARNINGS.) If the patient's blood pressure is not controlled with Enalapril Maleate Tablets alone, diuretic therapy may be resumed. If the diuretic cannot be discontinued an initial dose of 2.5 mg should be used under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) The recommended initial dose in patients not on diuretics is 5 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 10 to 40 mg per day administered in a single dose or two divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, an increase in dosage or twice daily administration should be considered. If blood pressure is not controlled with Enalapril Maleate Tablets alone, a diuretic may be added. Concomitant administration of Enalapril Maleate Tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases of serum potassium (see PRECAUTIONS). Dosage Adjustment in Hypertensive Patients with Renal Impairment The usual dose of enalapril is recommended for patients with a creatinine clearance >30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥3 mg/dL), the first dose is 2.5 mg once daily. The dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum of 40 mg daily. Renal Status Creatinine-Clearanceml/min Initial Dosemg/day Normal Renal Function >80 mL/min 5 mg Mild Impairment ≤80> 30 mL/min 5 mg Moderate to Severe Impairment ≤30 mL/min 2.5 mg Dialysis Patients*** - - 2.5 mg on dialysis days† ***See WARNINGS, Anaphylactoid reactions during membrane exposure. †Dosage on nondialysis days should be adjusted depending on the blood pressure response. Heart FailureEnalapril Maleate Tablets are indicated for the treatment of symptomatic heart failure, usually in combination with diuretics and digitalis. In the placebo-controlled studies that demonstrated improved survival, patients were titrated as tolerated up to 40 mg, administered in two divided doses. The recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg. The recommended dosing range is 2.5 to 20 mg given twice a day. Doses should be titrated upward, as tolerated, over a period of a few days or weeks. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials was 40 mg in divided doses. After the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension. Asymptomatic Left Ventricular Dysfunction In the trial that demonstrated efficacy, patients were started on 2.5 mg twice daily and were titrated as tolerated to the targeted daily dose of 20 mg (in divided doses). After the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of Enalapril Maleate Tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension. Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Heart Failure and Renal Impairment or Hyponatremia In patients with heart failure who have hyponatremia (serum sodium less than 130 mEq/L) or with serum creatinine greater than 1.6 mg/dL, therapy should be initiated at 2.5 mg daily under close medical supervision. (See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Heart Failure, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions.) The dose may be increased to 2.5 mg b.i.d., then 5 mg b.i.d. and higher as needed, usually at intervals of four days or more if at the time of dosage adjustment there is not excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function. The maximum daily dose is 40 mg. Pediatric Hypertensive Patients The usual recommended starting dose is 0.08 mg/kg (up to 5 mg) once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 0.58 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Pharmacology in Pediatric Patients.) Enalapril maleate is not recommended in neonates and in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/ min/1.73 m 2, as no data are available. Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 1.0 mg/mL suspension) Add 50 mL of Bicitra ®** to a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 20 mg tablets of Enalapril maleate and shake for at least 2 minutes. Let concentrate stand for 60 minutes. Following the 60-minute hold time, shake the concentrate for an additional minute. Add 150 mL of Ora-Sweet SF TM*** to the concentrate in the PET bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2-8°C (36-46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days. Shake the suspension before each use.
Megestrol Acetate

Megestrol Acetate

Breast cancer:160 mg/day (40 mg q.i.d.).

Endometrial carcinoma:40 to 320 mg/day in divided doses.

At least 2 months of continuous treatment is considered an adequate period for determining the efficacy of megestrol acetate.
Metronidazole

Metronidazole

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Theophylline

Theophylline

Taking theophylline extended-release tablets immediately after a high-fat content meal may result in a somewhat higher Cmax and delayed Tmax, and somewhat greater extent of absorption. However, the differences are usually not great and this product may normally be administered without regard to meals (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Drug Interactions, Drug-Food Interactions).

Theophylline extended-release tablets are recommended for chronic or long-term management and prevention of symptoms, and not for use in treating acute symptoms of asthma and reversible bronchospasm.

General Considerations

The steady-state peak serum theophylline concentration is a function of the dose, the dosing interval, and the rate of theophylline absorption and clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a peak serum theophylline concentration in the 10 to 20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance (e.g., 400 to 1600 mg/day in adults <60 years old and 10 to 36 mg/kg/day in children 1 to 9 years old). For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either subtherapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. For example, at a dose of 900 mg/d in adults <60 years or 22 mg/kg/d in children 1 to 9 years, the steady-state peak serum theophylline concentration will be <10 mcg/mL in about 30% of patients, 10 to 20 mcg/mL in about 50% and 20 to 30 mcg/mL in about 20% of patients. The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of peak serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects.

Transient caffeine-like adverse effects and excessive serum concentrations in slow metabolizers can be avoided in most patients by starting with a sufficiently low dose and slowly increasing the dose, if judged to be clinically indicated, in small increments (see Table V). Dose increases should only be made if the previous dosage is well tolerated and at intervals of no less than 3 days to allow serum theophylline concentrations to reach the new steady state. Dosage adjustment should be guided by serum theophylline concentration measurement (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Table VI). Health care providers should instruct patients and care givers to discontinue any dosage that causes adverse effects, to withhold the medication until these symptoms are gone and to then resume therapy at a lower, previously tolerated dosage (see WARNINGS).

If the patient’s symptoms are well controlled, there are no apparent adverse effects, and no intervening factors that might alter dosage requirements (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS), serum theophylline concentrations should be monitored at 6 month intervals for rapidly growing children and at yearly intervals for all others. In acutely ill patients, serum theophylline concentrations should be monitored at frequent intervals, e.g. every 24 hours.

Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight.

Table V contains theophylline dosing titration schema recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. Table VI contains recommendations for theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Application of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.
Table V. Dosing initiation and titration (as anhydrous theophylline).* * Patients with more rapid metabolism, clinically identified by higher than average dose requirements, should receive a smaller dose more frequently (every 8 hours) to prevent breakthrough symptoms resulting from low trough concentrations before the next dose. A. Children (6 to 15 years) and adults (16 to 60 years) without risk factors for impaired clearance.
Titration Step
Children <45 kg Children >45 kg and adults 1.
Starting Dosage

12 to 14 mg/kg/day up

to a maximum of

300 mg/day divided
Q12 hrs*   300 mg/day divided Q12 hrs*   2.
After 3 days,

if tolerated,
increase dose to:
16 mg/kg/day up

to a maximum of

400 mg/day divided
Q12 hrs*
400 mg/day divided
Q12 hrs*   3.
After 3 more days,

if tolerated,
increase dose to:
20 mg/kg/day up to

a maximum of

600 mg/day
divided Q12 hrs*
600 mg/day divided
Q12 hrs*    B.
Patients With Risk Factors For Impaired Clearance, The Elderly (>60 Years), And Those In Whom It Is Not Feasible To Monitor Serum Theophylline Concentrations:

In children 6 to 15 years of age, the final theophylline dose should not exceed 16 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 400 mg/day in the presence of risk factors for reduced theophylline clearance (see WARNINGS) or if it is not feasible to monitor serum theophylline concentrations.

In adolescents ≥16 years and adults, including the elderly, the final theophylline dose should not exceed 400 mg/day in the presence of risk factors for reduced theophylline clearance (see WARNINGS) or if it is not feasible to monitor serum theophylline concentrations.
Table VI. Dosage adjustment guided by serum theophylline concentration. * Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present, physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g., sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see WARNINGS).
Peak Serum

Concentration

Dosage Adjustment
<9.9 mcg/mL If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated, increase dose about 25%. Recheck serum concentration after three days for further dosage adjustment. 10 to 14.9 mcg/mL
If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, maintain dose and recheck serum concentration at 6 to 12 month intervals.*
If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated consider adding additional medication(s) to treatment regimen. 15 to 19.9 mcg/mL Consider 10% decrease in dose to provide greater margin of safety even if current dosage is tolerated.* 20 to 24.9 mcg/mL Decrease dose by 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment. 25 to 30 mcg/mL Skip next dose and decrease subsequent doses at least 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment. If symptomatic, consider whether overdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). >30 mcg/mL Treat overdose as indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). If theophylline is subsequently resumed, decrease dose by at least 50% and recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment.
Once-Daily Dosing

The slow absorption rate of this preparation may allow once-daily administration in adult non-smokers with appropriate total body clearance and other patients with low dosage requirements. Once-daily dosing should be considered only after the patient has been gradually and satisfactorily titrated to therapeutic levels with q12h dosing. Once-daily dosing should be based on twice the q12h dose and should be initiated at the end of the last q12h dosing interval. The trough concentration (Cmin) obtained following conversion to once-daily dosing may be lower (especially in high clearance patients) and the peak concentration (Cmax) may be higher (especially in low clearance patients) than that obtained with q12h dosing. If symptoms recur, or signs of toxicity appear during the once-daily dosing interval, dosing on the q12h basis should be reinstituted.

It is essential that serum theophylline concentrations be monitored before and after transfer to once-daily dosing.

Food and posture, along with changes associated with circadian rhythm, may influence the rate of absorption and/or clearance rates of theophylline from extended-release dosage forms administered at night. The exact relationship of these and other factors to nighttime serum concentrations and the clinical significance of such findings require additional study. Therefore, it is not recommended that theophylline extended-release once-daily dosing be administered at night.
Mapap

Mapap

Do not take more than directed
AGE DOSE Adults and children 12 years and over Take 2 tablets every 4 to 6 hours while symptoms last Do not take more than 12 tablets in 24 hours Children 6 to 11 years Take 1 tablet every 4 to 6 hours while symptoms last Do not take more than 5 tablets in 24 hours Children under 6 years Do not use adult Regular Strength products in children under 6 years of age; this will provide more than the recommended dose (overdose) of acetaminophen and may cause liver damage.
Dok

Dok

Adults and children 12 years of age: Take 2 softgels, preferably at bedtime Children 6 to 12 years of age Take 1 softgel at bedtime
Nitro-time

Nitro-time

As noted above (CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY) careful studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels of nitroglycerin results in tolerance (i.e., loss of clinical response). Every dosing regimen for Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should provide a daily nitrate-free interval to avoid the development of this tolerance. The minimum necessary length of such an interval has not been defined, but studies with other nitroglycerin formulations have shown that 10 to 12 hours is sufficient. Large controlled studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin show that no dosing regimen with Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

The pharmacokinetics of Nitroglycerin capsules, and the clinical effects of multiple-dose regimens, have not been well studied. In clinical trials, the initial regimen of Nitroglycerin has been 2.5 to 6.5 mg three to four times a day, with subsequent upward dose adjustment guided by symptoms and side effects. In one trial, 5 of the 18 subjects were titrated up to a dose of 26 mg four times a day.
Pentoxifylline

Pentoxifylline

The usual dosage of pentoxifylline in extended-release tablet form is one tablet (400 mg) three times a day with meals.

While the effect of pentoxifylline may be seen within 2 to 4 weeks, it is recommended that treatment be continued for at least 8 weeks. Efficacy has been demonstrated in double-blind clinical studies of 6 months duration.

Digestive and central nervous system side effects are dose related. If patients develop these effects it is recommended that the dosage be lowered to one tablet twice a day (800 mg/day). If side effects persist at this lower dosage, the administration of pentoxifylline should be discontinued.
Carbidopa And Levodopa

Carbidopa And Levodopa

The optimum daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP must be determined by careful titration in each patient. Carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP are available in a 1:4 ratio of carbidopa to levodopa (25 mg/100 mg) as well as a 1:10 ratio (25 mg/250 mg and 10 mg/100 mg). Tablets of the two ratios may be given separately or combined as needed to provide the optimum dosage.

Studies show that peripheral dopa decarboxylase is saturated by carbidopa at approximately 70 to 100 mg a day. Patients receiving less than this amount of carbidopa are more likely to experience nausea and vomiting.

Usual Initial Dosage

Dosage is best initiated with one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg three times a day. This dosage schedule provides 75 mg of carbidopa per day. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day, as necessary, until a dosage of eight carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP, 25 mg/100 mg a day is reached.

If carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP, 10 mg/100 mg are used, dosage may be initiated with one tablet three or four times a day. However, this will not provide an adequate amount of carbidopa for many patients. Dosage may be increased by one tablet every day or every other day until a total of eight tablets (2 tablets q.i.d.) is reached.

How to Transfer Patients From Levodopa

Levodopa must be discontinued at least twelve hours before starting this combination product. A daily dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP should be chosen that will provide approximately 25% of the previous levodopa dosage. Patients who are taking less than 1500 mg of levodopa a day should be started on one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg three or four times a day. The suggested starting dosage for most patients taking more than 1500 mg of levodopa is one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/250 mg three or four times a day.

Maintenance

Therapy should be individualized and adjusted according to the desired therapeutic response. At least 70 to 100 mg of carbidopa per day should be provided. When a greater proportion of carbidopa is required, one carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg may be substituted for each carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 10 mg/100 mg. When more levodopa is required, each carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/250 mg should be substituted for a carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 25 mg/100 mg or a carbidopa and levodopa tablet USP, 10 mg/100 mg. If necessary, the dosage of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP, 25 mg/250 mg may be increased by one-half or one tablet every day or every other day to a maximum of eight tablets a day. Experience with total daily dosages of carbidopa greater than 200 mg is limited.

Because both therapeutic and adverse responses occur more rapidly with this combination product than with levodopa alone, patients should be monitored closely during the dose adjustment period. Specifically, involuntary movements will occur more rapidly with carbidopa and levodopa than with levodopa. The occurrence of involuntary movements may require dosage reduction. Blepharospasm may be a useful early sign of excess dosage in some patients.

Addition of Other Antiparkinsonian Medications

Standard drugs for Parkinson’s disease, other than levodopa without a decarboxylase inhibitor, may be used concomitantly while carbidopa and levodopa therapy is being administered, although dosage adjustments may be required.

Interruption of Therapy

Sporadic cases of a symptom complex resembling Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome (NMS) have been associated with dose reductions and withdrawal of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP. Patients should be observed carefully if abrupt reduction or discontinuation of carbidopa and levodopa tablets USP is required, especially if the patient is receiving neuroleptics (see WARNINGS).

If general anesthesia is required, carbidopa and levodopa therapy may be continued as long as the patient is permitted to take fluids and medication by mouth. If therapy is interrupted temporarily, the patient should be observed for symptoms resembling NMS, and the usual daily dosage may be administered as soon as the patient is able to take oral medication.
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Promethazine hydrochloride tablets, USP are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age (see WARNINGS - Black Box Warning and Use in Pediatric Patients). Promethazine hydrochloride tablets, USP are for oral administration only. Allergy

The average oral dose is 25 mg taken before retiring; however, 12.5 mg may be taken before meals and on retiring, if necessary. Single 25 mg doses at bedtime or 6.25 mg to 12.5 mg taken three times daily will usually suffice. After initiation of treatment in children or adults, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The administration of promethazine hydrochloride in 25 mg doses will control minor transfusion reactions of an allergic nature.

Motion Sickness

The average adult dose is 25 mg taken twice daily. The initial dose should be taken one-half to one hour before anticipated travel and be repeated 8 to 12 hours later, if necessary. On succeeding days of travel, it is recommended that 25 mg be given on arising and again before the evening meal. For children, promethazine hydrochloride tablets, USP 12.5 mg to 25 mg, twice daily, may be administered.

Nausea and Vomiting

Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see WARNINGS - Use in Pediatric Patients).

The average effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride tablets, USP for the active therapy of nausea and vomiting in children or adults is 25 mg. 12.5 to 25 mg doses may be repeated, as necessary, at 4 to 6 hour intervals.

For nausea and vomiting in children, the usual dose is 0.5 mg per pound of body weight, and the dose should be adjusted to the age and weight of the patient and the severity of the condition being treated.

For prophylaxis of nausea and vomiting, as during surgery and the postoperative period, the average dose is 25 mg repeated at 4 to 6 hour intervals, as necessary. Sedation

This product relieves apprehension and induces a quiet sleep from which the patient can be easily aroused. Administration of 12.5 to 25 mg promethazine hydrochloride orally at bedtime will provide sedation in children. Adults usually require 25 to 50 mg for nighttime, presurgical, or obstetrical sedation.

Pre- and Postoperative Use

Promethazine hydrochloride tablets, USP in 12.5 to 25 mg doses for children and 50 mg doses for adults the night before surgery relieves apprehension and produces a quiet sleep.

For preoperative medication, children require doses of 0.5 mg per pound of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine-like drug. Usual adult dosage is 50 mg promethazine hydrochloride tablets, USP with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the required amount of a belladonna alkaloid.

Postoperative sedation and adjunctive use with analgesics may be obtained by the administration of 12.5 to 25 mg in children and 25 to 50 mg doses in adults. Promethazine hydrochloride tablets, USP are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age.
Demeclocycline Hydrochl...

Demeclocycline Hydrochloride

Therapy should be continued for at least 24 to 48 hours after symptoms and fever have subsided.

Concomitant therapy: Absorption of tetracyclines is impaired by antacids containing aluminum, calcium, or magnesium, and by iron-containing preparations. Foods and some dairy products also interfere with absorption. Oral forms of tetracycline should be given at least 1 hour before or 2 hours after meals.

In patients with renal impairment: (See WARNINGS.) Tetracyclines should be used cautiously in patients with impaired renal function. Total dosage should be decreased by reduction of recommended individual doses and/or by extending time intervals between doses.

In patients with liver impairment: Tetracyclines should be used cautiously in patients with impaired liver function. Total dosage should be decreased by reduction of recommended individual doses and/or by extending time intervals between doses.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid with the oral formulations of tetracyclines is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

Adults: Usual daily dose - Four divided doses of 150 mg each or two divided doses of 300 mg each.

For pediatric patients above eight years of age: Usual daily dose, 7 to 13 mg per kg body weight per day, depending upon the severity of the disease, divided into two to four doses not to exceed adult dosage of 600 mg per day.

Gonorrhea patients sensitive to penicillin may be treated with demeclocycline administered as an initial oral dose of 600 mg followed by 300 mg every 12 hours for four days to a total of 3 grams.
Ursodiol

Ursodiol

Gallstone Dissolution

The recommended dose for ursodiol treatment of radiolucent gallbladder stones is 8 - 10 mg/kg/day given in 2 or 3 divided doses. Ultrasound images of the gallbladder should be obtained at 6-month intervals for the first year of ursodiol therapy to monitor gallstone response. If gallstones appear to have dissolved, ursodiol therapy should be continued and dissolution confirmed on a repeat ultrasound examination within 1 to 3 months. Most patients who eventually achieve complete stone dissolution will show partial or complete dissolution at the first on-treatment reevaluation. If partial stone dissolution is not seen by 12 months of ursodiol therapy, the likelihood of success is greatly reduced.

Gallstone Prevention

The recommended dosage of ursodiol for gallstone prevention in patients undergoing rapid weight loss is 600 mg/day (300 mg b.i.d.).
Mucus Relief

Mucus Relief

take with a full glass of water adults and children 12 years of age and over: 1 tablet, every 4 hours. Do not take more than 6 tablets in 24 hours. children under 12 years: do not use
Bismatrol

Bismatrol

chew or dissolve in mouth adults and children 12 years and over: 2 tablets every 1/2 to 1 hour as needed do not take more than 8 doses (16 tablets) in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor drink plenty of fluids to help prevent dehydration which may accompany diarrhea. Other information: each tablet contains: sodium less than 1 mg salicylate 102 mg calcium 140 mg very low sodium avoid excessive heat (over 104˚F or 40˚C) TAMPER EVIDENT: Do not use if individual compartments are torn or missing.
Bismatrol

Bismatrol

shake well before use for accurate dosing, use dose cup adults and children 12 years and over: 1 dose (2 tbsp or 30 mL) every 1/2 to 1 hour as needed do not exceed 8 doses (16 tbsp or 240 mL) in 24 hours use until diarrhea stops but not more than 2 days children under 12 years: ask a doctor drink plenty of clear fluids to help prevent dehydration caused by diarrhea
Mintox Plus Tabs

Mintox Plus Tabs

chew 1 to 4 tablets 4 times a day or as directed by a doctor.
Bismatrol

Bismatrol

shake well before use for accurate dosing, use dose cup adults and children 12 years and over: 1 dose (2 tbsp or 30 mL) every hour as needed do not exceed 4 doses (8 tbsp or 120 mL) in 24 hours use until diarrhea stops but not more than 2 days children under 12 years: ask a doctor drink plenty of clear fluids to help prevent dehydration caused by diarrhea
Loratadine And Pseudoep...

Loratadine And Pseudoephedrine Sulfate

do not divide, crush, chew or dissolve the tablet adults and children 12 years and over 1 tablet daily with a full glass of water; not more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 12 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Loratadine Odt

Loratadine Odt

place 1 tablet on tongue; tablet disintegrates, with or without water adults and children 6 years and over 1 tablet daily; not more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 6 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Bisacodyl Enteric Coate...

Bisacodyl Enteric Coated

-take with a glass of water

adults and children 12 years and over- take 1 to 3 tablets in a single daily dose

children 6 to under 12 years of age - take 1 tablet in a single daily dose

children under 6 years of age - ask a doctor
Furosemide

Furosemide

Edema

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response.

Adults

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 to 80 mg given as a single dose. Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, the same dose can be administered 6 to 8 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 or 40 mg and given not sooner than 6 to 8 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. The individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily (e.g., at 8 am and 2 pm). The dose of furosemide may be carefully titrated up to 600 mg/day in patients with clinically severe edematous states.

Edema may be most efficiently and safely mobilized by giving furosemide on 2 to 4 consecutive days each week.

When doses exceeding 80 mg/day are given for prolonged periods, careful clinical observation and laboratory monitoring are particularly advisable. (See PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests.)

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Pediatric Patients

The usual initial dose of oral furosemide in pediatric patients is 2 mg/kg body weight, given as a single dose. If the diuretic response is not satisfactory after the initial dose, dosage may be increased by 1 or 2 mg/kg no sooner than 6 to 8 hours after the previous dose. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended. For maintenance therapy in pediatric patients, the dose should be adjusted to the minimum effective level.

Hypertension

Therapy should be individualized according to the patient’s response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain the therapeutic response.

Adults

The usual initial dose of furosemide for hypertension is 80 mg, usually divided into 40 mg twice a day. Dosage should then be adjusted according to response. If response is not satisfactory, add other antihypertensive agents.

Changes in blood pressure must be carefully monitored when furosemide is used with other antihypertensive drugs, especially during initial therapy. To prevent excessive drop in blood pressure, the dosage of other agents should be reduced by at least 50 percent when furosemide is added to the regimen. As the blood pressure falls under the potentiating effect of furosemide, a further reduction in dosage or even discontinuation of other antihypertensive drugs may be necessary.

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection and dose adjustment for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Phosphate

Phosphate

use as a laxative for relief of occasional constipation dilute dose in the table below with one glass (8 fl. oz.) cool water. Drink, then follow with at least one additional glass (8 fl. oz.) cool water. There is significant loss of liquid when using this product. To prevent dehydration drink plenty of clear liquid after use. Do not use for bowel cleansing. Do not take more unless directed by a doctor. See Warning. There are three Teaspoons in one Tablespoon.
*SINGLE DAILY DOSAGE. DO NOT TAKE MORE OF THIS PRODUCT IN A 24-HOUR PERIOD
Allergy

Allergy

adults and children 6 years and over

1 tablet daily; not more than 1 tablet in 24 hours

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver or kidney disease

ask a doctor
Sudogest

Sudogest

adults and children 12 years and older: 1 tablet every 12 hours; not more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Mi Acid

Mi Acid

chew 2 to 4 tablets thoroughly as needed between meals and at bedtime or as directed by a doctor.
Nicorelief

Nicorelief

if you are under 18 years of age, ask a doctor before use before using this product, read the enclosed User’s Guide for complete directions and other important information stop smoking completely when you begin using the lozenge if you smoke your first cigarette within 30 minutes of waking up, use 4 mg nicotine lozenge if you smoke your first cigarette more than 30 minutes after waking up, use 2 mg nicotine lozenge according to the following 12 week schedule: Weeks 1 to 6 Weeks 7 to 9 Weeks 10 to 12
1 lozenge every
1 to 2 hours
1 lozenge every
2 to 4 hours
1 lozenge every
4 to 8 hours nicotine lozenge is a medicine and must be used a certain way to get the best results place the lozenge in your mouth and allow the lozenge to slowly dissolve (about 20-30 minutes). Minimize swallowing. Do not chew or swallow lozenge. you may feel a warm or tingling sensation occasionally move the lozenge from one side of your mouth to the other until completely dissolved (about 20-30 minutes) do not eat or drink 15 minutes before using or while the lozenge is in your mouth to improve your chances of quitting, use at least 9 lozenges per day for the first 6 weeks do not use more than one lozenge at a time or continuously use one lozenge after another since this may cause you hiccups, heartburn, nausea or other side effects do not use more than 5 lozenges in 6 hours. Do not use more than 20 lozenges per day. stop using the nicotine lozenge at the end of 12 weeks. If you still feel the need to use nicotine lozenges, talk to your doctor.
Amlodipine Besylate

Amlodipine Besylate

2.1 Adults

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine besylate tablets, USP is 5 mg once daily with a maximum dose of 10 mg once daily.

Small, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine besylate tablets, USP to other antihypertensive therapy.

Adjust dosage according to each patient's need. In general, titration should proceed over 7 to 14 days so that the physician can fully assess the patient's response to each dose level. Titration may proceed more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently.

The recommended dose for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 to 10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect [see Adverse Reactions (6)].

The recommended dose range for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 to 10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.2 Children

The effective antihypertensive oral dose in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4), Clinical Studies (14.1)].
Quetiapine Fumarate

Quetiapine Fumarate

Quetiapine fumarate tablets can be taken with or without food

2.1       Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection—quetiapine should generally be administered with an initial dose of 25 mg twice daily, with increases in total daily dose of 25 mg to 50 mg divided in two or three doses on the second and third day, as tolerated, to a total dose range of 300 mg to 400 mg daily by the fourth day. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 2 days, as steady-state for quetiapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 to 2 days in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 25mg to 50 mg divided twice daily are recommended. Most efficacy data with quetiapine were obtained using three times daily dosing regimens, but in one controlled trial 225 mg given twice per day was also effective.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 150 mg/day to 750 mg/day in the clinical trials supporting the effectiveness of quetiapine. In a dose response study, doses above 300 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 300 mg/day dose. In other studies, however, doses in the range of 400 mg/day to 500 mg/day appeared to be needed. The safety of doses above 800 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Maintenance Treatment—The effectiveness of quetiapine for longer than 6 weeks has not been evaluated in controlled clinical trials. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with quetiapine should be maintained, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Adolescents (13 to 17 years)

Pediatric dosing information in patients (13 to 17 years of age) with schizophrenia is approved for AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals LP’s quetiapine fumarate drug product labeling. However, due to AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals LP’s marketing exclusivity rights; this drug product is not labeled for such use in those adolescent patients.

2.2       Bipolar Disorder

Adults

Acute Treatment of Manic Episodes in Bipolar I Disorder

Dose Selection—When used as monotherapy or adjunct therapy (with lithium or divalproex), quetiapine should be initiated in twice daily doses totaling 100 mg/day on Day 1, increased to 400 mg/day on Day 4 in increments of up to 100 mg/day in twice daily divided doses. Further dosage adjustments up to 800 mg/day by Day 6 should be in increments of no greater than 200 mg/day. Data indicate that the majority of patients responded between 400 mg/day to 800 mg/day. The safety of doses above 800 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Acute Treatment of Depressive Episodes in Bipolar Disorder

Dose Selection—Quetiapine should be administered once daily at bedtime to reach 300 mg/day by Day 4.

Recommended Dosing Schedule
Day Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Quetiapine 50 mg 100 mg 200 mg 300 mg
In the clinical trials supporting effectiveness, the dosing schedule was 50 mg, 100 mg, 200 mg and 300 mg/day for Days 1-4 respectively. Patients receiving 600 mg increased to 400 mg on Day 5 and 600 mg on Day 8 (Week 1). Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with quetiapine at both 300 mg and 600 mg; however, no additional benefit was seen in the 600 mg group.

Maintenance Treatment of Bipolar I Disorder

Maintenance of efficacy in bipolar I disorder was demonstrated with quetiapine (administered twice daily totaling 400 to 800 mg per day) as adjunct therapy to lithium or divalproex. Generally, in the maintenance phase, patients continued on the same dose on which they were stabilized during the stabilization phase [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years)

Pediatric dosing information in patients (10 to 17 years of age) with bipolar mania is approved for AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals LP’s quetiapine fumarate drug product labeling. However, due to AstraZeneca Pharmaceuticals LP’s marketing exclusivity rights; this drug product is not labeled for such use in those pediatric patients.

2.3       Dosing in Special Populations

Consideration should be given to a slower rate of dose titration and a lower target dose in the elderly and in patients who are debilitated or who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Patients with hepatic impairment should be started on 25 mg/day. The dose should be increased daily in increments of 25 mg/day - 50 mg/day to an effective dose, depending on the clinical response and tolerability of the patient.

2.4       Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that when restarting patients who have had an interval of less than one week off quetiapine, titration of quetiapine is not required and the maintenance dose may be reinitiated. When restarting therapy of patients who have been off quetiapine for more than one week, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

2.5       Switching from Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from antipsychotics to quetiapine, or concerning concomitant administration with antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching patients with schizophrenia from depot antipsychotics, if medically appropriate, initiate quetiapine therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.
Mi-acid Gas Relief

Mi-acid Gas Relief

chew 2 to 4 tablets thoroughly as needed after meals and at bedtime. do not exceed 6 tablets per day unless directed by a physician.
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should 4 generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations — The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment — The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]

Maintenance Treatment — The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy — The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment — When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]

Maintenance Treatment — The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company's olanzapine tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company's marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyaxa and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine
Use in Combination For Symbyax(mg/day) Olanzapine (mg/day) Fluoxetine(mg/day) 3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40+10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 40+10
a Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Diphenhydramine Hydroch...

Diphenhydramine Hydrochloride

Adults and children 12 years and over: take 25 to 50 mg (1 to 2 capsule) every 4 to 6 hours, not more than 12 capsules in 24 hours.

Children 6 years to 12 years of age: take 12.5 mg** (1 capsule) every 4 to 6 hours, not more than 6 capsules in 24 hours.

Children under 6 years of age: do not use

**12.5mg dosage strength is not available in this package. Do not attempt to break capsule
Robafen Cough

Robafen Cough

do not take more than 8 liquidgels in any 24-hour period adults and children 12 years and over: take 2 liquidgels every 6 to 8 hours, as needed children under 12 years: do not use
Allopurinol

Allopurinol

The dosage of allopurinol to accomplish full control of gout and to lower serum uric acid to normal or near-normal levels varies with the severity of the disease. The average is 200 to 300 mg/day for patients with mild gout and 400 to 600 mg/day for those with moderately severe tophaceous gout. The appropriate dosage may be administered in divided doses or as a single equivalent dose with the 300-mg tablet. Dosage requirements in excess of 300 mg should be administered in divided doses. The minimal effective dosage is 100 to 200 mg daily and the maximal recommended dosage is 800 mg daily. To reduce the possibility of flare-up of acute gouty attacks, it is recommended that the patient start with a low dose of allopurinol (100 mg daily) and increase at weekly intervals by 100 mg until a serum uric acid level of 6 mg/dL or less is attained but without exceeding the maximal recommended dosage.

Normal serum urate levels are usually achieved in 1 to 3 weeks. The upper limit of normal is about 7 mg/dL for men and postmenopausal women and 6 mg/dL for premenopausal women. Too much reliance should not be placed on a single serum uric acid determination since, for technical reasons, estimation of uric acid may be difficult. By selecting the appropriate dosage and, in certain patients, using uricosuric agents concurrently, it is possible to reduce serum uric acid to normal or, if desired, to as low as 2 to 3 mg/dL and keep it there indefinitely.

While adjusting the dosage of allopurinol in patients who are being treated with colchicine and/or anti-inflammatory agents, it is wise to continue the latter therapy until serum uric acid has been normalized and there has been freedom from acute gouty attacks for several months.

In transferring a patient from a uricosuric agent to allopurinol, the dose of the uricosuric agent should be gradually reduced over a period of several weeks and the dose of allopurinol gradually increased to the required dose needed to maintain a normal serum uric acid level.

It should also be noted that allopurinol is generally better tolerated if taken following meals. A fluid intake sufficient to yield a daily urinary output of at least 2 liters and the maintenance of a neutral or, preferably, slightly alkaline urine are desirable.

Since allopurinol and its metabolites are primarily eliminated only by the kidney, accumulation of the drug can occur in renal failure, and the dose of allopurinol should consequently be reduced. With a creatinine clearance of 10 to 20 mL/min, a daily dosage of 200 mg of allopurinol is suitable. When the creatinine clearance is less than 10 mL/min, the daily dosage should not exceed 100 mg. With extreme renal impairment (creatinine clearance less than 3 mL/min) the interval between doses may also need to be lengthened.

The correct size and frequency of dosage for maintaining the serum uric acid just within the normal range is best determined by using the serum uric acid level as an index.

For the prevention of uric acid nephropathy during the vigorous therapy of neoplastic disease, treatment with 600 to 800 mg daily for 2 or 3 days is advisable together with a high fluid intake. Otherwise similar considerations to the above recommendations for treating patients with gout govern the regulation of dosage for maintenance purposes in secondary hyperuricemia.

The dose of allopurinol recommended for management of recurrent calcium oxalate stones in hyperuricosuric patients is 200 to 300 mg/day in divided doses or as the single equivalent. This dose may be adjusted up or down depending upon the resultant control of the hyperuricosuria based upon subsequent 24 hour urinary urate determinations. Clinical experience suggests that patients with recurrent calcium oxalate stones may also benefit from dietary changes such as the reduction of animal protein, sodium, refined sugars, oxalate-rich foods, and excessive calcium intake, as well as an increase in oral fluids and dietary fiber.

Children, 6 to 10 years of age, with secondary hyperuricemia associated with malignancies may be given 300 mg allopurinol daily while those under 6 years are generally given 150 mg daily. The response is evaluated after approximately 48 hours of therapy and a dosage adjustment is made if necessary.
All Day Allergy D

All Day Allergy D

do not break or chew tablet; swallow tablet whole adults and children 12 years and over take 1 tablet every 12 hours; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours. adults 65 years and over ask a doctor children under 12 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Ibuprofen Suspension

Ibuprofen Suspension

• this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use • do not give more than directed • shake well before using • find right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise use age. • use only enclosed measuring cup • if needed, repeat dose every 6-8 hours • do not use more than 4 times a day • replace original bottle cap to maintain child resistance • wash dosage cup after each use
Dosing Chart

Weight (lbs)

Age(yrs)

Dose (teaspoonful or mL)

under 2 years

ask a doctor

24-35 lbs

2-3 years

1 tsp or 5 mL

36-47 lbs

4-5 years

1 ½ tsp or 7.5 mL

48-59 lbs

6-8 years

2 tsp or 10 mL

60-71 lbs

9-10 years

2 ½ tsp or 12.5 mL

72-95 lbs

11 years

3 tsp or 15 mL
Lice Killing

Lice Killing

Shake well before using
Important: Read warnings before use
Adults and children 2 years and over:

Inspect
check each household member with a magnifying glass in bright light for lice/nits (eggs) look for tiny nits near scalp, beginning at back of neck and behind ears examine small sections of hair at a time unlike dandruff which moves when touched, nits stick to the hair if either lice or nits are found, treat with this product
Treat
apply thoroughly to DRY HAIR or other affected area. For head lice, first apply behind ears and to back of neck. allow product to remain for 10 minutes, but no longer use warm water to form a lather, shampoo, then thoroughly rinse for head lice, towel dry hair and comb out tangles
Remove lice and their eggs (nits)
use a fine-tooth or special lice/nit comb. Remove any remaining nits by hand (using a throw-away glove). hair should remain slightly damp while removing nits if hair dries during combing, dampen slightly with water for head lice, part hair into sections. Do one section at a time starting on top of the head. Longer hair may take 1 to 2 hours. lift a 1-to 2-inch wide strand of hair. Place comb as close to scalp as possible and comb with a firm, even motion away from scalp. pin back each strand of hair after combing clean comb often. Wipe nits away with tissue and discard in a plastic bag. Seal bag and discard to prevent lice from coming back. after combing, thoroughly recheck for lice/nits. Repeat combing if necessary. check daily for any lice/nits that you missed a second treatment must be done in 7 to 10 days to kill any newly hatched lice if infestation continues, see a doctor for other treatments Children under 2 years: ask a doctor
Nicorelief

Nicorelief

if you are under 18 years of age, ask a doctor before use before using this product, read the enclosed User’s Guide for complete directions and other important information stop smoking completely when you begin using the lozenge if you smoke your first cigarette more than 30 minutes after waking up, use 2 mg nicotine lozenge if you smoke your first cigarette within 30 minutes of waking up, use 4 mg nicotine lozenge according to the following 12 week schedule: Weeks 1 to 6 Weeks 7 to 9 Weeks 10 to 12
1 lozenge every
1 to 2 hours
1 lozenge every
2 to 4 hours
1 lozenge every
4 to 8 hours nicotine lozenge is a medicine and must be used a certain way to get the best results place the lozenge in your mouth and allow the lozenge to slowly dissolve (about 20-30 minutes). Minimize swallowing. Do not chew or swallow lozenge. you may feel a warm or tingling sensation occasionally move the lozenge from one side of your mouth to the other until completely dissolved (about 20-30 minutes) do not eat or drink 15 minutes before using or while the lozenge is in your mouth to improve your chances of quitting, use at least 9 lozenges per day for the first 6 weeks do not use more than one lozenge at a time or continuously use one lozenge after another since this may cause you hiccups, heartburn, nausea or other side effects do not use more than 5 lozenges in 6 hours. Do not use more than 20 lozenges per day. stop using the nicotine lozenge at the end of 12 weeks. If you still feel the need to use nicotine lozenges, talk to your doctor.
Dok Extra Strength Stoo...

Dok Extra Strength Stool Softener

adults and children over 12 years of age and over: take 1 softgel daily or as directed by a doctor children under 12 years of age: take as directed by a doctor
Kao- Tin

Kao- Tin

adults and children over 12 years of age: take 1 softgel daily for several days, or until bowel movements are normal, or as directed by a doctor. children under 12 years of age: take as directed by a doctor.
Cerebromax

Cerebromax

do not exceed 6 doses in 24 hours take with a full glass of water adults and children 12 years of age and over: 1 tablet, every 4 hours children under 12 years: do not use
Major Oral Pain Relief ...

Major Oral Pain Relief Maximum Strength

Adults and children 2 years of age and older: wipe liquid on with cotton, or cotton swab, or finger tip. apply to the affected area up to 4 times daily of as directed by a doctor or dentist. Children under 12 years of age: adult supervision should be given in the use of this product. Children under 2 years of age: consult a doctor or dentist.
Major Camphor And Pheno...

Major Camphor And Phenol

clean the affected area adults and children 2 years of age or older: apply a small amount of this product on the area 1 to 3 times daily children under 2 years of age: consult a doctor
Sennadocusate Sodium

Sennadocusate Sodium

take preferably at bedtime or as directed by a doctor age starting dosage maximum dosage adults and children 12 years and older 2 tablets once a day 4 tablets twice a day 6 to under 12 years 1 tablet once a day 2 tablets twice a day children under 6 years ask a doctor ask a doctor
Hydrocortisone

Hydrocortisone

For oral administration

DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

The initial dosage varies from 20 to 240 mg a day depending on the disease being treated. In less severe diseases doses lower than 20 mg may suffice, while in severe diseases doses higher than 240 mg may be required. The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until the patient's response is satisfactory. If satisfactory clinical response does not occur after a reasonable period of time, discontinue hydrocortisone tablets and transfer the patient to other therapy.

After a favorable initial response, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial dosage in small amounts to the lowest dosage that maintains an adequate clinical response.

Patients should be observed closely for signs that might require adjustment, including changes in clinical status resulting from remissions or exacerbations of the disease, individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of stress (e.g., surgery, infection, trauma). During stress it may be necessary to increase dosage temporarily.

If the drug is to be stopped after more than a few days of treatment, it usually should be withdrawn gradually.
Major Dok Docusate Sodi...

Major Dok Docusate Sodium

adults and children over 12 years of age: take 1 to 3 softgels preferably at bedtime children 6- 12 years of age: take 1 softgel at bedtime
Dicyclomine

Dicyclomine

Dosage must be adjusted to individual patient needs.

2.1 Oral Dosage and Administration in Adults

The recommended initial dose is 20 mg four times a day. After one week treatment with the initial dose, the dose may be increased to 40 mg four times a day unless side effects limit dosage escalation.

If efficacy is not achieved within 2 weeks or side effects require doses below 80 mg per day, the drug should be discontinued. Documented safety data are not available for doses above 80 mg daily for periods longer than 2 weeks.
Major Ranitidine Maximu...

Major Ranitidine Maximum Strength

adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water 30 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn can be used up to twice daily (do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours) children under 12 years: ask a doctor
All-nite Cold And Flu

All-nite Cold And Flu

take only as recommended – see Liver warning use dose cup do not exceed 4 doses per 24 hours adults and children 12 years and over 30 mL (2 TBSP) every 6 hours children under 12 years ask a doctor when using other Daytime or Nighttime products, carefully read each label to insure correct dosing
Fiber Therapy

Fiber Therapy

MIX THIS PRODUCT (CHILD OR ADULT DOSE) WITH AT LEAST 8 OUNCES (A FULL GLASS) OF WATER OR OTHER FLUID. TAKING THIS PRODUCT WITHOUT ENOUGH LIQUID MAY CAUSE CHOKING. SEE CHOKING WARNING use product at the first sign of constipation or irregularity put one dose in a full glass of cold water stir briskly and drink promptly drinking another glass of water is helpful
FIBER THERAPY Orange Flavor
Age Dose adults & children above 12 years of age start with 1 heaping tablespoon (19g). Increase as needed, 1 heaping tablespoon at a time, up to 3 times per day. children 6 - 12 years of age half the adult dose in 8 ounces of cold water once daily.
Natural Fiber Therapy N...

Natural Fiber Therapy Natural Laxative

Other information
each tablespoon contains: potassium 30 mg; sodium 5 mg store at room temperature, USP protect contents from humidity contains a 100% natural, therapeutic fiber
Mapap Extra Strength

Mapap Extra Strength

Directions
adults and children 12 years of age and over take 2 capsules every 4 hour to 6 hours, not to exceed 8 capsules in 24 hours. Do not take for more than 10 days unless directed by a doctor. children under 12 years of age Do not use Extra Strength product in children 12 years of age; this will provide more than the recommended dose (overdose) of pain reliever and could cause liver damage.
DO NOT EXCEED RECOMMENDED DOSE

Other information
store at room temperature, USP use by expiration date on pckage do not use if capsule band or imprinted safety seal under cap is broken or missing side effects occur You may report side effects at 1-800-616-2471 (Toll Free)
Cyclobenzaprine Hydroch...

Cyclobenzaprine Hydrochloride

For most patients, the recommended dose of cyclobenzaprine HCl is 5 mg three times a day. Based on individual patient response, the dose may be increased to either 7.5 mg or 10 mg three times a day. Use of cyclobenzaprine HCl for periods longer than two or three weeks is not recommended. (SeeINDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

Less frequent dosing should be considered for hepatically impaired or elderly patients (seePRECAUTIONS, Impaired Hepatic Function, andUse in the Elderly).
Oral Peroxide

Oral Peroxide

unscrew cap and remove safety seal from bottle affix applicator cap to bottle replace top of bottle when not in use
Adults and children 2 years and older:
use up to 4 times daily after meals and at bedtime or as directed by dentist or doctor
For direct application
do not dilute apply several drops directly from bottle onto affected area spit out after 2 to 3 minutes
As a mouthwash (oral rinse)
place 10 to 20 drops onto tongue mix with saliva swish around in the mouth over the affected area for at least 1 minute and spit out
Children under 12 years: should be supervised in the use of this product

Children under 2 years: consult a dentist or doctor
Lithium Carbonate

Lithium Carbonate

Acute Mania - Optimal patient response to Lithium Carbonate usually can be established and maintained with 600 mg t.i.d. Such doses will normally produce an effective serum lithium level ranging between 1 and 1.5 mEq/L. Dosage must be individualized according to serum levels and clinical response. Regular monitoring of the patient's clinical state and serum lithium levels is necessary. Serum levels should be determined twice per week during the acute phase, and until the serum level and clinical condition of the patient have been stabilized.

Long-Term Control - The desirable serum lithium levels are 0.6 to 1.2 mEq/L. Dosage will vary from one individual to another, but usually 300 mg of Lithium Carbonate t.i.d. or q.i.d. will maintain this level. Serum lithium levels in uncomplicated cases receiving maintenance therapy during remission should be monitored at least every two months.

Patients abnormally sensitive to lithium may exhibit toxic signs at serum levels of 1 to 1.5 mEq/L. Elderly patients often respond to reduced dosage, and may exhibit signs of toxicity at serum levels ordinarily tolerated by other patients.

N.B.: Blood samples for serum lithium determination should be drawn immediately prior to the next dose when lithium concentrations are relatively stable (i.e., 8-12 hours after the previous dose). Total reliance must not be placed on serum levels alone. Accurate patient evaluation requires both clinical and laboratory analysis.
Infants Mapap Pain Reli...

Infants Mapap Pain Reliever fever Reducer

This product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use.
USE A DOSING DEVICE to give this medicine use weight, if possible, to dose; otherwise use age Fill to dose level. Dispense liquid slowly into child's mouth, toward inner cheek. if needed, repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms last. do not give more than 5 doses in 24 hours Children 2 to 3 years or 24 to 35 pounds: 2 dropperfuls (2 x 0.8 mL). Children under 2 years or under 24 pounds: ask a doctor
Fexofenadine Hydrochlor...

Fexofenadine Hydrochloride

adults and children 12 years of age and over take one 180 mg tablet with water once a day; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
Acid Gone Antacid

Acid Gone Antacid

shake well take 1-2 tablespoonfuls four times a day or as directed by a doctor take after meals and at bedtime dispense product only by spoon or other measuring device
Major Vitamin A And D S...

Major Vitamin A And D Skin Protectant

apply liberally as often as necessary change wet and soiled diapers promptly, cleanse the diaper area, and allow to dry use with each diaper change, especially at bedtime when exposure to wet diapers may be prolonged
Banophen

Banophen

take every 4 to 6 hours do not take more than 6 doses in 24 hours adults and children 12 years and over 2 - 4 teaspoonsful (25 mg to 50 mg) children 6 to under 12 years 1 - 2 teaspoonsful (12.5 mg to 25 mg) children 2 to 5 years of age do not use unless directed by a doctor children under 2 years of age do not use
Major Thera-gel Therape...

Major Thera-gel Therapeutic Anti-dandruff

wet hair thoroughly massage shampoo into the scalp lather. leave on hair and scalp for several minutes. rinse and repeat for best results use at least twice a week or as directed by a doctor
Ibuprofen

Ibuprofen

• do not take more than directed • the smallest effective dose should be used
adults and children 12 years and

older
• take 1 caplet every 4 to 6 hours while symptoms persist • if pain or fever does not respond to 1 caplet, 2 caplets may be used • do not exceed 6 caplets in 24 hours, unless directed by a doctor
children under 12 years
• ask a doctor
Fiber Tabs

Fiber Tabs

take each dose of this product with at least 8 ounces (a full glass) of water or other fluid. Taking this product without enough liquid may cause choking. See Choking warning. Do not take more than 4 doses in 24 hours age recommended dose daily maximum adults and children 12 years of age and over 2 tablets 1 to 4 times a day children under 12 years consult a physician
Dibromm Dm

Dibromm Dm

do not exceed more than 6 doses in a 24-hour period

age doseadults and children 12 years and over........ 4 teaspoonfuls every 4-6 hourschildren 6 years to under 12 years...............2 teaspoonfuls every 4-6 hourschildren 4 to under 6 years...........................do not use unless directed by a doctorchildren under 4 years..................................do not use
Dibromm With Pe

Dibromm With Pe

do not take more than 6 doses in a 24-hour period

age doseadults and children 12 years and over..........4 teaspoonfuls every 4-6 hourschildren 6 years to under 12 years...............2 teaspoonfuls every 4-6 hourschildren 4 to under 6 years...........................do not use unless directed by a doctorchildren under 4 years..................................do not use
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.)
Adults:
Infection* Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy Community-acquired pneumonia (mild severity) Pharyngitis/tonsillitis (second line therapy) Skin/skin structure (uncomplicated) 500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5. Acute bacterial exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (mild to moderate) 500 mg QD x 3 days OR 500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5. Acute bacterial sinusitis 500 mg QD x 3 days Genital ulcer disease (chancroid) One single 1 gram dose Non-gonoccocal urethritis and cervicitis One single 1 gram dose Gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis One single 2 gram dose * DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)Azithromycin tablets can be taken with or without food. Renal Insufficiency: No dosage adjustment is recommended for subjects with renal impairment (GFR ≤80 mL/min). The mean AUC 0-120 was similar in subjects with GFR 10-80 mL/min compared to subjects with normal renal function, whereas it increased 35% in subjects with GFR <10 mL/min compared to subjects with normal renal function. Caution should be exercised when azithromycin is administered to subjects with severe renal impairment. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Renal Insufficiency.) Hepatic Insufficiency: The pharmacokinetics of azithromycin in subjects with hepatic impairment have not been established. No dose adjustment recommendations can be made in patients with impaired hepatic function (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Hepatic Insufficiency.) No dosage adjustment is recommended based on age or gender. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations.) Pediatric Patients: Azithromycin for oral suspension can be taken with or without food. Acute Otitis Media: The recommended dose of azithromycin for oral suspension for the treatment of pediatric patients with acute otitis media is 30 mg/kg given as a single dose or 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days or 10 mg/kg as a single dose on the first day followed by 5 mg/kg/day on Days 2 through 5. (See chart below.) Acute bacterial Sinusitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for oral suspension for the treatment of pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis is 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days.(See chart below.) Community-Acquired Pneumonia: The recommended dose of azithromycin for oral suspension for the treatment of pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia is 10 mg/kg as a single dose on the first day followed by 5 mg/kg on Days 2 through 5. (See chart below.) PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR OTITIS MEDIA,ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA (Age 6 months and above, see PRECAUTIONS-Pediatric Use.) Based on Body Weight OTITIS MEDIA AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA: (5-Day Regimen)*Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1 and 5 mg/kg/day Days 2 to 5. Weight 100 mg/5 mL 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. Day 1 Days 2-5 Day 1 Days 2-5 5 11 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 1.25 mL (¼ tsp) 7.5 mL 150 mg 10 22 5 mL (1 tsp) 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 15 mL 300 mg 20 44 5 mL (1 tsp) 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 15 mL 600 mg 30 66 7.5 mL (1½ tsp) 3.75 mL (3/4tsp) 22.5 mL 900 mg 40 88 10 mL (2 tsp) 5 mL (1tsp) 30 mL 1200 mg 50 and above 12.5 mL (2 ½ tsp) 6.25 mL (1¼ tsp) 37.5 mL 1500 mg *Effectiveness of the 3-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia has not been established. OTITIS MEDIA AND ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS: (3-Day Regimen)*Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1. Weight 100 mg/5 mL 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. Day 1-3 Day 1-3 5 11 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 7.5 mL 150 mg 10 22 5 mL (1 tsp) 15 mL 300 mg 20 44 5 mL (1 tsp) 15 mL 600 mg 30 66 7.5 mL (1½ tsp) 22.5 mL 900 mg 40 88 10 mL (2 tsp) 30 mL 1200 mg 50 and above 110 and above 12.5 mL (2 ½ tsp ) 37.5 mL 1500 mg *Effectiveness of the 5-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis has not been established. OTITIS MEDIA : (1-Day Regimen)Dosing Calculated on 30 mg/kg as a single dose Weight 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment course Total mg per Treatment course Kg Lbs. Day1 5 11 3.75 mL (3/4 tsp) 3.75 mL 150 mg 10 22 7.5 mL (1½ tsp) 7.5 mL 300 mg 20 44 15 mL (3 tsp) 15 mL 600 mg 30 66 22.5 mL (4 ½ tsp) 22.5 mL 900 mg 40 88 30 mL (6tsp) 30 mL 1200 mg 50 and above 110 and above 37.5 mL (7½ tsp) 37.5 mL 1500 mg The safety of re-dosing azithromycin in pediatric patients who vomit after receiving 30 mg/kg as a single dose has not been established. In clinical studies involving 487 patients with acute otitis media given a single 30 mg/kg dose of azithromycin, eight patients who vomited within 30 minutes of dosing were re-dosed at the same total dose. Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for children with pharyngitis/tonsillitis is 12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days. (See chart below.) PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR PHARYNGITIS /TONSILLITIS(Age 2 years and above, see PRECAUTIONS-Pediatric Use.)Based on Body weight PHARYNGITIS/TONSILITIS: (5-Day Regimen)Dosing Calculated on 12 mg/kg/day for 5 days Weight 200mg/5mL Total mL per Treatment course Total mg per Treatment course Kg Lbs. Day 1-5 8 18 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 12.5 mL 500 mg 17 37 5 mL (1 tsp) 25 mL 1000 mg 25 55 7.5 mL (1 ½ tsp) 37.5 mL 1500 mg 33 73 10 mL (2 tsp) 50 mL 2000 mg 40 88 12.5 mL (2 ½ tsp) 62.5 mL 2500 mg
Adults:
Infection* Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy Community-acquired pneumonia (mild severity) Pharyngitis/tonsillitis (second line therapy) Skin/skin structure (uncomplicated) 500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5. Acute bacterial exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (mild to moderate) 500 mg QD x 3 days OR 500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5. Acute bacterial sinusitis 500 mg QD x 3 days Genital ulcer disease (chancroid) One single 1 gram dose Non-gonoccocal urethritis and cervicitis One single 1 gram dose Gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis One single 2 gram dose * DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)Azithromycin tablets can be taken with or without food. Renal Insufficiency: No dosage adjustment is recommended for subjects with renal impairment (GFR ≤80 mL/min). The mean AUC 0-120 was similar in subjects with GFR 10-80 mL/min compared to subjects with normal renal function, whereas it increased 35% in subjects with GFR <10 mL/min compared to subjects with normal renal function. Caution should be exercised when azithromycin is administered to subjects with severe renal impairment. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Renal Insufficiency.) Hepatic Insufficiency: The pharmacokinetics of azithromycin in subjects with hepatic impairment have not been established. No dose adjustment recommendations can be made in patients with impaired hepatic function (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Hepatic Insufficiency.) No dosage adjustment is recommended based on age or gender. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations.) Pediatric Patients: Azithromycin for oral suspension can be taken with or without food. Acute Otitis Media: The recommended dose of azithromycin for oral suspension for the treatment of pediatric patients with acute otitis media is 30 mg/kg given as a single dose or 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days or 10 mg/kg as a single dose on the first day followed by 5 mg/kg/day on Days 2 through 5. (See chart below.) Acute bacterial Sinusitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for oral suspension for the treatment of pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis is 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days.(See chart below.) Community-Acquired Pneumonia: The recommended dose of azithromycin for oral suspension for the treatment of pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia is 10 mg/kg as a single dose on the first day followed by 5 mg/kg on Days 2 through 5. (See chart below.) PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR OTITIS MEDIA,ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA (Age 6 months and above, see PRECAUTIONS-Pediatric Use.) Based on Body Weight OTITIS MEDIA AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA: (5-Day Regimen)*Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1 and 5 mg/kg/day Days 2 to 5. Weight 100 mg/5 mL 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. Day 1 Days 2-5 Day 1 Days 2-5 5 11 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 1.25 mL (¼ tsp) 7.5 mL 150 mg 10 22 5 mL (1 tsp) 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 15 mL 300 mg 20 44 5 mL (1 tsp) 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 15 mL 600 mg 30 66 7.5 mL (1½ tsp) 3.75 mL (3/4tsp) 22.5 mL 900 mg 40 88 10 mL (2 tsp) 5 mL (1tsp) 30 mL 1200 mg 50 and above 12.5 mL (2 ½ tsp) 6.25 mL (1¼ tsp) 37.5 mL 1500 mg *Effectiveness of the 3-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia has not been established. OTITIS MEDIA AND ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS: (3-Day Regimen)*Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1. Weight 100 mg/5 mL 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. Day 1-3 Day 1-3 5 11 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 7.5 mL 150 mg 10 22 5 mL (1 tsp) 15 mL 300 mg 20 44 5 mL (1 tsp) 15 mL 600 mg 30 66 7.5 mL (1½ tsp) 22.5 mL 900 mg 40 88 10 mL (2 tsp) 30 mL 1200 mg 50 and above 110 and above 12.5 mL (2 ½ tsp ) 37.5 mL 1500 mg *Effectiveness of the 5-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis has not been established. OTITIS MEDIA : (1-Day Regimen)Dosing Calculated on 30 mg/kg as a single dose Weight 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment course Total mg per Treatment course Kg Lbs. Day1 5 11 3.75 mL (3/4 tsp) 3.75 mL 150 mg 10 22 7.5 mL (1½ tsp) 7.5 mL 300 mg 20 44 15 mL (3 tsp) 15 mL 600 mg 30 66 22.5 mL (4 ½ tsp) 22.5 mL 900 mg 40 88 30 mL (6tsp) 30 mL 1200 mg 50 and above 110 and above 37.5 mL (7½ tsp) 37.5 mL 1500 mg The safety of re-dosing azithromycin in pediatric patients who vomit after receiving 30 mg/kg as a single dose has not been established. In clinical studies involving 487 patients with acute otitis media given a single 30 mg/kg dose of azithromycin, eight patients who vomited within 30 minutes of dosing were re-dosed at the same total dose. Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for children with pharyngitis/tonsillitis is 12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days. (See chart below.) PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR PHARYNGITIS /TONSILLITIS(Age 2 years and above, see PRECAUTIONS-Pediatric Use.)Based on Body weight PHARYNGITIS/TONSILITIS: (5-Day Regimen)Dosing Calculated on 12 mg/kg/day for 5 days Weight 200mg/5mL Total mL per Treatment course Total mg per Treatment course Kg Lbs. Day 1-5 8 18 2.5 mL (½ tsp) 12.5 mL 500 mg 17 37 5 mL (1 tsp) 25 mL 1000 mg 25 55 7.5 mL (1 ½ tsp) 37.5 mL 1500 mg 33 73 10 mL (2 tsp) 50 mL 2000 mg 40 88 12.5 mL (2 ½ tsp) 62.5 mL 2500 mg
Pantoprazole

Pantoprazole

Indication Dose Frequency Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis Associated With GERD (2.1) Adults 40 mg Once Daily for up to 8 wks Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis (2.1) Adults 40 mg Once Daily Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome (2.1) Adults 40 mg Twice Daily
See Full Prescribing Information for administration instructions

2.1 Recommended Dosing Schedule

Pantoprazole sodium is supplied as delayed-release tablets. The recommended dosages are outlined in Table 1.

Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets USP
Indication Dose Frequency Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis Associated With GERD Adults 40 mg Once Daily for up to 8 weeks* Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis Adults 40 mg Once Daily Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome Adults 40 mg Twice Daily**
* For adult patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8-week course of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP may be considered.

** Dosage regimens should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 240 mg daily have been administered.

Pediatric dosing information in pediatric patients ages five years and older with erosive esophagitis associated with GERD is approved for Wyeth Pharmaceuticals Inc.’s pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets. However, due to Wyeth Pharmaceuticals Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

2.2 Administration Instructions

Directions for method of administration for each dosage form are presented in Table 2.

Table 2: Administration Instructions
Formulation Route Instructions* Delayed-Release Tablets Oral Swallowed whole, with or without food
* Patients should be cautioned that pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP should not be split, chewed, or crushed.

Pantoprazole Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets USP

Pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP should be swallowed whole, with or without food in the stomach. If patients are unable to swallow a 40 mg tablet, two 20 mg tablets may be taken. Concomitant administration of antacids does not affect the absorption of pantoprazole sodium delayed-release tablets USP.
Pravastatin Sodium

Pravastatin Sodium

2.1 General Dosing Information

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving pravastatin sodium tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with pravastatin sodium tablets (see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy).

2.2 Adult Patients

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily. If a daily dose of 40 mg does not achieve desired cholesterol levels, 80 mg once daily is recommended. In patients with significant renal impairment, a starting dose of 10 mg daily is recommended. Pravastatin sodium tablets can be administered orally as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

2.3 Pediatric Patients

Children (Ages 8 to 13 Years, Inclusive)

The recommended dose is 20 mg once daily in children 8 to 13 years of age. Doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population

Adolescents (Ages 14 to 18 Years)

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily in adolescents 14 to 18 years of age. Doses greater than 40 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Children and adolescents treated with pravastatin should be reevaluated in adulthood and appropriate changes made to their cholesterol-lowering regimen to achieve adult goals for LDL-C [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Altering Therapy

Pravastatin sodium may be used with bile acid resins. When administering a bile-acid-binding resin (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol) and pravastatin, pravastatin sodium tablets should be given either 1 hour or more before or at least 4 hours following the resin. [See Clinical Pharmacology (12.3).]

The combination of statins and fibrates should generally be used with caution. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.1).]

2.5 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine

In patients taking immunosuppressive drugs such as cyclosporine concomitantly with pravastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of pravastatin sodium once-a-day at bedtime and titration to higher doses should be done with caution. Most patients treated with this combination received a maximum pravastatin sodium dose of 20 mg/day. In patients taking cyclosporine, therapy should be limited to 20 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Clarithromycin

In patients taking clarithromycin, therapy should be limited to 40 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily doses. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP in adults is 2000 mg.

Metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP should generally be given once daily with the evening meal. Metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin. Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Metformin HClextended-release tablets, USP must be swallowed whole and never crushed or chewed. Occasionally, the inactive ingredients of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP will be eliminated in the feces as a soft, hydrated mass. (See Patient Information printed below.)

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults - In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP is 500 mg once daily with the evening meal. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly, up to a maximum of 2000 mg once daily with the evening meal. If glycemic control is not achieved on metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP 2000 mg once daily, a trial of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP 1000 mg twice daily should be considered. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies.)

Pediatrics - Safety and effectiveness of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP in pediatric patients have not been established.

Transfer From Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin HClExtended-Release Tablets, USP and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. With concomitant metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.)

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP.

Concomitant Metformin HClExtended-Release Tablets, USP and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP therapy. Metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2000 mg for metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP are not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP are not recommended in pediatric patients (below the age of 17 years).

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin HCl extended-release tablets, USP.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Amitriptyline Hydrochlo...

Amitriptyline Hydrochloride

Oral Dosage

Dosage should be initiated at a low level and increased gradually, noting carefully the clinical response and any evidence of intolerance.

Initial Dosage for Adults

For outpatients, 75 mg of amitriptyline HCl a day in divided doses is usually satisfactory. If necessary, this may be increased to a total of 150 mg per day. Increases are made preferably in the late afternoon and/or bedtime doses. A sedative effect may be apparent before the antidepressant effect is noted, but an adequate therapeutic effect may take as long as 30 days to develop.

An alternate method of initiating therapy in outpatients is to begin with 50 to 100 mg amitriptyline HCl at bedtime. This may be increased by 25 or 50 mg as necessary in the bedtime dose to a total of 150 mg per day.

Hospitalized patients may require 100 mg a day initially. This can be increased gradually to 200 mg a day if necessary. A small number of hospitalized patients may need as much as 300 mg a day.

Adolescent and Elderly Patients

In general, lower dosages are recommended for these patients. Ten mg 3 times a day with 20 mg at bedtime may be satisfactory in adolescent and elderly patients who do not tolerate higher dosages.

Maintenance

The usual maintenance dosage of amitriptyline HCl is 50 to 100 mg per day. In some patients, 40 mg per day is sufficient. For maintenance therapy, the total daily dosage may be given in a single dose, preferably at bedtime. When satisfactory improvement has been reached, dosage should be reduced to the lowest amount that will maintain relief of symptoms. It is appropriate to continue maintenance therapy 3 months or longer to lessen the possibility of relapse.

Usage in Pediatric Patients

In view of the lack of experience with the use of this drug in pediatric patients, it is not recommended at the present time for patients under 12 years of age.

Plasma Levels

Because of the wide variation in the absorption and distribution of tricyclic antidepressants in body fluids, it is difficult to directly correlate plasma levels and therapeutic effect. However, determination of plasma levels may be useful in identifying patients who appear to have toxic effects and may have excessively high levels, or those in whom lack of absorption or noncompliance is suspected. Because of increased intestinal transit time and decreased hepatic metabolism in elderly patients, plasma levels are generally higher for a given oral dose of amitriptyline hydrochloride than in younger patients. Elderly patients should be monitored carefully and quantitative serum levels obtained as clinically appropriate. Adjustments in dosage should be made according to the patient’s clinical response and not on the basis of plasma levels.2
2
Hollister, L.E.; Monitoring Tricyclic Antidepressant Plasma Concentrations. JAMA 1979; 241(23):2530-2533.
Clonazepam

Clonazepam

Clonazepam is available as a tablet. The tablets should be administered with water by swallowing the tablet whole.

Seizure Disorders

Adults

Adults: The initial dose for adults with seizure disorders should not exceed 1.5 mg/day divided into three doses. Dosage may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg to 1 mg every 3 days until seizures are adequately controlled or until side effects preclude any further increase. Maintenance dosage must be individualized for each patient depending upon response. Maximum recommended daily dose is 20 mg.

The use of multiple anticonvulsants may result in an increase of depressant adverse effects. This should be considered before adding clonazepam to an existing anticonvulsant regimen.

Pediatric Patients

Pediatric Patients: Clonazepam is administered orally. In order to minimize drowsiness, the initial dose for infants and children (up to 10 years of age or 30 kg of body weight) should be between 0.01 mg/kg/day and 0.03 mg/kg/day but not to exceed 0.05 mg/kg/day given in two or three divided doses. Dosage should be increased by no more than 0.25 mg to 0.5 mg every third day until a daily maintenance dose of 0.1 mg/kg to 0.2 mg/kg of body weight has been reached unless seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increase. Whenever possible, the daily dose should be divided into three equal doses. If doses are not equally divided, the largest dose should be given before retiring.

Geriatric Patients: There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam in seizure disorder patients 65 years of age and older. In general, elderly patients should be started on low doses of clonazepam and observed closely (see PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use).

Panic Disorder

Adults

Adults: The initial dose for adults with panic disorder is 0.25 mg bid. An increase to the target dose for most patients of 1 mg/day may be made after 3 days. The recommended dose of 1 mg/day is based on the results from a fixed dose study in which the optimal effect was seen at 1 mg/day. Higher doses of 2 mg/day, 3 mg/day and 4 mg/day in that study were less effective than the 1 mg/day dose and were associated with more adverse effects. Nevertheless, it is possible that some individual patients may benefit from doses of up to a maximum dose of 4 mg/day and in those instances, the dose may be increased in increments of 0.125 mg to 0.25 mg bid every 3 days until panic disorder is controlled or until side effects make further increases undesired. To reduce the inconvenience of somnolence, administration of one dose at bedtime may be desirable.

Treatment should be discontinued gradually, with a decrease of 0.125 mg bid every 3 days, until the drug is completely withdrawn.

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with clonazepam should remain on it. Therefore, the physician who elects to use clonazepam for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Pediatric Patients: There is no clinical trial experience with Clonazepam in panic disorder patients under 18 years of age.

Geriatric Patients: There is no clinical trial experience with clonazepam in panic disorder patients 65 years of age and older. In general, elderly patients should be started on low doses of clonazepam and observed closely (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Alprazolam

Alprazolam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. While the usual daily dosages given below will meet the needs of most patients, there will be some who require doses greater than 4 mg/day. In such cases, dosage should be increased cautiously to avoid adverse effects.

Anxiety Disorders and Transient Symptoms of Anxiety

Treatment for patients with anxiety should be initiated with a dose of 0.25 to 0.5 mg given three times daily. The dose may be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, at intervals of 3 to 4 days, to a maximum daily dose of 4 mg, given in divided doses. The lowest possible effective dose should be employed and the need for continued treatment reassessed frequently. The risk of dependence may increase with dose and duration of treatment.

In all patients, dosage should be reduced gradually when discontinuing therapy or when decreasing the daily dosage. Although there are no systematically collected data to support a specific discontinuation schedule, it is suggested that the daily dosage be decreased by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days. Some patients may require an even slower dosage reduction.

Panic Disorder

The successful treatment of many panic disorder patients has required the use of alprazolam at doses greater than 4 mg daily. In controlled trials conducted to establish the efficacy of alprazolam in panic disorder, doses in the range of 1 to 10 mg daily were used. The mean dosage employed was approximately 5 to 6 mg daily. Among the approximately 1700 patients participating in the panic disorder development program, about 300 received alprazolam in dosages of greater than 7 mg/day, including approximately 100 patients who received maximum dosages of greater than 9 mg/day. Occasional patients required as much as 10 mg a day to achieve a successful response.

Dose Titration

Treatment may be initiated with a dose of 0.5 mg three times daily. Depending on the response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 3 to 4 days in increments of no more than 1 mg per day. Slower titration to the dose levels greater than 4 mg/day may be advisable to allow full expression of the pharmacodynamic effect of alprazolam. To lessen the possibility of interdose symptoms, the times of administration should be distributed as evenly as possible throughout the waking hours, that is, on a three or four times per day schedule.

Generally, therapy should be initiated at a low dose to minimize the risk of adverse responses in patients especially sensitive to the drug. Dose should be advanced until an acceptable therapeutic response (ie, a substantial reduction in or total elimination of panic attacks) is achieved, intolerance occurs, or the maximum recommended dose is attained.

Dose Maintenance

For patients receiving doses greater than 4 mg/day, periodic reassessment and consideration of dosage reduction is advised. In a controlled postmarketing dose-response study, patients treated with doses of alprazolam greater than 4 mg/day for 3 months were able to taper to 50% of their total maintenance dose without apparent loss of clinical benefit. Because of the danger of withdrawal, abrupt discontinuation of treatment should be avoided. (See WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE).

The necessary duration of treatment for panic disorder patients responding to alprazolam is unknown. After a period of extended freedom from attacks, a carefully supervised tapered discontinuation may be attempted, but there is evidence that this may often be difficult to accomplish without recurrence of symptoms and/or the manifestation of withdrawal phenomena.

Dose Reduction

Because of the danger of withdrawal, abrupt discontinuation of treatment should be avoided (see WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE).

In all patients, dosage should be reduced gradually when discontinuing therapy or when decreasing the daily dosage. Although there are no systematically collected data to support a specific discontinuation schedule, it is suggested that the daily dosage be decreased by no more than 0.5 mg every three days. Some patients may require an even slower dosage reduction.

In any case, reduction of dose must be undertaken under close supervision and must be gradual. If significant withdrawal symptoms develop, the previous dosing schedule should be reinstituted and, only after stabilization, should a less rapid schedule of discontinuation be attempted. In a controlled postmarketing discontinuation study of panic disorder patients which compared this recommended taper schedule with a slower taper schedule, no difference was observed between the groups in the proportion of patients who tapered to zero dose; however, the slower schedule was associated with a reduction in symptoms associated with a withdrawal syndrome. It is suggested that the dose be reduced by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days, with the understanding that some patients may benefit from an even more gradual discontinuation. Some patients may prove resistant to all discontinuation regimens.

Dosing in Special Populations

In elderly patients, in patients with advanced liver disease or in patients with debilitating disease, the usual starting dose is 0.25 mg, given two or three times daily. This may be gradually increased if needed and tolerated. The elderly may be especially sensitive to the effects of benzodiazepines. If side effects occur at the recommended starting dose, the dose may be lowered.
Amlodipine Besylate

Amlodipine Besylate

2.1 Adults

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine amlodipine besylate tablets are 5 mg once daily with a maximum dose of 10 mg once daily. Small, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine besylate to other antihypertensive therapy. Adjust dosage according to each patient's need. In general, titration should proceed over 7 to 14 days so that the physician can fully assess the patient's response to each dose level. Titration may proceed more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently. The recommended dose for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 to 10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect [see Adverse Reactions (6)]. The recommended dose range for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 to 10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.2 Children

The effective antihypertensive oral dose in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4), Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.1 Adults

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine amlodipine besylate tablets are 5 mg once daily with a maximum dose of 10 mg once daily. Small, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine besylate to other antihypertensive therapy. Adjust dosage according to each patient's need. In general, titration should proceed over 7 to 14 days so that the physician can fully assess the patient's response to each dose level. Titration may proceed more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently. The recommended dose for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 to 10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect [see Adverse Reactions (6)]. The recommended dose range for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 to 10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.4)].

2.2 Children

The effective antihypertensive oral dose in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4), Clinical Studies (14.1)].
Captopril

Captopril

Captopril should be taken one hour before meals. Dosage must be individualized.

Hypertension

Initiation of therapy requires consideration of recent antihypertensive drug treatment, the extent of blood pressure elevation, salt restriction, and other clinical circumstances. If possible, discontinue the patient’s previous antihypertensive drug regimen for one week before starting captopril.

The initial dose of captopril is 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. If satisfactory reduction of blood pressure has not been achieved after one or two weeks, the dose may be increased to 50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Concomitant sodium restriction may be beneficial when captopril is used alone.

The dose of captopril in hypertension usually does not exceed 50 mg t.i.d. Therefore, if the blood pressure has not been satisfactorily controlled after one to two weeks at this dose, (and the patient is not already receiving a diuretic), a modest dose of thiazide-type diuretic (e.g., hydrochlorothiazide, 25 mg daily), should be added. The diuretic dose may be increased at one- to two-week intervals until its highest usual antihypertensive dose is reached.

If captopril is being started in a patient already receiving a diuretic, captopril therapy should be initiated under close medical supervision (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions regarding hypotension), with dosage and titration of captopril as noted above.

If further blood pressure reduction is required, the dose of captopril may be increased to 100 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. and then, if necessary, to 150 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. (while continuing the diuretic). The usual dose range is 25 to 150 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. A maximum daily dose of 450 mg captopril should not be exceeded.

For patients with severe hypertension (e.g., accelerated or malignant hypertension), when temporary discontinuation of current antihypertensive therapy is not practical or desirable, or when prompt titration to more normotensive blood pressure levels is indicated, diuretic should be continued but other current antihypertensive medication stopped and captopril dosage promptly initiated at 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d., under close medical supervision.

When necessitated by the patient’s clinical condition, the daily dose of captopril may be increased every 24 hours or less under continuous medical supervision until a satisfactory blood pressure response is obtained or the maximum dose of captopril is reached. In this regimen, addition of a more potent diuretic, e.g., furosemide, may also be indicated.

Beta-blockers may also be used in conjunction with captopril therapy (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions), but the effects of the two drugs are less than additive.

Heart Failure

Initiation of therapy requires consideration of recent diuretic therapy and the possibility of severe salt/volume depletion. In patients with either normal or low blood pressure, who have been vigorously treated with diuretics and who may be hyponatremic and/or hypovolemic, a starting dose of 6.25 or 12.5 mg tid may minimize the magnitude or duration of the hypotensive effect (see WARNINGS: Hypotension); for these patients, titration of the usual daily dosage can then occur within the next several days.

For most patients the usual initial daily dosage is 25 mg tid. After a dose of 50 mg tid is reached, further increases in dosage should be delayed, where possible, for at least two weeks to determine if a satisfactory response occurs. Most patients studied have had a satisfactory clinical improvement at 50 or 100 mg tid. A maximum daily dose of 450 mg of captopril should not be exceeded.

Captopril should generally be used in conjunction with a diuretic and digitalis. Captopril therapy must be initiated under very close medical supervision.

Left Ventricular Dysfunction After Myocardial Infarction

The recommended dose for long-term use in patients following a myocardial infarction is a target maintenance dose of 50 mg t.i.d.

Therapy may be initiated as early as three days following a myocardial infarction. After a single dose of 6.25 mg, captopril therapy should be initiated at 12.5 mg t.i.d. Captopril should then be increased to 25 mg t.i.d. during the next several days and to a target dose of 50 mg t.i.d. over the next several weeks as tolerated (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Captopril may be used in patients treated with other post-myocardial infarction therapies, e.g., thrombolytics, aspirin, beta blockers.

Diabetic Nephropathy

The recommended dose of captopril for long term use to treat diabetic nephropathy is 25 mg t.i.d.

Other antihypertensives such as diuretics, beta blockers, centrally acting agents or vasodilators may be used in conjunction with captopril if additional therapy is required to further lower blood pressure.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

Because captopril is excreted primarily by the kidneys, excretion rates are reduced in patients with impaired renal function. These patients will take longer to reach steady-state captopril levels and will reach higher steady-state levels for a given daily dose than patients with normal renal function. Therefore, these patients may respond to smaller or less frequent doses.

Accordingly, for patients with significant renal impairment, initial daily dosage of captopril should be reduced, and smaller increments utilized for titration, which should be quite slow (one- to two-week intervals). After the desired therapeutic effect has been achieved, the dose should be slowly back-titrated to determine the minimal effective dose. When concomitant diuretic therapy is required, a loop diuretic (e.g., furosemide), rather than a thiazide diuretic, is preferred in patients with severe renal impairment. (See also WARNINGS: Anaphylactoid reactions during membrane exposure and PRECAUTIONS: Hemodialysis)
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam tablets, USP are administered orally. For optimal results, dose, frequency of administration, and duration of therapy should be individualized according to patient response. To facilitate this, 0.5 mg, 1 mg, and 2 mg tablets are available.

The usual range is 2 to 6 mg/day given in divided doses, the largest dose being taken before bedtime, but the daily dosage may vary from 1 to 10 mg/day.

For anxiety, most patients require an initial dose of 2 to 3 mg/day given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For insomnia due to anxiety or transient situational stress, a single daily dose of 2 to 4 mg may be given, usually at bedtime.

For elderly or debilitated patients, an initial dosage of 1 to 2 mg/day in divided doses is recommended, to be adjusted as needed and tolerated.

The dosage of lorazepam should be increased gradually when needed to help avoid adverse effects. When higher dosage is indicated, the evening dose should be increased before the daytime doses.
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with Metformin HCl, USP or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of Metformin HCl, USP must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily doses. The maximum recommended daily dose of Metformin HCl, USP is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age).

Metformin HCl, USP should be given in divided doses with meals. Metformin HCl, USP should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to Metformin HCl, USP and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of Metformin HCl, USP, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of Metformin HCl, USP may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults - In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of Metformin HCl Tablets, USP is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, Metformin HCl, USP may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

If higher doses of metformin are required, Metformin HCl, USP should be used at total daily doses up to 2550 mg administered in divided daily doses, as described above. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Studies.)

Pediatrics - The usual starting dose of Metformin HCl, USP is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer From Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to Metformin HCl, USP, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin HCl, USP and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of Metformin HCl, USP monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing Metformin HCl, USP at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant Metformin HCl, USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on Metformin HCl, USP 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of Metformin HCl, USP and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant Metformin HCl, USP and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.)

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of Metformin HCl, USP and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without Metformin HCl, USP.

Concomitant Metformin HCl, USP and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of Metformin HCl, USP therapy. Metformin HCl, USP therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of Metformin HCl, USP should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for Metformin HCl, USP. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and Metformin HCl, USP. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin HCl, USP is not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin HCl, USP is not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of Metformin HCl, USP should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of Metformin HCl, USP.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Sennadocusate Sodium

Sennadocusate Sodium

take only by mouth. Doses may be taken as a single daily dose, preferably in the evening, or in divided doses. age dosage adults and children 12 years and older take 2-4 tablets daily children 6 to under 12 years take 1-2 tablets daily children 2 to under 6 years take up to 1 tablet daily children under 2 years do not use
Propranolol Hydrochlori...

Propranolol Hydrochloride

General

Because of the variable bioavailability of propranolol, the dose should be individualized based on response.

Hypertension

The usual initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets twice daily, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. Dosage may be increased gradually until adequate blood pressure control is achieved. The usual maintenance dosage is 120 mg to 240 mg per day. In some instances a dosage of 640 mg a day may be required. The time needed for full antihypertensive response to a given dosage is variable and may range from a few days to several weeks.

While twice daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, some patients, especially when lower doses are used, may experience a modest rise in blood pressure toward the end of the 12 hour dosing interval. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. If control is not adequate, a larger dose, or 3 times daily therapy may achieve better control.

Angina Pectoris

Total daily doses of 80 mg to 320 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets, when administered orally, twice a day, three times a day, or four times a day, have been shown to increase exercise tolerance and to reduce ischemic changes in the ECG. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce dosage gradually over a period of several weeks (see WARNINGS).

Atrial Fibrillation

The recommended dose is 10 mg to 30 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets three or four times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Myocardial Infarction

In the Beta-Blocker Heart Attack Trial (BHAT), the initial dose was 40 mg t.i.d., with titration after 1 month to 60 mg to 80 mg t.i.d. as tolerated. The recommended daily dosage is 180 mg to 240 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets per day in divided doses. Although a t.i.d. regimen was used in the BHAT and a q.i.d. regimen in the Norwegian Multicenter Trial, there is a reasonable basis for the use of either a t.i.d. or b.i.d. regimen (see PHARMACODYNAMICS AND CLINICAL EFFECTS). The effectiveness and safety of daily dosages greater than 240 mg for prevention of cardiac mortality have not been established. However, higher dosages may be needed to effectively treat coexisting diseases such as angina or hypertension (see above).

Migraine

The initial dose is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride daily in divided doses. The usual effective dose range is 160 mg to 240 mg per day. The dosage may be increased gradually to achieve optimum migraine prophylaxis. If a satisfactory response is not obtained within four to six weeks after reaching the maximum dose, propranolol hydrochloride therapy should be discontinued. It may be advisable to withdraw the drug gradually over a period of several weeks.

Essential Tremor

The initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets twice daily. Optimum reduction of essential tremor is usually achieved with a dose of 120 mg per day. Occasionally, it may be necessary to administer 240 mg to 320 mg per day.

Hypertrophic Subaortic Stenosis

The usual dosage is 20 mg to 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride tablets three or four times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Pheochromocytoma

The usual dosage is 60 mg propranolol hydrochloride daily in divided doses for three days prior to surgery as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade. For the management of inoperable tumors, the usual dosage is 30 mg daily in divided doses as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade.
Cough Dm

Cough Dm

• shake bottle well before use • measure only with dosing cup provided. Do not use dosing cup with other products. • dose as follows or as directed by doctor • mL = milliliter
adults and children 12 years of age and over

10 mL every 12 hours, not to exceed 20 mL in 24 hours

children 6 to under 12 years of age

5 mL every 12 hours, not to exceed 10 mL in 24 hours

children 4 to under 6 years of age

2.5 mL every 12 hours, not to exceed 5 mL in 24 hours

children under 4 years of age

do not use
Sulfamethoxazole And Tr...

Sulfamethoxazole And Trimethoprim

Not recommended for use in pediatric patients less than 2 months of age.

Urinary Tract Infections and Shigellosis in Adults and Pediatric Patients, and Acute Otitis Media in Children

Adults: The usual adult dosage in the treatment of urinary tract infections is 1 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim DS (double strength) tablet every 12 hours for 10 to 14 days. An identical daily dosage is used for 5 days in the treatment of shigellosis.

Children: The recommended dose for children with urinary tract infections or acute otitis media is 40 mg/kg sulfamethoxazole and 8 mg/kg trimethoprim per 24 hours, given in two divided doses every 12 hours for 10 days. An identical daily dosage is used for 5 days in the treatment of shigellosis. The following table is a guideline for the attainment of this dosage:
Children 2 months of age and older: Weight Dose – every 12 hours lb kg Tablets 22 10 - 44 20 1 66 30 1 ½ 88 40 2 or 1 DS tablet
For Patients with Impaired Renal Function

When renal function is impaired, a reduced dosage should be employed using the following table:
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Recommended Dosage Regimen Above 30 Usual standard regimen 15-30 1/2 the usual regimen Below 15 Use not recommended
Acute Exacerbations of Chronic Bronchitis in Adults

The usual adult dosage in the treatment of acute exacerbations of chronic bronchitis is 1 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim double strength tablet every 12 hours for 14 days.

Pneumocystis Carinii Pneumonia

Treatment: Adults and Children:

The recommended dosage for patients with documented Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia is 75 to 100 mg/kg sulfamethoxazole and 15 to 20 mg/kg trimethoprim per 24 hours given in equally divided doses every 6 hours for 14 to 21 days11. The following table is a guideline for the upper limit of this dosage.
Weight Dose – every 6 hours lb kg Tablets 18 8 - 35 16 1 53 24 1 ½ 70 32 2 or 1 DS tablet 88 40 2 ½ 106 48 3 or 1 ½ DS tablets 141 64 4 or 2 DS tablets 176 80 5 or 2 ½ DS tablets
For the lower limit dose (75 mg/kg sulfamethoxazole and 15 mg/kg trimethoprim per 24 hours) administer 75% of the dose in the above table.

Prophylaxis

Adults

The recommended dosage for prophylaxis in adults is 1 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim DS (double strength) tablet daily12.

Children

For children, the recommended dose is 750 mg/m2/day sulfamethoxazole with 150 mg/m2/day trimethoprim given orally in equally divided doses twice a day, on 3 consecutive days per week.

The total daily dose should not exceed 1600 mg sulfamethoxazole and 320 mg trimethoprim.13 The following table is a guideline for the attainment of this dosage in children:
Body Surface Area Dose – every 12 hours (m2) Tablets 0.26 - 0.53 ½ 1.06 1
Traveler’s Diarrhea in Adults

For the treatment of traveler’s diarrhea, the usual adult dosage is 1 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim DS (double strength) tablet or 2 sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim tablets every 12 hours for 5 days.
Aurodex

Aurodex

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: ACUTE OTITIS MEDIA: Instill AurodexTM Antipyrine and Benzocaine Otic Soution permitting the solution to run along the wall of the canal until it is filled. Avoid touching the ear with dropper. Then moisten a cotton pledget with AurodexTM Antipyrine Benzocaine Otic Solution and insert into the meatus. Repeat every one to two hours until pain an congestion are relieved.

REMOVAL OF CERUMEN: Before: Instill AurodexTM Antipyrine and Benzocaine Otic Solution three times daily for two to three days to help detach cerumen from wall of canal and facilitate removal.

After: AurodexTM Antipyrine and Benzocaine Otic Solution is useful for drying out the canal or relieving discomfort.

Before and after removal of cerumen, a cotten pledget moistened with AurodexTMAntipyrine and Benzocaine Otic Solution should be inserted into the meatus following installation.

Note: After use, do not rinse dropper tip, replace cap and close tightly

Protect solution from light and heat, and do not use if it is brown or contains a precipitate.

DISCARD THIS PRODUCT 6 MONTHS AFTER OPENING.
Prenatal Plus Iron

Prenatal Plus Iron

As a dietary adjunct before, during and after pregnancy, take one tablet daily with a meal, or as directed by a physician.
Major Extra Strength Ga...

Major Extra Strength Gas Relief

adults: swallow with water 1 or 2 softgels as needed after meals and at bedtime do not exceed 4 softgels in 24 hours except under the advice and supervision of a physician
K-vescent Efffervescent...

K-vescent Efffervescent

Adults - One effervescent tablet (25 mEq potassium) completely dissolved in three to four ounces or more of cold water and taken two to four times daily, or as directed by physician. It is suggested this potassium solution be taken with meals and sipped slowly over a five to ten minute period. Do not open foil pouch until time of use.
Hydroxyzine

Hydroxyzine

For symptomatic relief of anxiety and tension associated with psychoneurosis and as an adjunct in organic disease states in which anxiety is manifested: Adults, 50 to100 mg q.i.d.; children under 6 years, 50 mg daily in divided doses; children over 6 years, 50 to 100 mg daily in divided doses. For use in the management of pruritus due to allergic conditions such as chronic urticaria and atopic and contact dermatoses and in histamine-mediated pruritus: adults, 25 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.; children under 6 years, 50 mg daily in divided doses; children over 6 years, 50 to 100 mg daily in divided doses. As a sedative when used as a premedication and following general anesthesia: 50 to 100 mg for adults and 0.6 mg/kg of body weight in children. When treatment is initiated by the intramuscular route of administration, subsequent doses may be administered orally. As with all potent medication, the dosage should be adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy.
Benzonatate

Benzonatate

Adults and Children over 10 years of age:

Usual dose is one 100 mg or 200 mg capsule three times a day as needed for cough. If necessary to control cough, up to 600 mg daily in three divided doses may be given. Benzonatate should be swallowed whole. Benzonatate Capsules are not to be broken, chewed, dissolved, cut or crushed.
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age).

Metformin should be given in divided doses with meals and should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults

In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

Pediatrics

The usual starting dose of metformin tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer from Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin HCl monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin HCl tablets at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin HCl and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin HCl and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.)

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin.

Concomitant Metformin and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin therapy. Metformin therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin is not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin is not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (see WARNINGS.)
Mapap Arthritis Pain

Mapap Arthritis Pain

• do not take more than directed (see overdose warning)
adults
• take 2 caplets every 8 hours with water • swallow whole; do not crush, chew, split or dissolve • do not take more than 6 caplets in 24 hours • do not use for more than 10 days unless directed by a doctor
under 18 years of age
• ask a doctor
Omeprazole

Omeprazole

• for adults 18 years of age and older • this product is to be used once a day (every 24 hours), every day for 14 days • it may take 1 to 4 days for full effect; some people get complete relief of symptoms within 24 hours
14-Day Course of Treatment
• swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water before eating in the morning • take every day for 14 days • do not take more than 1 tablet a day • do not use for more than 14 days unless directed by your doctor • swallow whole. Do not chew or crush tablets
Repeated 14-Day Courses (if needed)
• you may repeat a 14-day course every 4 months • do not take for more than 14 days or more often than every 4 months unless directed by a doctor • children under 18 years of age: ask a doctor. Heartburn in children may sometimes be caused by a serious condition.
Doxycycline Hyclate

Doxycycline Hyclate

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS. Adults: The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours) followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg/day.

In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For children above eight years of age: The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 100 pounds or less is 2mg/lb of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 1 mg/lb of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses, on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 2 mg/lb of body weight may be used. For children over 100 lb the usual adult dose should be used.

The therapeutic antibacterial serum activity will usually persist for 24 hours following recommended dosage.

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

If gastric irritation occurs, it is recommended that doxycycline be given with food or milk. The absorption of doxycycline is not markedly influenced by simultaneous ingestion of food or milk.

Studies to date have indicated that administration of doxycycline at the usual recommended doses does not lead to excessive accumulation of the antibiotic in patients with renal impairment.

Uncomplicated gonococcal infections in adults (except anorectal infections in men): 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose. The dose may be administered with food, including milk or carbonated beverage, as required.

Uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infection in adults caused by Chlamydia trachomatis: 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 7 days.

Nongonococcal urethritis (NGU) caused by C. trachomatis and U. urealyticum: 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 7 days.

Syphilis – early: Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 2 weeks.

Syphilis of more than one year’s duration: Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 4 weeks.

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by N. gonorrhoeae: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by C. trachomatis: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

For the prophylaxis of malaria: For adults, the recommended dose is 100 mg daily. For children over 8 years of age, the recommended dose is 2 mg/kg given once daily up to the adult dose. Prophylaxis should begin 1 to 2 days before travel to the malarious area. Prophylaxis should be continued daily during travel in the malarious area and for 4 weeks after the traveler leaves the malarious area.

Inhalational anthrax (post-exposure):

ADULTS: 100 mg of doxycycline, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days.

CHILDREN: weighing less than 100 lb (45 kg); 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days. Children weighing 100 lb or more should receive the adult dose.
Earwax Removal Aid

Earwax Removal Aid

DirectionsFOR USE IN THE EAR ONLY Unscrew cap from bottle. Remove foil safety seal from bottle. Affix applicator cap to bottle. Adults and children over 12 years of age: - tilt head sideways and place 5 to 10 drops into ear - tip of applicator should not enter ear canal - keep drops in ear for several minutes by keeping head tilted or placing cotton in the ear - use twice daily for up to 4 days if needed, or as directed by a doctor - any wax remaining after treatment may be removed by gently flushing the ear with warm water, using a soft rubber ear syringe. Children under 12 years of age: consult a doctor. Other information - avoid exposing the bottle to excessive heat and direct sunlight - keep cap on bottle when not in use - Note: Drops foam on contact with ear wax due to release of oxygen. There may be an associated "cracking" sound - Note: Oversize packaging for ease in reading label information. Contains one bottle. - Store between 20 degrees to 25 degrees C (68 degrees to 77 degrees F)
Ear Wax Remover

Ear Wax Remover

DirectionsFOR USE IN THE EAR ONLY
Unscrew cap from bottle. Remove foil safety seal from bottle. Affix applicator cap to bottle. Adults and children over 12 years of age: - tilt head sideways and place 5 to 10 drops into ear - tip of applicator should not enter ear canal - keep drops in ear for several minutes by keeping head tilted or placing cotton in the ear - use twice daily for up to 4 days if needed, or as directed by a doctor - any wax remaining after treatment may be removed by gently flushing the ear with warm water, using a soft rubber ear syringe. - when the ear canal is irrigated, the tip of the ear syringe should not obstruct the flow of water leaving the ear canal Children under 12 years of age: consult a doctor. Other information - avoid exposing the bottle to excessive heat and direct sunlight - keep cap on bottle when not in use - lot no. & exp date: see label, bottom of container or box - retain carton for future reference on full labeling - Note: Drops foam on contact with ear wax due to release of oxygen. There may be an associated "cracking" sound - Note: Oversize packaging for ease in reading label information. Contains one bottle. - Store between 20 degrees to 25 degrees C (68 degrees to 77 degrees F)
Ibuprofen

Ibuprofen

do not take more than directed

the smallest effective dose should be used
adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 tablet every 4 to 6 hours while symptoms persist
if pain or fever does not respond to 1 tablet, 2 tablets may be used

do not exceed 6 tablets in 24 hours, unless directed by a doctor

children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Citroma

Citroma

Directions
drink a full glass (8 ounces) of liquid with each dose may be taken as a single daily dose or in divided doses
adults and children 12 years of age and over - 6.5 to 10 fl oz in 24 hours

children 6 to under 12 years of age - 3 to 7 fl oz maximum 7 fl oz in 24 hours

children 2 to under 6 years of age - 2 to 3 fl oz

children under 2 years of age - ask a doctor

discard unused product within 24 hours of opening bottle
Loratadine

Loratadine

Adults and children 6 and over:    1 tablet daily not more than 1 tablet in 24 hours

Children under 6 years of age:     ask a doctor

Consumers with liver or kidney disease:    ask a doctor
Mucus Er

Mucus Er

• do not crush, chew, or break tablet • take with a full glass of water • this product can be administered without regard for the timing of meals • adults and children 12 years of age and over: one or two tablets every 12 hours. Do not exceed 4 tablets in 24 hours. • children under 12 years of age: do not use
Doxazosin

Doxazosin

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The initial dosage of Doxazosin Tablets in patients with hypertension and/or BPH is 1 mg given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. This starting dose is intended to minimize the frequency of postural hypotension and first-dose syncope associated with doxazosin . Postural effects are most likely to occur between 2 and 6 hours after a dose. Therefore, blood pressure measurements should be taken during this time period after the first dose and with each increase in dose. If Doxazosin Tablets administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be restarted using the initial dosing regimen.

Concomitant administration of doxazosin with a PDE-5 inhibitor can result in additive blood pressure lowering effects and symptomatic hypotension; therefore, PDE-5 inhibitor therapy should be initiated at the lowest dose in patients taking doxazosin.

A. BENIGN PROSTATIC HYPERPLASIA 1 to 8 mg once daily.

The initial dosage of doxazosin is 1 mg, given once daily in the a.m. or p.m. Depending on the individual patient’s urodynamics and BPH symptomatology, dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter to 4 mg and 8 mg once daily, the maximum recommended dose for BPH. The recommended titration interval is 1 to 2 weeks. Blood pressure should be evaluated routinely in these patients.

B. HYPERTENSION 1 to 16 mg once daily.

The initial dosage of doxazosin is 1 mg given once daily. Depending on the individual patient’s standing blood pressure response (based on measurements taken at 2 to 6 hours post-dose and 24 hours post-dose), dosage may then be increased to 2 mg and thereafter if necessary to 4 mg, 8 mg and 16 mg to achieve the desired reduction in blood pressure. Increases in dose beyond 4 mg increase the likelihood of excessive postural effects, including syncope, postural dizziness/vertigo and postural hypotension. At a titrated dose of 16 mg once daily, the frequency of postural effects is about 12% compared to 3% for placebo.
Multi-symptom Mapap Col...

Multi-symptom Mapap Cold Formula

do not take more than directed (see overdose warning) adults and children 12 years and over: take 2 caplets every 4 hours swallow whole - do not crush, chew, or dissolve do not take more than 10 caplets in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Body

Body

adults and children 2 year of age and older - apply to affected area not more than 3 to 4 times daily

children under 2 years of age - do not use, consult a doctor
for best results dry skin thoroughly before applying
Banophen

Banophen

take every 4 to 6 hours, or as directed by a doctor do not take more than 6 times in 24 hours adults and children 12 years and over 1 to 2 tablets children 6 to under 12 years 1 tablet children under 6 years do not use
Sertraline Hydrochlorid...

Sertraline Hydrochloride

Initial Treatment Dosage for Adults

Major Depressive Disorder–Sertraline hydrochloride treatment should be administered at a dose of 50 mg once daily.

While a relationship between dose and effect has not been established for major depressive disorder patients were dosed in a range of 50-200 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of sertraline hydrochloride for the treatment of this indication. Consequently, a dose of 50 mg, administered once daily, is recommended as the initial therapeutic dose. Patients not responding to a 50 mg dose may benefit from dose increases up to a maximum of 200 mg/day. Given the 24 hour elimination half-life of sertraline hydrochloride, dose changes should not occur at intervals of less than 1 week.

Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder– Sertraline hydrochloride treatment should be initiated with a dose of 50 mg/day, either daily throughout the menstrual cycle or limited to the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle, depending on physician assessment.

While a relationship between dose and effect has not been established for PMDD, patients were dosed in the range of 50-150 mg/day with dose increases at the onset of each new menstrual cycle (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Patients not responding to a 50 mg/day dose may benefit from dose increases (at 50 mg increments/menstrual cycle) up to 150 mg/day when dosing daily throughout the menstrual cycle, or 100 mg/day when dosing during the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle. If a 100 mg/day dose has been established with luteal phase dosing, a 50 mg/day titration step for three days should be utilized at the beginning of each luteal phase dosing period.

Sertraline hydrochloride should be administered once daily, either in the morning or evening.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder–It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of sertraline hydrochloride has demonstrated that its antidepressant efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 44 weeks following 8 weeks of initial treatment at a dose of 50-200 mg/day (mean dose of 70 mg/day) (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). It is not known whether the dose of sertraline hydrochloride needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Premenstrual Dysphoric Disorder–The effectiveness of sertraline hydrochloride in long-term use, that is, for more than 3 menstrual cycles, has not been systematically evaluated in controlled trials. However, as women commonly report that symptoms worsen with age until relieved by the onset of menopause, it is reasonable to consider continuation of a responding patient. Dosage adjustments, which may include changes between dosage regimens (e.g., daily throughout the menstrual cycle versus during the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle), may be needed to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Switching Patients to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor–At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of therapy with sertraline hydrochloride. In addition, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping sertraline hydrochloride before starting an MAOI (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS).

Special Populations

Dosage for Hepatically Impaired Patients–The use of sertraline in patients with liver disease should be approached with caution. The effects of sertraline in patients with moderate and severe hepatic impairment have not been studied. If sertraline is administered to patients with liver impairment, a lower or less frequent dose should be used (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester–Neonates exposed to sertraline hydrochloride and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with sertraline hydrochloride during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. The physician may consider tapering sertraline hydrochloride in the third trimester.

Discontinuation of Treatment with sertraline hydrochloride

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of sertraline hydrochloride and other SSRIs and SNRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Hydrocortisone Maximum ...

Hydrocortisone Maximum Strength With Aloe

Adults and children 2 years of age and older
apply to affected area not more than 3 to 4 times daily
Children under 2 years of age
do not use, consult a doctor
For external anal itching

Adults: when practical, clean the affected area with mild soap and warm water, rinse thoroughly, gently dry by patting or blotting with toilet tissue or a soft cloth before application of this product

Children under 12 years of age: consult a doctor
Guaifenesin

Guaifenesin

do not exceed 6 doses in 24 hours take with a full glass of water adults and children 12 yearsof age and over 1 to 2 tablets every4 hours children 6 to under 12 yearsof age
½ to 1 tablet every4 hours
children under 6 years of age consult a physician
Zolpidem Tartrate

Zolpidem Tartrate

to prevent motion sickness, the first dose should be taken one-half to one hour before starting activity adults and children 12 years of age and over: 1 to 2 tablets every 4-6 hours; not to exceed 8 tablets in 24 hours, or as directed by a doctor children 6 to under 12 years of age: 1/2 to 1 tablet every 6-8 hours; not to exceed 3 tablets in 24 hours, or as directed by a doctor children 2 to under 6 years of age: 1/2 tablet every 6-8 hours; not to exceed 1 1/2 tablets in 24 hours, or as directed by a doctor
Major Night Time Multi ...

Major Night Time Multi Symptom Cold And Flu Relief

do not take more than directed (see Overdose warning) do not take more than 4 doses in 24 hours adults and children 12 years and over: take 2 softgels with water every 6 hours swallow whole; do not crush, chew, or dissolve children under 12 years: do not use when using other Day Time or Night Time products, carefully read each label to ensure correct dosing
Day Time Cold And Flu R...

Day Time Cold And Flu Relief

do not take more than directed (see Overdose warning) do not take more than 4 doses in 24 hours adults and children 12 years and over: take 2 softgels with water every 4 hours swallow whole; do not crush, chew, or dissolve children under 12 years: do not use when using other Day Time or Night Time products, carefully read each label to ensure correct dosing
Loratadine

Loratadine

adults and children 6 years and over 1 tablet daily; not more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 6 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Miconazole 3 Combinatio...

Miconazole 3 Combination Pack

before using this product read the enclosed consumer information leaflet for complete directions and information adults and children 12 years of age and over: suppositories: insert 1 suppository into the vagina at bedtime for 3 nights in a row. Throw applicator away after use. external cream: use cap to puncture seal. Squeeze a small amount of cream onto your fingertip. Gently apply the cream onto the itchy, irritated skin outside the vagina. Use 2 times daily for up to 7 days, as needed. children under 12 years of age: ask a doctor
Other Information
do not use if suppository wrapper is missing or damaged (each suppository is individually wrapped) do not use if seal over tube opening has been punctured or is not visible do not purchase if carton is open store at room temperature 15º - 30ºC (59º - 86ºF). Avoid heat (over 30ºC- 86ºF)
Major Prep Hemorrhoidal...

Major Prep Hemorrhoidal

adults: when practical, cleanse the affected area by patting or blotting with an appropriate cleansing wipe. Gently dry by patting or blotting with a tissue or a soft cloth before insertion of this product. detach one suppository from the strip; remove the foil wrapper before inserting into the rectum as follows: hold suppository with rounded end up as shown, carefully separate foil tabs by inserting tip of fingernail at end marked “peel down” slowly and evenly peel apart (do not tear) foil by pulling tabs down both sides, to expose the suppository remove exposed suppository from wrapper insert one suppository into the rectum up to 4 times daily, especially at night, in the morning or after each bowel movement children under 12 years of age: ask a doctor
Lubricating Plus

Lubricating Plus

• to open, twist and pull tab to remove • instill 1 or 2 drops in the affected eye(s) as needed and discard container
Povidone Iodine Solutio...

Povidone Iodine Solution

As a first aid antiseptic
clean affected area apply a small amount of this product to the area1 to 3 times daily may be covered with a sterile bandage, if bandaged let dry. For preoperative patient skin preparation clean area apply to operative site prior to surgery using the applicator
Aspirin Regular Strengt...

Aspirin Regular Strength Regular Strength

drink a full glass of water with each dose adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 or 2 tablets every 4 hours, or 3 tablets every 6 hours; do not exceed 12 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Clear Anti Itch

Clear Anti Itch

shake well before applying was affected are of skin
adults and children 2 years of age and older - apply to affected area not more than 3 to 4 times daily

children under 2 years of age - ask a doctor
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily doses. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age).

Metformin hydrochloride tablets should be given in divided doses with meals and should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone. Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults -In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin hydrochloride tablets may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

Pediatrics -The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer from Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin hydrochloride tablets 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin hydrochloride tablets and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.)

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin.

Concomitant Metformin and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin therapy. Metformin tablets therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin hydrochloride tablets. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin is not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin hydrochloride tablets are not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Sore Throat Logenzes So...

Sore Throat Logenzes Sore Throat

adults and children 5 years or older: allow lozenge to dissolve slowly in the mouth; may be repeated every 2 hours as needed or as directed by a doctor or dentist. children under 5 years of age: ask a doctor
Doxycycline Hyclate

Doxycycline Hyclate

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS. Adults: The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours) followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg/day.

In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For children above eight years of age: The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 100 pounds or less is 2mg/lb of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 1 mg/lb of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses, on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 2 mg/lb of body weight may be used. For children over 100 lb the usual adult dose should be used.

The therapeutic antibacterial serum activity will usually persist for 24 hours following recommended dosage.

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS.)

If gastric irritation occurs, it is recommended that doxycycline be given with food or milk. The absorption of doxycycline is not markedly influenced by simultaneous ingestion of food or milk.

Studies to date have indicated that administration of doxycycline at the usual recommended doses does not lead to excessive accumulation of the antibiotic in patients with renal impairment.

Uncomplicated gonococcal infections in adults (except anorectal infections in men): 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose. The dose may be administered with food including milk or carbonated beverage, as required.

Uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infection in adults caused by Chlamydia trachomatis: 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 7 days.

Nongonococcal urethritis (NGU) caused by C. trachomatis and U. urealyticum: 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 7 days.

Syphilis – early: Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 2 weeks.

Syphilis of more than one year’s duration: Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 4 weeks.

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by N. gonorrhoeae: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by C. trachomatis: 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

For the prophylaxis of malaria: For adults, the recommended dose is 100 mg daily. For children over 8 years of age, the recommended dose is 2 mg/kg given once daily up to the adult dose. Prophylaxis should begin 1 to 2 days before travel to the malarious area. Prophylaxis should be continued daily during travel in the malarious area and for 4 weeks after the traveler leaves the malarious area.

Inhalational anthrax (post-exposure):

ADULTS: 100 mg of doxycycline, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days.

CHILDREN: weighing less than 100 lb (45 kg); 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days. Children weighing 100 lb or more should receive the adult dose.
Effervescent Pain Relie...

Effervescent Pain Relief Fast Relief Fast Relief

completely dissolve tablets in 4 ounces of water before taking Adults and children 12 years and over 2 tablets every 4 hoursDo not exceed 8 tablets in 24 hours 60 years and older 2 tablets every 4 hoursDo not exceed 4 tablets in 24 hours
Children under 12 years Consult a doctor
Cough And Cold

Cough And Cold

do not exceed recommended dose adults and children 12 years and over: 1 tablet every 6 hours. Do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: do not use
Banophen

Banophen

take every 4 to 6 hours

do not take more than 6 doses in 24 hours
adults and children 12 years of age and over take 1 capsule (50 mg) children under 12 years of age ask a doctro, the proper dosage strength is not available in this package**
** Do not attempt to break capsules. The proper dosage strength and dosing information for children under 12 years of age isavailable on the 25 mg package.
Medi-pads

Medi-pads

As hemorrhoidal treatment for adults:
When practical, cleanse the affected area with mild soap and warm water and rinse thoroughly. Gently dry by patting or blotting with toilet tissue or soft cloth before applying. Gently apply to the affected area by patting and then discard. Can be used up to 6 times daily or after each bowel movement. Children under 12 years of age: consult a doctor.
Major Clotrimazole

Major Clotrimazole

Clean the affected area and dry thoroughly. Apply a thin layer of this product over affected area twice daily (morning and night), or as directed by a doctor. Supervise children in the use of this product. For athlete's foot, pay special attention to the spaces between the toes; wear well-fitting ventilated shoes, and change shoes and socks at least once daily. For athlete's foot and ringworm, use daily for 4 weeks. For jock itch, use daily for 2 weeks. If conditions persists longer, consult a doctor. This product is not effective on the scalp or nails.
Major Povidone Iodine

Major Povidone Iodine

apply directly to affected area may be bandaged
Tolnaftate

Tolnaftate

clean the affected area and dry thoroughly apply a thin layer of the product over the affected area twice daily (morning and night) or as directed by a doctor supervise children in the use of this product
For athlete's foot
use daily for 4 weeks. If condition persists longer, consult a doctor pay special attention to the spaces between the toes wear well fitting ventilated shoes change shoes and socks at least once daily
For ringworm, use daily for 4 weeks. If condition persists longer, consult a doctor.

For jock itch, use daily for 2 weeks. If condition persists longer, consult a doctor.

This product is not effective on the scalp or nails.
Major Extra Strength Co...

Major Extra Strength Cold And Hot Pain Relief Therapy

Distributed By:

Major Pharmaceuticals

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150

Made in Korea
Sudogest

Sudogest

adults and children 12 years and older: take 1 tablet every 4 to 6 hours. Do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours. children under 12 years of age: do not use
Robafen Cough Formula

Robafen Cough Formula

do not take more than 6 doses in any 24 hour period
adults and children 12 years and over 2 - 4 teaspoons every 4 hours or as directed by a doctor children under 12 years do not use
Extra Strength Mapap

Extra Strength Mapap

do not take more than directed (see overdose warning)

adults and children 12 years and over

take 2 gelcaps every 6 hours while symptoms last

do not take more than 6 gelcaps in 24 hours, unless directed by a doctor

do not take for more than 10 days unless directed by a doctor

children under 12 years: do not use this adult extra strength product in children under 12 years of age; this will provide more than the recommended dose (overdose) of acetaminophen and may cause liver damage
Aspirin

Aspirin

• drink a full glass of water with each dose • adults and children 12 years and over: take 4 to 8 tablets every 4 hours not to exceed 48 tablets in 24 hours unless directed by a doctor • children under 12 years: consult a doctor
Senna

Senna

Take preferably at bedtime or as directed by a doctor. Shake Well Before Using.
age starting dose maximum dosage adults and children 12 years and older 2 - 3 teaspoons once a day 3 teaspoons twice a day children 6 to under 12 years 1 - 1 1/2 teaspoons once a day 1 1/2 teaspoons twice a day children 2 to under 6 years 1/2 - 3/4 teaspoon once a day 3/4 teaspoon twice a day children under 2 years ask a doctor ask a doctor
Body

Body

adults and children 2 years of age and older - apply to affected area not more than 3 to 4 times daily

children under 2 years of age - do not use, consult a doctor
for best results dry skin thoroughly before applying
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets intended for once daily administration. For treatment of hypertension and angina, when switching from immediate release metoprolol to metoprolol succinate extended-release, use the same total daily dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Titration may be needed in some patients.

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are scored and can be divided; however, do not crush or chew the whole or half tablet.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults: The usual initial dosage is 25 mg to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of age: A pediatric clinical hypertension study in patients 6 to 16 years of age did not meet its primary endpoint (dose response for reduction in SBP); however some other endpoints demonstrated effectiveness [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]. If selected for treatment, the recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release is 1 mg/kg once daily, but the maximum initial dose should not exceed 50 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 2 mg/kg (or in excess of 200 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Metoprolol succinate extended-release is not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years of age [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets is 25 mg once daily for two weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every two weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets intended for once daily administration. For treatment of hypertension and angina, when switching from immediate release metoprolol to metoprolol succinate extended-release, use the same total daily dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Titration may be needed in some patients.

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are scored and can be divided; however, do not crush or chew the whole or half tablet.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults: The usual initial dosage is 25 mg to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of age: A pediatric clinical hypertension study in patients 6 to 16 years of age did not meet its primary endpoint (dose response for reduction in SBP); however some other endpoints demonstrated effectiveness [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]. If selected for treatment, the recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release is 1 mg/kg once daily, but the maximum initial dose should not exceed 50 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 2 mg/kg (or in excess of 200 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Metoprolol succinate extended-release is not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years of age [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets is 25 mg once daily for two weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every two weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.
Sleep Tabs

Sleep Tabs

adults and children 12 years and over: take 2 tablets at bedtime if needed or as directed by a doctor children under 12 years: do not use
Atenolol

Atenolol

Hypertension

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day either alone or added to diuretic therapy. The full effect of this dose will usually be seen within one to two weeks. If an optimal response is not achieved, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Increasing the dosage beyond 100 mg a day is unlikely to produce any further benefit.

Atenolol may be used alone or concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents including thiazide-type diuretics, hydralazine, prazosin, and alpha-methyldopa.

Angina Pectoris

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day. If an optimal response is not achieved within one week, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Some patients may require a dosage of 200 mg once a day for optimal effect.

Twenty-four hour control with once daily dosing is achieved by giving doses larger than necessary to achieve an immediate maximum effect. The maximum early effect on exercise tolerance occurs with doses of 50 to 100 mg, but at these doses the effect at 24 hours is attenuated, averaging about 50% to 75% of that observed with once a day oral doses of 200 mg.

Acute Myocardial Infarction

In patients with definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with atenolol I.V. injection should be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital and after eligibility is established. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized. Treatment should begin with the intravenous administration of 5 mg atenolol over 5 minutes followed by another 5 mg intravenous injection 10 minutes later. Atenolol I.V. injection should be administered under carefully controlled conditions including monitoring of blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram. Dilutions of atenolol I.V. injection in Dextrose Injection USP, Sodium Chloride Injection USP, or Sodium Chloride and Dextrose Injection may be used. These admixtures are stable for 48 hours if they are not used immediately.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (10 mg), atenolol tablets 50 mg should be initiated 10 minutes after the last intravenous dose followed by another 50 mg oral dose 12 hours later. Thereafter, atenolol can be given orally either 100 mg once daily or 50 mg twice a day for a further 6 to 9 days or until discharge from the hospital. If bradycardia or hypotension requiring treatment or any other untoward effects occur, atenolol should be discontinued. (See full prescribing information prior to initiating therapy with atenolol tablets).

Data from other beta blocker trials suggest that if there is any question concerning the use of IV beta blocker or clinical estimate that there is a contraindication, the IV beta blocker may be eliminated and patients fulfilling the safety criteria may be given atenolol tablets 50 mg twice daily or 100 mg once a day for at least seven days (if the IV dosing is excluded).

Although the demonstration of efficacy of atenolol is based entirely on data from the first seven postinfarction days, data from other beta blocker trials suggest that treatment with beta blockers that are effective in the post-infarction setting may be continued for one to three years if there are no contraindications.

Atenolol is an additional treatment to standard coronary care unit therapy.

Elderly Patients or Patients with Renal Impairment

Atenolol is excreted by the kidneys; consequently dosage should be adjusted in cases of severe impairment of renal function. In general, dose selection of an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. Evaluation of patients with hypertension or myocardial infarction should always include assessment of renal function. Atenolol excretion would be expected to decrease with advancing age.

No significant accumulation of atenolol occurs until creatinine clearance falls below 35 mL/min/1.73m2. Accumulation of atenolol and prolongation of its half-life were studied in subjects with creatinine clearance between 5 and 105 mL/min. Peak plasma levels were significantly increased in subjects with creatinine clearances below 30 mL/min.

The following maximum oral dosages are recommended for elderly, renally-impaired patients and for patients with renal impairment due to other causes:

Creatinine Clearance
(mL/min/1.73m2)
Atenolol

Elimination
Half-Life (h)   Maximum Dosage   15-35   16-27   50 mg daily   < 15   > 27   25 mg daily
Some renally-impaired or elderly patients being treated for hypertension may require a lower starting dose of atenolol: 25 mg given as one tablet a day. If this 25 mg dose is used, assessment of efficacy must be made carefully. This should include measurement of blood pressure just prior to the next dose ("trough" blood pressure) to ensure that the treatment effect is present for a full 24 hours.

Although a similar dosage reduction may be considered for elderly and/or renally-impaired patients being treated for indications other than hypertension, data are not available for these patient populations.

Patients on hemodialysis should be given 25 mg or 50 mg after each dialysis; this should be done under hospital supervision as marked falls in blood pressure can occur.

Cessation of Therapy in Patients with Angina Pectoris

If withdrawal of atenolol therapy is planned, it should be achieved gradually and patients should be carefully observed and advised to limit physical activity to a minimum.
Carbamazepine

Carbamazepine

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Levetiracetam

Levetiracetam

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Levetiracetam is given orally with or without food. The levetiracetam dosing regimen depends on the indication, age group, dosage form (tablets), and renal function.

Prescribe the oral solution for pediatric patients with body weight ≤ 20 kg. Prescribe the oral solution or tablets for pediatric patients with body weight above 20 kg.

When using the oral solution in pediatric patients, dosing is weight-based (mg per kg) using a calibrated measuring device (not a household teaspoon or tablespoon).

Levetiracetam tablets, USP should be swallowed whole. Levetiracetam tablets, USP should not be chewed or crushed.

2.2 Partial Onset Seizures

Adults 16 Years And Older

     In clinical trials, daily doses of 1000 mg, 2000 mg, and 3000 mg, given as twice-daily dosing were shown to be effective. Although in some studies there was a tendency toward greater response with higher dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)], a consistent increase in response with increased dose has not been shown.

     Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Additional dosing increments may be given (1000 mg/day additional every 2 weeks) to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. Doses greater than 3000 mg/day have been used in open-label studies for periods of 6 months and longer. There is no evidence that doses greater than 3000 mg/day confer additional benefit.

Pediatric Patients

     1 Month To < 6 Months

     Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 14 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (7 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 14 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 42 mg/kg (21 mg/kg twice daily). In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 35 mg/kg in this age group. The effectiveness of lower doses has not been studied.

6 Months To <4 Years:

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased in 2 weeks by an increment of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 50 mg/kg (25 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 50 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical trial, the mean daily dose was 47 mg/kg in this age group.

4 Years To < 16 Years

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 60 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical efficacy trial, the mean daily dose was 44 mg/kg. The maximum daily dose was 3000 mg/day.

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing 20 to 40 kg, treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 500 mg given as twice daily dosing (250 mg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 500 mg to a maximum recommended daily dose of 1500 mg (750 mg twice daily).

For levetiracetam tablet dosing in pediatric patients weighing more than 40 kg, treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day given as twice daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 1000 mg/day to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg (1500 mg twice daily).

Levetiracetam Oral Solution Weight-Based Dosing Calculation For Pediatric Patients

The following calculation should be used to determine the appropriate daily dose of oral solution for pediatric patients:

                                              Daily dose (mg/kg/day) x patient weight (kg)

Total daily dose (mL/day) = ---------------------------------------------------------

                                                                           100 mg/mL

2.3 Myoclonic Seizures In Patients 12 Years of Age and Older With Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy

   Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been studied.

2.4 Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures

Adults 16 Years And Older

      Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been adequately studied.

Pediatric Patients Ages 6 To <16 Years

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). The effectiveness of doses lower than 60 mg/kg/day has not been adequately studied. Patients with body weight ≤20 kg should be dosed with oral solution. Patients with body weight above 20 kg can be dosed with either tablets or oral solution [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Only whole tablets should be administered.

2.5 Adult Patients With Impaired Renal Function

Levetiracetam tablets, USP dosing must be individualized according to the patient’s renal function status. Recommended doses and adjustment for dose for adults are shown in Table 1. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this an estimate of the patient’s creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:

                                             [140-age (years)] x weight (kg)

                                  CLcr= -------------------------------------------- (× 0.85 for female patients)

                                              72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Then CLcr is adjusted for body surface area (BSA) as follows:

                                               CLcr (mL/min)

CLcr (mL/min/1.73m2) = ---------------------------- x 1.73

                                               BSA subject (m2)
Table 1: Dosing Adjustment Regimen For Adult Patients With Impaired Renal Function
1Following dialysis, a 250 to 500 mg supplemental dose is recommended.
Group Creatinine Clearance (mg) (mL/min/1.73m2) Dosage Frequency Normal > 80                                       500 to 1,500 Every 12 hours Mild 50 – 80                                  500 to 1,000 Every 12 hours Moderate 30 – 50 250 to 750 Every 12 hours Severe <30 250 to 750 Every 12 hours ESRD patients using dialysis ---- 500 to 1,0001 Every 24 hours1
Tizanidine Hydrochlorid...

Tizanidine Hydrochloride

A single oral dose of 8 mg of tizanidine reduces muscle tone in patients with spasticity for a period of several hours. The effect peaks at approximately 1 to 2 hours and dissipates between 3 to 6 hours. Effects are dose-related.

Although single doses of less than 8 mg have not been demonstrated to be effective in controlled clinical studies, the dose-related nature of tizanidine’s common adverse events make it prudent to begin treatment with single oral doses of 4 mg. Increase the dose gradually (2 mg to 4 mg steps) to optimum effect (satisfactory reduction of muscle tone at a tolerated dose).

The dose can be repeated at 6 to 8 hour intervals, as needed, to a maximum of three doses in 24 hours. The total daily dose should not exceed 36 mg.

Experience with single doses exceeding 8 mg and daily doses exceeding 24 mg is limited. There is essentially no experience with repeated, single, daytime doses greater than 12 mg or total daily doses greater than 36 mg (see WARNINGS).

Food has complex effects on tizanidine pharmacokinetics. These pharmacokinetic differences may result in clinically significant differences when switching administration of the tablet between the fed and fasted state. These changes may result in increased adverse events or delayed/more rapid onset of activity, depending upon the nature of the switch. For this reason, the prescriber should be thoroughly familiar with the changes in kinetics associated with these different conditions (see Pharmacokinetics).
Levofloxacin

Levofloxacin

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function

The usual dose of levofloxacin tablets are 250 mg, 500 mg, or 750 mg administered orally every 24 hours, as indicated by infection and described in Table 1.

These recommendations apply to patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min. For patients with creatinine clearance <50 mL/min, adjustments to the dosing regimen are required [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].
Table 1: Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function (creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min)
* Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)].

† Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician.

‡Due to methicillin-susceptible Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae (including multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Moraxella catarrhalis, Chlamydophila pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, or Mycoplasma pneumoniae [see   Indications and Usage (1.2)].

§ Due to Streptococcus pneumoniae (excluding multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, or Chlamydophila pneumoniae [see Indications and Usage (1.3)].

¶ This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis and AP due to E. coli, including cases with concurrent bacteremia.

# This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Enterococcus faecalis, Enterococcus cloacae, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa; and for AP due to E. coli.

Þ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)].

ß The safety of levofloxacin in adults for durations of therapy beyond 28 days or in pediatric patients for durations beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk.

à Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis. Higher doses of levofloxacin typically used for treatment of pneumonia can be used for treatment of plague, if clinically indicated.
Type of Infection* Dosed Every 24 hours Duration (days)† Nosocomial Pneumonia 750 mg 7-14 Community Acquired Pneumonia‡ 500 mg 7-14 Community Acquired Pneumonia§ 750 mg 5 Acute Bacterial Sinusitis 750 mg 5 500 mg 10-14 Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis 500 mg 7 Complicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI) 750 mg 7-14 Uncomplicated SSSI 500 mg 7-10 Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis 500 mg 28 Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)¶ 750 mg 5 Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)# 250 mg 10 Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection 250 mg 3 Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure), adult and pediatric patients > 50 kg Þ,ß Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age Þ,ß 500 mgSee Table 2 below (2.2) 60ß 60ß Plague, adult and pediatric patients > 50 kg à Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 500 mgSee Table 2 below (2.2) 10 to 1410 to 14
2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The dosage in pediatric patients ≥ 6 months of age is described below in Table 2.
Table 2: Dosage in Pediatric Patients ≥ 6 months of age
* Due to Bacillus anthracis [see Indications and Usage (1.13)] and Yersinia pestis [see Indications and Usage (1.14)].

† Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician.

‡ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)]

§ The safety of levofloxacin in pediatric patients for durations of therapy beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk.

¶ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis.
Type of Infection* Dose Freq. Once every Duration† Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure)‡,§ Pediatric patients > 50 kg 500 mg 24 hr 60 days§ Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 8 mg/kg (not to exceed  250 mg per dose) 12 hr 60 days§ Plague ¶ Pediatric patients > 50 kg 500 mg 24 hr 10 to 14 days Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 8 mg/kg (not to exceed  250 mg per dose) 12 hr 10 to 14 days
2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Adults with Renal Impairment

Administer levofloxacin with caution in the presence of renal insufficiency. Careful clinical observation and appropriate laboratory studies should be performed prior to and during therapy since elimination of levofloxacin may be reduced.

No adjustment is necessary for patients with a creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min.

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), adjustment of the dosage regimen is necessary to avoid the accumulation of levofloxacin due to decreased clearance [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Table 3 shows how to adjust dose based on creatinine clearance.
Table 3: Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min) Dosage in Normal Renal Function Every 24 hours Creatinine Clearance 20 to 49 mL/min Creatinine Clearance 10 to 19 mL/min Hemodialysis or Chronic Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD) 750 mg 750 mg every 48 hours 750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours 750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours 500 mg 500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 24 hours 500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours 500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours 250 mg No dosage adjustment required 250 mg every 48 hours. If treating uncomplicated UTI, then no dosage adjustment is required No information on dosing adjustment is available
2.4 Drug Interaction With Chelation Agents: Antacids, Sucralfate, Metal Cations, Multivitamins

Levofloxacin Tablets

Levofloxacin Tablets should be administered at least two hours before or two hours after antacids containing magnesium, aluminum, as well as sucralfate, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc or didanosine chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

Food and Levofloxacin Tablets

Levofloxacin Tablets can be administered without regard to food.

Hydration for Patients Receiving Levofloxacin Tablets

Adequate hydration of patients receiving oral levofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria and cylindruria have been reported with quinolones [see Adverse Reactions (6.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].
Senna Plus

Senna Plus

Take preferably at bedtime or as directed by a doctor if you do not have a comfortable bowel movement by the second day, increase dose by one tablet (do not exceed maximum dosage) age starting dose maximum dose adults and children 12 years & over 2 tablets once daily 4 tablets twice daily children 6 to under 12 years 1 tablet once daily 2 tablets twice daily children 2 to under 6 years 1/2 tablet once daily 1 tablet twice daily children under 2 years ask a doctor ask a doctor
Cromolyn Sodium Spray

Cromolyn Sodium Spray

see package insert on how to use pump parent or care provider must supervise the use of this product by young children adults and children 2 years and older: spray once into each nostril. Repeat 3-4 times a day (every 4-6 hours). If needed, may be used up to 6 times a day. use every day while in contact with the cause of your allergies (pollen, molds, pets, and dust) to prevent nasal allergy symptoms, use before contact with the cause of your allergies. For best results, start using up to one week before contact. if desired, you can use this product with other medicines, including other allergy medicines. Children under 2 years: Do not use unless directed by a doctor.
Claritin

Claritin

Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets and ciprofloxacin immediate-release tablets are not interchangeable. Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be administered orally once daily as described in the following Dosage Guidelines table:
DOSAGE GUIDELINES Indication Unit Dose Frequency Usual Duration Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection(Acute Cystitis) 500 mg Q24h 3 Days Complicated Urinary Tract Infection 1000 mg Q24h 7-14 Days Acute Uncomplicated Pyelonephritis 1000 mg Q24h 7-14 Days
Patients whose therapy is started with ciprofloxacin I.V. for urinary tract infections may be switched to ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician.

Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be administered at least 2 hours before or 6 hours after antacids containing magnesium or aluminum, as well as sucralfate, VIDEX® (didanosine) chewable/buffered tablets or pediatric powder, other highly buffered drugs, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc. Although ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets may be taken with meals that include milk, concomitant administration with dairy products alone, or with calcium-fortified products should be avoided, since decreased absorption is possible. A 2-hour window between substantial calcium intake (> 800 mg) and dosing with ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets are recommended. Ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole. DO NOT SPLIT, CRUSH, OR CHEW THE TABLET. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Drug-drug Interactions, PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions and Information for Patients.)

Impaired Renal Function

Ciprofloxacin is eliminated primarily by renal excretion; however, the drug is also metabolized and partially cleared through the biliary system of the liver and through the intestine. These alternate pathways of drug elimination appear to compensate for the reduced renal excretion in patients with renal impairment. No dosage adjustment is required for patients with uncomplicated urinary tract infections receiving 500 mg ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets. In patients with complicated urinary tract infections and acute uncomplicated pyelonephritis, who have a creatinine clearance of < 30 mL/min, the dose of ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets should be reduced from 1000 mg to 500 mg daily. For patients on hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis, administer ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets after the dialysis procedure is completed. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, and PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use.)

Impaired Hepatic Function

No dosage adjustment is required with ciprofloxacin extended-release tablets in patients with stable chronic cirrhosis. The kinetics of ciprofloxacin in patients with acute hepatic insufficiency, however, have not been fully elucidated. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations.)
Nicorelief

Nicorelief

• if you are under 18 years of age, ask a doctor before use • before using this product, read the enclosed User’s Guide for complete directions and other important information • begin using the gum on your quit day • if you smoke your first cigarette within 30 minutes of waking up, use Nicotine Polacrilex Gum, 4 mg • if you smoke your first cigarette more than 30 minutes after waking up, use Nicotine Polacrilex Gum, 2 mg according to the following 12 week schedule:
Weeks 1 to 6

Weeks 7 to 9

Weeks 10 to 12

1 piece every

1 to 2 hours

1 piece every

2 to 4 hours

1 piece every

4 to 8 hours
• nicotine gum is a medicine and must be used a certain way to get the best results • chew the gum slowly until it tingles. Then park it between your cheek and gum. When the tingle is gone, begin chewing again, until the tingle returns. • repeat this process until most of the tingle is gone (about 30 minutes) • do not eat or drink for 15 minutes before chewing the nicotine gum, or while chewing a piece • to improve your chances of quitting, use at least 9 pieces per day for the first 6 weeks • if you experience strong or frequent cravings, you may use a second piece within the hour. However, do not continuously use one piece after another since this may cause you hiccups, heartburn, nausea or other side effects. • do not use more than 24 pieces a day • it is important to complete treatment. If you feel you need to use the gum for a longer period to keep from smoking, talk to your health care provider.
Acyclovir

Acyclovir

Acute Treatment of Herpes Zoster

800 mg every 4 hours orally, 5 times daily for 7 to 10 days.

Genital Herpes

Treatment of Initial Genital Herpes

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 10 days.

Chronic Suppressive Therapy for Recurrent Disease

400 mg 2 times daily for up to 12 months, followed by re-evaluation. Alternative regimens have included doses ranging from 200 mg 3 times daily to 200 mg 5 times daily.

The frequency and severity of episodes of untreated genital herpes may change over time. After 1 year of therapy, the frequency and severity of the patient’s genital herpes infection should be re-evaluated to assess the need for continuation of therapy with acyclovir.

Intermittent Therapy

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 5 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom (prodrome) of recurrence.

Treatment of Chickenpox

Children (2 years of age and older)

20 mg/kg per dose orally 4 times daily (80 mg/kg/day) for 5 days. Children over 40 kg should receive the adult dose for chickenpox.

Adults and Children over 40 kg

800 mg 4 times daily for 5 days.

Intravenous acyclovir is indicated for the treatment of varicella-zoster infections in immunocompromised patients.

When therapy is indicated, it should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of chickenpox. There is no information about the efficacy of therapy initiated more than 24 hours after onset of signs and symptoms.

Patients With Acute or Chronic Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dose of acyclovir should be modified as shown in Table 3:
Table 3. Dosage Modification for Renal Impairment
Creatinine

Adjusted Dosage Regimen

Normal Dosage

Regimen

Clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2)

Dose

(mg)

Dosing Interval

200 mg every 4 hours

>10

200

every 4 hours, 5x daily

0-10

200

every 12 hours

400 mg every 12 hours

>10

0-10

400

200

every 12 hours

every 12 hours

800 mg every 4 hours

>25

800

every 4 hours, 5x daily

10-25

800

every 8 hours

0-10

800

every 12 hours

Hemodialysis

For patients who require hemodialysis, the mean plasma half-life of acyclovir during hemodialysis is approximately 5 hours. This results in a 60% decrease in plasma concentrations following a 6-hour dialysis period. Therefore, the patient’s dosing schedule should be adjusted so that an additional dose is administered after each dialysis.

Peritoneal Dialysis

No supplemental dose appears to be necessary after adjustment of the dosing interval.
Acyclovir

Acyclovir

Acute Treatment of Herpes Zoster

800 mg every 4 hours orally, 5 times daily for 7 to 10 days.

Genital Herpes

Treatment of Initial Genital Herpes

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 10 days.

Chronic Suppressive Therapy for Recurrent Disease

400 mg 2 times daily for up to 12 months, followed by re-evaluation. Alternative regimens have included doses ranging from 200 mg 3 times daily to 200 mg 5 times daily.

The frequency and severity of episodes of untreated genital herpes may change over time. After 1 year of therapy, the frequency and severity of the patient’s genital herpes infection should be re-evaluated to assess the need for continuation of therapy with acyclovir.

Intermittent Therapy

200 mg every 4 hours, 5 times daily for 5 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom (prodrome) of recurrence.

Treatment of Chickenpox

Children (2 years of age and older)

20 mg/kg per dose orally 4 times daily (80 mg/kg/day) for 5 days. Children over 40 kg should receive the adult dose for chickenpox.

Adults and Children over 40 kg

800 mg 4 times daily for 5 days.

Intravenous acyclovir is indicated for the treatment of varicella-zoster infections in immunocompromised patients.

When therapy is indicated, it should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of chickenpox. There is no information about the efficacy of therapy initiated more than 24 hours after onset of signs and symptoms.

Patients With Acute or Chronic Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dose of acyclovir should be modified as shown in Table 3:
Table 3. Dosage Modification for Renal Impairment
Creatinine

Adjusted Dosage Regimen

Normal Dosage

Regimen

Clearance

(mL/min/1.73 m2)

Dose

(mg)

Dosing Interval

200 mg every 4 hours

>10

200

every 4 hours, 5x daily

0-10

200

every 12 hours

400 mg every 12 hours

>10

0-10

400

200

every 12 hours

every 12 hours

800 mg every 4 hours

>25

800

every 4 hours, 5x daily

10-25

800

every 8 hours

0-10

800

every 12 hours

Hemodialysis

For patients who require hemodialysis, the mean plasma half-life of acyclovir during hemodialysis is approximately 5 hours. This results in a 60% decrease in plasma concentrations following a 6-hour dialysis period. Therefore, the patient’s dosing schedule should be adjusted so that an additional dose is administered after each dialysis.

Peritoneal Dialysis

No supplemental dose appears to be necessary after adjustment of the dosing interval.
Stay Awake

Stay Awake

adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 tablet not more often than every 3 to 4 hours
Major Prep Hemorrhoidal...

Major Prep Hemorrhoidal

Distributed By

Major Pharmaceuticals

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150

Made in Korea
Dipyridamole

Dipyridamole

Adjunctive Use in Prophylaxis of Thromboembolism after Cardiac Valve Replacement. The recommended dose is 75-100 mg four times daily as an adjunct to the usual warfarin therapy. Please note that aspirin is not to be administered concomitantly with coumarin anticoagulants.
Sudogest Pe

Sudogest Pe

adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 tablet every 4 hours. Do not take more than 6 tablets in 24 hours. children under 12 years: do not use this product in children under 12 years of age
Ranitidine

Ranitidine

adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water 30 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn can be used up to twice daily (do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours) children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Sudogest

Sudogest

adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 tablet every 4 to 6 hours. Do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours. children under 12 years: do not use this product in children under 12 years of age
Chewable Adult Low Dose...

Chewable Adult Low Dose Aspirin

Distributed By:

Major Pharmaceuticals

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150 USA

Made in Korea
Lansoprazole

Lansoprazole

adults 18 years of age and older this product is to be used once a day (every 24 hours), every day for 14 days it may take 1 to 4 days for full effect, although some people get complete relief of symptoms within 24 hours
14-Day Course of Treatment
swallow 1 capsule with a glass of water before eating in the morning take every day for 14 days do not take more than 1 capsule a day swallow whole. Do not crush or chew capsules. do not use for more than 14 days unless directed by your doctor
Repeated 14-Day Courses (if needed)
you may repeat a 14-day course every 4 months do not take for more than 14 days or more often than every 4 months unless directed by a doctor. Patients should use the lowest dose and shortest duration of this therapy. children under 18 years of age: ask a doctor before use. Heartburn in children may sometimes be caused by a serious condition.
Clindamycin Hydrochlori...

Clindamycin Hydrochloride

If significant diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued (see WARNING box).

Adults: Serious infections—150 to 300 mg every 6 hours. More severe infections - 300 to 450 mg every 6 hours. Pediatric Patients: Serious infections - 8 to 16 mg/kg/day (4 to 8 mg/lb/day) divided into three or four equal doses. More severe infections - 16 to 20 mg/kg/day (8 to 10 mg/lb/day) divided into three or four equal doses.

To avoid the possibility of esophageal irritation, clindamycin hydrochloride capsules should be taken with a full glass of water.

Serious infections due to anaerobic bacteria are usually treated with clindamycin phosphate sterile solution. However, in clinically appropriate circumstances, the physician may elect to initiate treatment or continue treatment with clindamycin hydrochloride capsules.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should continue for at least 10 days.
Anastrozole

Anastrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The dose of anastrozole tablets is one 1 mg tablet taken once a day. For patients with advanced breast cancer, anastrozole tablets should be continued until tumor progression. Anastrozole tablets can be taken with or without food.

For adjuvant treatment of early breast cancer in postmenopausal women, the optimal duration of therapy is unknown. In the ATAC trial anastrozole was administered for five years. [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment or for elderly patients. [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)]

2.2 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No changes in dose are recommended for patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic impairment. Anastrozole has not been studied in patients with severe hepatic impairment. [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)]
Baclofen

Baclofen

The determination of optimal dosage requires individual titration. Start therapy at a low dosage and increase gradually until optimum effect is achieved (usually between 40 to 80 mg daily).

The following dosage titration schedule is suggested:
5 mg t.i.d. for 3 days 10 mg t.i.d. for 3 days 15 mg t.i.d. for 3 days 20 mg t.i.d. for 3 days
Thereafter additional increases may be necessary but the total daily dose should not exceed a maximum of 80 mg daily (20 mg q.i.d.).

The lowest dose compatible with an optimal response is recommended. If benefits are not evident after a reasonable trial period, patients should be slowly withdrawn from the drug (see WARNINGS Abrupt Drug Withdrawal).
Bupropion Hydrochloride...

Bupropion Hydrochloride

General Dosing Considerations

It is particularly important to administer bupropion hydrochloride tablets in a manner most likely to minimize the risk of seizure (see WARNINGS). Increases in dose should not exceed 100 mg/day in a 3-day period. Gradual escalation in dosage is also important if agitation, motor restlessness, and insomnia, often seen during the initial days of treatment, are to be minimized. If necessary, these effects may be managed by temporary reduction of dose or the short-term administration of an intermediate to long-acting sedative hypnotic. A sedative hypnotic usually is not required beyond the first week of treatment. Insomnia may also be minimized by avoiding bedtime doses. If distressing, untoward effects supervene, dose escalation should be stopped.

No single dose of bupropion hydrochloride tablets should exceed 150 mg. Bupropion hydrochloride tablets should be administered 3 times daily, preferably with at least 6 hours between successive doses.

Usual Dosage for Adults

The usual adult dose is 300 mg/day, given 3 times daily. Dosing should begin at 200 mg/day, given as 100 mg twice daily. Based on clinical response, this dose may be increased to 300 mg/day, given as 100 mg 3 times daily, no sooner than 3 days after beginning therapy (see Table 3).
Table 3. Dosing Regimen
Treatment
Day
Total
Daily Dose
Tablet
Strength Number of Tablets Morning Midday Evening 1 200 mg 100 mg 1 0 1 4 300 mg 100 mg 1 1 1
Increasing the Dosage Above 300 mg/Day

As with other antidepressants, the full antidepressant effect of bupropion hydrochloride tablets may not be evident until 4 weeks of treatment or longer. An increase in dosage, up to a maximum of 450 mg/day, given in divided doses of not more than 150 mg each, may be considered for patients in whom no clinical improvement is noted after several weeks of treatment at 300 mg/day. Dosing above 300 mg/day may be accomplished using the 75 or 100 mg tablets. The 100 mg tablet must be administered 4 times daily with at least 4 hours between successive doses, in order not to exceed the limit of 150 mg in a single dose. Bupropion hydrochloride tablets should be discontinued in patients who do not demonstrate an adequate response after an appropriate period of treatment at 450 mg/day.

Maintenance Treatment

The lowest dose that maintains remission is recommended. Although it is not known how long the patient should remain on bupropion hydrochloride tablets, it is generally recognized that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of antidepressant drug treatment.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

Bupropion hydrochloride tablets should be used with extreme caution in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis. The dose should not exceed 75 mg once a day in these patients. Bupropion hydrochloride tablets should be used with caution in patients with hepatic impairment (including mild-to-moderate hepatic cirrhosis) and a reduced frequency and/or dose should be considered in patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic cirrhosis (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Bupropion hydrochloride tablets should be used with caution in patients with renal impairment and a reduced frequency and/or dose should be considered (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS).
Gabapentin

Gabapentin

Gabapentin is given orally with or without food.

If gabapentin dose is reduced, discontinued or substituted with an alternative medication, this should be done gradually over a minimum of 1 week (a longer period may be needed at the discretion of the prescriber).

Postherpetic Neuralgia

In adults with postherpetic neuralgia, gabapentin therapy may be initiated as a single 300-mg dose on Day 1, 600 mg/day on Day 2 (divided BID), and 900 mg/day on Day 3 (divided TID). The dose can subsequently be titrated up as needed for pain relief to a daily dose of 1800 mg (divided TID). In clinical studies, efficacy was demonstrated over a range of doses from 1800 mg/day to 3600 mg/day with comparable effects across the dose range. Additional benefit of using doses greater than 1800 mg/day was not demonstrated.

Epilepsy

Gabapentin is recommended for add-on therapy in patients 3 years of age and older. Effectiveness in pediatric patients below the age of 3 years has not been established.

Patients >12 years of age

The effective dose of gabapentin is 900 to 1800 mg/day and given in divided doses (three times a day) using 300 or 400 mg capsules. The starting dose is 300 mg three times a day. If necessary, the dose may be increased using 300 or 400 mg capsules three times a day up to 1800 mg/day. Dosages up to 2400 mg/day have been well tolerated in long-term clinical studies. Doses of 3600 mg/day have also been administered to a small number of patients for a relatively short duration, and have been well tolerated. The maximum time between doses in the TID schedule should not exceed 12 hours.

Pediatric Patients Age 3 to 12 years

The starting dose should range from 10 to 15 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses, and the effective dose reached by upward titration over a period of approximately 3 days. The effective dose of gabapentin in patients 5 years of age and older is 25 to 35 mg/kg/day and given in divided doses (three times a day). The effective dose in pediatric patients ages 3 and 4 years is 40 mg/kg/day and given in divided doses (three times a day) (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pediatrics). Dosages up to 50 mg/kg/day have been well-tolerated in a long-term clinical study. The maximum time interval between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

It is not necessary to monitor gabapentin plasma concentrations to optimize gabapentin therapy. Further, because there are no significant pharmacokinetic interactions among gabapentin and other commonly used antiepileptic drugs, the addition of gabapentin does not alter the plasma levels of these drugs appreciably.

If gabapentin is discontinued and/or an alternate anticonvulsant medication is added to the therapy, this should be done gradually over a minimum of 1 week.

Dosage in Renal Impairment

Creatinine clearance is difficult to measure in outpatients. In patients with stable renal function, creatinine clearance (CCr) can be reasonably well estimated using the equation of Cockcroft and Gault:

for females CCr=(0.85)(140-age)(weight)/[(72)(Scr)]

for males CCr=(140-age)(weight)/[(72)(Scr)]

where age is in years, weight is in kilograms and Scr is serum creatinine in mg/dL.

Dosage adjustment in patients ≥12 years of age with compromised renal function or undergoing hemodialysis is recommended as follows (see dosing recommendations above for effective doses in each indication).
TABLE 6. Gabapentin Dosage Based on Renal Function Renal Function Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Total Daily Dose Range (mg/day) Dosage Regimen(mg) ≥60 900–3600 300 TID 400 TID 600 TID 800 TID 1200 TID >30–59 400–1400 200 BID 300 BID 400 BID 500 BID 700 BID >15–29 200–700 200 QD 300 QD 400 QD 500 QD 700 QD 15a 100–300 100 QD 125 QD 150 QD 200 QD 300 QD Post-Hemodialysis Supplemental Dose (mg)b Hemodialysis 125b 150b 200b 250b 350b
a For patients with creatinine clearance <15 mL/min, reduce daily dose in proportion to creatinine clearance (e.g., patients with a creatinine clearance of 7.5 mL/min should receive one-half the daily dose that patients with a creatinine clearance of 15 mL/min receive).

b Patients on hemodialysis should receive maintenance doses based on estimates of creatinine clearance as indicated in the upper portion of the table and a supplemental post-hemodialysis dose administered after each 4 hours of hemodialysis as indicated in the lower portion of the table.

The use of gabapentin in patients <12 years of age with compromised renal function has not been studied.

Dosage in Elderly

Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and dose should be adjusted based on creatinine clearance values in these patients.
Simvastatin

Simvastatin

2.1 Recommended Dosing

The usual dosage range is 5 to 40 mg/day. In patients with CHD or at high risk of CHD, simvastatin can be started simultaneously with diet. The recommended usual starting dose is 10 or 20 mg once a day in the evening. For patients at high risk for a CHD event due to existing CHD, diabetes, peripheral vessel disease, history of stroke or other cerebrovascular disease, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg/day. Lipid determinations should be performed after 4 weeks of therapy and periodically thereafter.

2.2 Restricted Dosing for 80 mg

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, particularly during the first year of treatment, use of the 80-mg dose of simvastatin should be restricted to patients who have been taking simvastatin 80 mg chronically (e.g., for 12 months or more) without evidence of muscle toxicity [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Patients who are currently tolerating the 80-mg dose of simvastatin who need to be initiated on an interacting drug that is contraindicated or is associated with a dose cap for simvastatin should be switched to an alternative statin with less potential for the drug-drug interaction.

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, associated with the 80-mg dose of simvastatin, patients unable to achieve their LDL-C goal utilizing the 40-mg dose of simvastatin should not be titrated to the 80-mg dose, but should be placed on alternative LDL-C-lowering treatment(s) that provides greater LDL-C lowering.

2.3 Coadministration with Other Drugs

Patients taking Verapamil or Diltiazem

• The dose of simvastatin should not exceed 10 mg/day [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.3), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Patients taking Amiodarone, amlodipine or Ranolazine

• The dose of simvastatin should not exceed 20 mg/day [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1), Drug Interactions (7.3), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Patients with Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended dosage is 40 mg/day in the evening [see Dosage and Administration, Restricted Dosing for 80 mg (2.2)]. Simvastatin should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

Simvastatin exposure is approximately doubled with concomitant use of lomitapide; therefore, the dose of simvastatin should be reduced by 50% if initiating lomitapide. Simvastatin dosage should not exceed 20 mg/day (or 40 mg/day for patients who have previously taken simvastatin 80 mg/day chronically, e.g., for 12 months or more, without evidence of muscle toxicity) while taking lomitapide.

2.5 Adolescents (10-17 years of age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended usual starting dose is 10 mg once a day in the evening. The recommended dosing range is 10 to 40 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 40 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines1 and Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.
1 National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics. 89(3):495-501. 1992.
2.6 Patients with Renal Impairment

Because simvastatin does not undergo significant renal excretion, modification of dosage should not be necessary in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. However, caution should be exercised when simvastatin is administered to patients with severe renal impairment; such patients should be started at 5 mg/day and be closely monitored [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.7 Chinese Patients Taking Lipid-Modifying Doses (greater than or equal to 1 g/day Niacin) of Niacin-Containing Products

Because of an increased risk for myopathy in Chinese patients taking simvastatin 40 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses (greater than or equal to 1 g/day niacin) of niacin-containing products, caution should be used when treating Chinese patients with simvastatin doses exceeding 20 mg/day coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. Because the risk for myopathy is dose-related, Chinese patients should not receive simvastatin 80 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. The cause of the increased risk of myopathy is not known. It is also unknown if the risk for myopathy with coadministration of simvastatin with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products observed in Chinese patients applies to other Asian patients. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.1).]
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, multiple studies with isosorbide dinitrate and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for isosorbide dinitrate tablets (oral) must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release ISDN, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long.

As also noted under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, the effects of the second and later doses have been smaller and shorter-lasting than the effects of the first.

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with isosorbide dinitrate oral tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

As with all titratable drugs, it is important to administer the minimum dose which produces the desired clinical effect. The usual starting dose of isosorbide dinitrate tablets (oral) is 5 mg to 20 mg, two or three times daily. For maintenance therapy, 10 mg to 40 mg, two or three times daily is recommended. Some patients may require higher doses. A daily dose-free interval of at least 14 hours is advisable to minimize tolerance. The optimal interval will vary with the individual patient, dose and regimen.
Risperidone

Risperidone

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

RISPERIDONE can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is generally 2 mg/day. Dose increases should then occur at intervals not less than 24 hours, in increments of 1 - 2 mg/day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4 to 8 mg/day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4 to 16 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. However, doses above 6 mg/day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once-daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on RISPERIDONE, the effectiveness of RISPERIDONE 2 mg/day to 8 mg/day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment with an appropriate dose.

Adolescents

Due to Janssen Pharmaceuticals Corporation’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled for use in pediatric patients with schizophrenia. Dosage and administration information for pediatric patients with schizophrenia, 13 to 17 years of age, is approved for Janssen Pharmaceuticals Corporation’s risperidone drug product

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off RISPERIDONE, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to RISPERIDONE, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some schizophrenic patients, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. The period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching schizophrenic patients from depot antipsychotics, initiate RISPERIDONE therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

RISPERIDONE should be administered on a once-daily schedule, starting with 2 mg to 3 mg per day. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours and in dosage increments/decrements of 1 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1 to 6 mg per day [see Clinical Studies (14.2, 14.3)]. RISPERIDONE doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics

Due to Janssen Pharmaceuticals Corporation’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled for use in pediatric patients with bipolar mania. Dosage and administration information for the treatment of pediatric patients with bipolar disorder is approved for Janssen Pharmaceuticals Corporation’s risperidone drug products.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer-term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with RISPERIDONE. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of RISPERIDONE in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use RISPERIDONE for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

Due to Janssen Pharmaceuticals Corporation’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled for use in pediatric patients with irritability associated with autistic disorder. Dosage and administration information for the treatment of pediatric patients with irritability associated with autistic disorder, 5 to 16 years of age, is approved for Janssen Pharmaceuticals Corporation’s risperidone drug products.

2.4 Dosage in Special Populations

The recommended initial dose is 0.5 mg twice daily in patients who are elderly or debilitated, patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment, and patients either predisposed to hypotension or for whom hypotension would pose a risk. Dosage increases in these patients should be in increments of no more than 0.5 mg twice daily. Increases to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily should generally occur at intervals of at least 1 week. In some patients, slower titration may be medically appropriate.

Elderly or debilitated patients, and patients with renal impairment, may have less ability to eliminate RISPERIDONE than normal adults. Patients with impaired hepatic function may have increases in the free fraction of risperidone, possibly resulting in an enhanced effect [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)]. Patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions or for whom such reactions would pose a particular risk likewise need to be titrated cautiously and carefully monitored [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.2, 5.7, 5.16)]. If a once-daily dosing regimen in the elderly or debilitated patient is being considered, it is recommended that the patient be titrated on a twice-daily regimen for 2 to 3 days at the target dose. Subsequent switches to a once-daily dosing regimen can be done thereafter.

2.5 Co-Administration of RISPERIDONE with Certain Other Medications

Co-administration of carbamazepine and other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin, phenobarbital) with RISPERIDONE would be expected to cause decreases in the plasma concentrations of the sum of risperidone and 9-hydroxyrisperidone combined, which could lead to decreased efficacy of RISPERIDONE treatment. The dose of RISPERIDONE needs to be titrated accordingly for patients receiving these enzyme inducers, especially during initiation or discontinuation of therapy with these inducers [see Drug Interactions (7.11)].

Fluoxetine and paroxetine have been shown to increase the plasma concentration of risperidone 2.5-2.8 fold and 3-9 fold, respectively. Fluoxetine did not affect the plasma concentration of 9-hydroxyrisperidone. Paroxetine lowered the concentration of 9-hydroxyrisperidone by about 10%. The dose of RISPERIDONE needs to be titrated accordingly when fluoxetine or paroxetine is co-administered [see Drug Interactions (7.10)].
Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are an extended-release product intended for once-a-day oral administration. Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and should not be crushed or chewed.

2.2 Epilepsy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are administered orally, and must be swallowed whole. As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, concentrations of clonazepam, diazepam, ethosuximide, lamotrigine, tolbutamide, phenobarbital, carbamazepine, and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Complex Partial Seizures

For adults and children 10 years of age or older.

Monotherapy (Initial Therapy)

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been systematically studied as initial therapy. Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

The probability of thrombocytopenia increases significantly at total trough valproate plasma concentrations above 110 mcg/mL in females and 135 mcg/mL in males. The benefit of improved seizure control with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

Conversion to Monotherapy

Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made. Concomitant antiepilepsy drug (AED) dosage can ordinarily be reduced by approximately 25% every 2 weeks. This reduction may be started at initiation of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets therapy, or delayed by 1 to 2 weeks if there is a concern that seizures are likely to occur with a reduction. The speed and duration of withdrawal of the concomitant AED can be highly variable, and patients should be monitored closely during this period for increased seizure frequency.

Adjunctive Therapy

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets may be added to the patient's regimen at a dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

In a study of adjunctive therapy for complex partial seizures in which patients were receiving either carbamazepine or phenytoin in addition to valproate, no adjustment of carbamazepine or phenytoin dosage was needed [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. However, since valproate may interact with these or other concurrently administered AEDs as well as other drugs, periodic plasma concentration determinations of concomitant AEDs are recommended during the early course of therapy [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Simple and Complex Absence Seizures

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg/kg/day, increasing at one week intervals by 5 to 10 mg/kg/day until seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increases. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

A good correlation has not been established between daily dose, serum concentrations, and therapeutic effect. However, therapeutic valproate serum concentration for most patients with absence seizures is considered to range from 50 to 100 mcg/mL. Some patients may be controlled with lower or higher serum concentrations [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

As divalproex sodium extended-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, blood concentrations of phenobarbital and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Antiepilepsy drugs should not be abruptly discontinued in patients in whom the drug is administered to prevent major seizures because of the strong possibility of precipitating status epilepticus with attendant hypoxia and threat to life.

2.3 Migraine

Divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are indicated for prophylaxis of migraine headaches in adults.

The recommended starting dose is 500 mg once daily for one week, thereafter increasing to 1000 mg once daily. Although doses other than 1000 mg once daily of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets have not been evaluated in patients with migraine, the effective dose range of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets in these patients is 500 to 1000 mg/day. As with other valproate products, doses of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be individualized and dose adjustment may be necessary. If a patient requires smaller dose adjustments than that available with divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets should be used instead.

2.4 Conversion from Divalproex Sodium Delayed-Release Tablets to Divalproex Sodium Extended-Release Tablets

In adult patients and pediatric patients 10 years of age or older with epilepsy previously receiving divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, divalproex sodium extended-release tablets should be administered once daily using a dose 8% to 20% higher than the total daily dose of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets (Table 1). For patients whose divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose cannot be directly converted to divalproex sodium extended-release tablets, consideration may be given at the clinician’s discretion to increase the patient’s divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets.
Table 1 Dose Conversion * These total daily doses of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets cannot be directly converted to an 8% to 20% higher total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets because the required dosing strengths of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets are not available. Consideration may be given at the clinician’s discretion to increase the patient’s divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets total daily dose to the next higher dosage before converting to the appropriate total daily dose of divalproex sodium extended-release tablets. Divalproex Sodium Delayed-ReleaseTablets Total Daily Dose (mg) Divalproex Sodium Extended-ReleaseTablets (mg) 500* to 625 750 750* to 875 1000 1000* to 1125 1250 1250 to 1375 1500 1500 to 1625 1750 1750 2000 1875 to 2000 2250 2125 to 2250 2500 2375 2750 2500 to 2750 3000 2875 3250 3000 to 3125 3500
There is insufficient data to allow a conversion factor recommendation for patients with divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets doses above 3125 mg/day. Plasma valproate Cmin concentrations for divalproex sodium extended-release tablets on average are equivalent to divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, but may vary across patients after conversion. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL) [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

2.5 General Dosing Advice

Dosing in Elderly Patients

Due to a decrease in unbound clearance of valproate and possibly a greater sensitivity to somnolence in the elderly, the starting dose should be reduced in these patients. Starting doses in the elderly lower than 250 mg can only be achieved by the use of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets. Dosage should be increased more slowly and with regular monitoring for fluid and nutritional intake, dehydration, somnolence, and other adverse reactions. Dose reductions or discontinuation of valproate should be considered in patients with decreased food or fluid intake and in patients with excessive somnolence. The ultimate therapeutic dose should be achieved on the basis of both tolerability and clinical response [see Warnings and Precautions (5.11)].

Dose Related Adverse Reactions

The frequency of adverse effects (particularly elevated liver enzymes and thrombocytopenia) may be dose related. The probability of thrombocytopenia appears to increase significantly at total valproate concentrations of ≥ 110 mcg/mL (females) or ≥ 135 mcg/mL (males) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.5)]. The benefit of improved therapeutic effect with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

G.I. Irritation

Patients who experience G.I. irritation may benefit from administration of the drug with food or by slowly building up the dose from an initial low level.

Compliance

Patients should be informed to take divalproex sodium extended-release tablets every day as prescribed. If a dose is missed it should be taken as soon as possible, unless it is almost time for the next dose. If a dose is skipped, the patient should not double the next dose.
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol succinate extended-release is an extended release tablet intended for once daily administration. For treatment of hypertension and angina, when switching from immediate release metoprolol to metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, use the same total daily dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Titration may be needed in some patients. Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are scored and can be divided; however, do not crush or chew the whole or half tablet.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults: The usual initial dosage is 25 to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of age: Due to AstraZeneca's marketing exclusivity rights, this generic drug product is not labeled for pediatric use. Dosage and administration information in pediatric patients 6 years and older is approved for AstraZeneca's metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets.

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 - 2 weeks [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablet is 25 mg once daily for two weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every two weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults: The usual initial dosage is 25 to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of age: Due to AstraZeneca's marketing exclusivity rights, this generic drug product is not labeled for pediatric use. Dosage and administration information in pediatric patients 6 years and older is approved for AstraZeneca's metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets.

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 - 2 weeks [see Warnings and Precautions (5)].

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablet is 25 mg once daily for two weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every two weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.
Terazosin Hydrochloride...

Terazosin Hydrochloride

If terazosin capsules administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded as an initial dose. Patients should be closely followed during initial administration in order to minimize the risk of severe hypotensive response.

Subsequent Doses

The dose should be increased in a stepwise fashion to 2 mg, 5 mg, or 10 mg once daily to achieve the desired improvement of symptoms and/or flow rates. Doses of 10 mg once daily are generally required for the clinical response. Therefore, treatment with 10 mg for a minimum of 4 to 6 weeks may be required to assess whether a beneficial response has been achieved. Some patients may not achieve a clinical response despite appropriate titration. Although some additional patients responded at a 20 mg daily dose, there was an insufficient number of patients studied to draw definitive conclusions about this dose. There are insufficient data to support the use of higher doses for those patients who show inadequate or no response to 20 mg daily. If terazosin administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

Use With Other Drugs

Caution should be observed when terazosin capsules is administered concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents, especially the calcium channel blocker verapamil, to avoid the possibility of developing significant hypotension. When using terazosin capsules and other antihypertensive agents concomitantly, dosage reduction and retitration of either agent may be necessary (see PRECAUTIONS). Hypotension has been reported when terazosin capsules have been used with phosphodiesterase-5 (PDE-5) inhibitors.

Hypertension

The dose of terazosin capsules and the dose interval (12 or 24 hours) should be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a guide to its administration:

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded. This initial dosing regimen should be strictly observed to minimize the potential for severe hypotensive effects.

Subsequent Doses

The dose may be slowly increased to achieve the desired blood pressure response. The usual recommended dose range is 1 mg to 5 mg administered once a day; however, some patients may benefit from doses as high as 20 mg per day. Doses over 20 mg do not appear to provide further blood pressure effect and doses over 40 mg have not been studied. Blood pressure should be monitored at the end of the dosing interval to be sure control is maintained throughout the interval. It may also be helpful to measure blood pressure 2 to 3 hours after dosing to see if the maximum and minimum responses are similar, and to evaluate symptoms such as dizziness or palpitations which can result from excessive hypotensive response. If response is substantially diminished at 24 hours an increased dose or use of a twice daily regimen can be considered. If terazosin administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen. In clinical trials, except for the initial dose, the dose was given in the morning.

Use With Other Drugs

(See above.)
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

The usual dietary intake of potassium by the average adult is 50 to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 or more mEq of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patients. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day. Doses of 40 to 100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 20 mEq per day is given such that no more than 20 mEq is given in a single dose. Because of the potential for gastric irritation (see WARNINGS), Potassium Chloride Extended-release Capsules, USP, 8 mEq and 10 mEq should be taken with meals and with a full glass of water or other liquid.

Patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules may sprinkle the contents of the capsule onto a spoonful of soft food. The soft food, such as applesauce or pudding, should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water or juice to ensure complete swallowing of the microcapsules. The food used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any microcapsule/food mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Hypertension

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets, USP should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets, USP should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily in single or divided doses, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. The effective dosage range is 100 to 450 mg per day. Dosages above 450 mg per day have not been studied. While once-daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, lower doses (especially 100 mg) may not maintain a full effect at the end of the 24-hour period, and larger or more frequent daily doses may be required. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. Beta1 selectivity diminishes as the dose of metoprolol is increased.

Angina Pectoris

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets, USP should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets, USP should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in two divided doses. The dosage may be gradually increased at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The effective dosage range is 100 to 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, the dosage should be reduced gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks (see WARNINGS).

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment: During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with metoprolol tartrate tablets, USP can be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Treatment in this early phase should begin with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; the injections should be given at approximately 2-minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol, blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram should be carefully monitored.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), Metoprolol tartrate tablets USP, 50 mg every 6 hours, should be initiated 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continued for 48 hours. Thereafter, patients should receive a maintenance dosage of 100 mg twice daily (see Late Treatment below).

Patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets, USP either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, treatment with metoprolol should be discontinued (see WARNINGS).

Late Treatment: Patients with contraindications to treatment during the early phase of suspected or definite myocardial infarction, patients who appear not to tolerate the full early treatment, and patients in whom the physician wishes to delay therapy for any other reason should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets, USP,100 mg twice daily, as soon as their clinical condition allows. Therapy should be continued for at least 3 months. Although the efficacy of metoprolol beyond 3 months has not been conclusively established, data from studies with other beta-blockers suggest that treatment should be continued for 1 to 3 years.
Venlafaxine Hydrochlori...

Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

Venlafaxine extended-release capsules should be administered in a single dose with food either in the morning or in the evening at approximately the same time each day. Each capsule should be swallowed whole with fluid and not divided, crushed, chewed, or placed in water, or it may be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the entire contents on a spoonful of applesauce. This drug/food mixture should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets.Initial Treatment Major Depressive Disorder For most patients, the recommended starting dose for venlafaxine extended-release capsule is 75 mg/day, administered in a single dose. In the clinical trials establishing the efficacy of venlafaxine extended-release capsules in moderately depressed outpatients, the initial dose of venlafaxine was 75 mg/day. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 37.5 mg/day for 4 to 7 days, to allow new patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 75 mg/day. While the relationship between dose and antidepressant response for venlafaxine extended-release capsules has not been adequately explored, patients not responding to the initial 75 mg/day dose may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of approximately 225 mg/day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg/day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 4 days, since steady state plasma levels of venlafaxine and its major metabolites are achieved in most patients by day 4. In the clinical trials establishing efficacy, upward titration was permitted at intervals of 2 weeks or more; the average doses were about 140 to 180 mg/day (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). It should be noted that, while the maximum recommended dose for moderately depressed outpatients is also 225 mg/day for venlafaxine immediate release tablets, more severely depressed inpatients in one study of the development program for that product responded to a mean dose of 350 mg/day (range of 150 to 375 mg/day). Whether or not higher doses of venlafaxine extended-release capsules are needed for more severely depressed patients is unknown; however, the experience with venlafaxine extended-release capsules doses higher than 225 mg/day is very limited. (See PRECAUTIONS-General-Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness.) Switching Patients from Venlafaxine Immediate Release Tablets Depressed patients who are currently being treated at a therapeutic dose with venlafaxine immediate release tablets may be switched to venlafaxine extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent dose (mg/day), eg, 37.5 mg venlafaxine two-times-a-day to 75 mg venlafaxine extended-release capsules once daily. However, individual dosage adjustments may be necessary.Special Populations Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester Neonates exposed to venlafaxine extended-release capsules, other SNRIs, or SSRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with venlafaxine extended-release capsules during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. The physician may consider tapering venlafaxine extended-release capsules in the third trimester. Patients with Hepatic Impairment Given the decrease in clearance and increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with hepatic cirrhosis and mild and moderate hepatic impairment compared with normal subjects (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between subjects with cirrhosis, it may be necessary to reduce the dose even more than 50%, and individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients. Patients with Renal Impairment Given the decrease in clearance for venlafaxine and the increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with renal impairment (GFR = 10 to 70 mL/min) compared with normal subjects (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 25% to 50%. In patients undergoing hemodialysis, it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50%. Because there was much individual variability in clearance between patients with renal impairment, individualization of dosage may be desirable in some patients. Elderly Patients No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients solely on the basis of age. As with any drug for the treatment of major depressive disorder, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose. Maintenance Treatment There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long patients with major depressive disorder should be treated with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules. It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. In one study, in which patients responding during 8 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine extended-release capsules were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine extended-release capsules (75, 150, or 225 mg/day, qAM) during 26 weeks of maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, longer-term efficacy was demonstrated. A second longer-term study has demonstrated the efficacy of venlafaxine immediate release tablets in maintaining a response in patients with recurrent major depressive disorder who had responded and continued to be improved during an initial 26 weeks of treatment and were then randomly assigned to placebo or venlafaxine immediate release tablets for periods of up to 52 weeks on the same dose (100 to 200 mg/day, on a b.i.d. schedule) (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether or not the dose of venlafaxine immediate release tablets / venlafaxine extended-release capsules needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment. Discontinuing Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Extended-Release Capsules Symptoms associated with discontinuation of venlafaxine extended-release capsules, other SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate. In clinical trials with venlafaxine extended-release capsules, tapering was achieved by reducing the daily dose by 75 mg at 1 week intervals. Individualization of tapering may be necessary.Switching Patients To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of therapy with venlafaxine extended-release capsules. In addition, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping venlafaxine extended-release capsules before starting an MAOI (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS).
Fluoxetine

Fluoxetine

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once-a-day (morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon) and should not exceed a maximum dose of 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day.

However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. A dose increase to 20 mg/day may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed.

All patients — As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment — It is generally agreed that acute episodes of Major Depressive Disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Daily Dosing — Systematic evaluation of fluoxetine in adult patients has shown that its efficacy in Major Depressive Disorder is maintained for periods of up to 38 weeks following 12 weeks of open-label acute treatment (50 weeks total) at a dose of 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) — Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.9)].

Switching Patients to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) — At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. In addition, at least 5 weeks, perhaps longer, should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI [see Contraindications (4) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. In one of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose. Since there was a suggestion of a possible dose-response relationship for effectiveness in the second study, a dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer.

Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once daily (i.e., morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) — In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

In adolescents and higher weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of fluoxetine after 13 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, adult patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to an additional 6 months without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Bulimia Nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Only the 60 mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting. Consequently, the recommended dose is 60 mg/day, administered in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — Systematic evaluation of continuing fluoxetine 60 mg/day for periods of up to 52 weeks in patients with bulimia who have responded while taking fluoxetine 60 mg/day during an 8 week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment — In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After one week, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. The most frequently administered dose in the 2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with Panic Disorder.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment — While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, panic disorder is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

2.5 Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated With Bipolar I Disorder

When using fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for olanzapine and fluoxetine hydrochloride capsules.

Adult — Fluoxetine should be administered in combination with oral olanzapine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg and oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of coadministration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s Fluoxetine Capsules. However due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of fluoxetine in combination with olanzapine was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of fluoxetine and olanzapine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax1 and the Combination of Fluoxetine and Olanzapine For Olanzapine and Fluoxetine Hydrochloride Capsules(mg/day) Use in Combination Olanzapine (mg/ day) Fluoxetine (mg/day) 3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10 + 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40 + 10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10 + 2.5 40 + 10
1 Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCL) is a fixed-dose combination of fluoxetine and olanzapine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that Bipolar I Disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically re-examine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Fluoxetine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of pregnant Women During the Third Trimester — When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SNRIs or SSRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding. The physician may consider tapering fluoxetine in the third trimester [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric — A lower or less frequent dosage should be considered for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

Hepatic Impairment — As with many other medications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness — Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.12)].

Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination – The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modifications may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients less than 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.16) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)].

2.9 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine With Other MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Tramadol Hydrochloride

Tramadol Hydrochloride

Adults (17 years of age and over)

For patients with moderate to moderately severe chronic pain not requiring rapid onset of analgesic effect, the tolerability of tramadol hydrochloride tablets can be improved by initiating therapy with the following titration regimen: tramadol hydrochloride tablets should be started at 25 mg/day qAM and titrated in 25 mg increments as separate doses every 3 days to reach 100 mg/day (25 mg q.i.d.). Thereafter the total daily dose may be increased by 50 mg as tolerated every 3 days to reach 200 mg/day (50 mg q.i.d.). After titration, tramdol hydrochloride tablets 50 to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every 4 to 6 hours not to exceed 400 mg/day.

For the subset of patients for whom rapid onset of analgesic effect is required and for whom the benefits outweigh the risk of discontinuation due to adverse events associated with higher initial doses, tramdol hydrochloride tablets 50 mg to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every four to six hours, not to exceed 400 mg per day.

Individualization of Dose

Good pain management practice dictates that the dose be individualized according to patient need using the lowest beneficial dose. Studies with tramadol in adults have shown that starting at the lowest possible dose and titrating upward will result in fewer discontinuations and increased tolerability.
In all patients with creatinine clearance less than 30 mL/min, it is recommended that the dosing interval of tramadol hydrochloride tablets be increased to 12 hours, with a maximum daily dose of 200 mg. Since only 7% of an administered dose is removed by hemodialysis, dialysis patients can receive their regular dose on the day of dialysis. The recommended dose for adult patients with cirrhosis is 50 mg every 12 hours. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient over 65 years old should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting the greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal or cardiac function and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. For elderly patients over 75 years old, total dose should not exceed 300 mg/day.
Atorvastatin Calcium

Atorvastatin Calcium

2.1 Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia (Fredrickson Types IIa and IIb)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin calcium tablets should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current NCEP Guidelines). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin calcium tablets, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly.

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 years of age)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines, Clinical Pharmacology (12), and Indications and Usage (1.2)]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more.

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The dosage of atorvastatin calcium tablets in patients with homozygous FH is 10 to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. The combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates should generally be used with caution [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)].

2.5 Dosage in Patients With Renal Impairment

Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors

In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), therapy with atorvastatin should be avoided. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, caution should be used when prescribing atorvastatin and the lowest dose necessary employed. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, therapy with atorvastatin should be limited to 20 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, therapy with atorvastatin should be limited to 40 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed [see Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1), Drug Interactions (7)]
Tamsulosin Hydrochlorid...

Tamsulosin Hydrochloride

Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules 0.4 mg once daily is recommended as the dose for the treatment of the signs and symptoms of BPH. It should be administered approximately one-half hour following the same meal each day.

For those patients who fail to respond to the 0.4 mg dose after 2 to 4 weeks of dosing, the dose of tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules can be increased to 0.8 mg once daily. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules 0.4 mg should not be used in combination with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (e.g., ketoconazole) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

If tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules administration is discontinued or interrupted for several days at either the 0.4 mg or 0.8 mg dose, therapy should be started again with the 0.4 mg once-daily dose.
Labetalol Hydrochloride...

Labetalol Hydrochloride

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended initial dose is 100 mg twice daily whether used alone or added to a diuretic regimen. After 2 or 3 days, using standing blood pressure as an indicator, dosage may be titrated in increments of 100 mg b.i.d. every 2 or 3 days. The usual maintenance dosage of labetalol HCl is between 200 and 400 mg twice daily.

Since the full antihypertensive effect of labetalol HCl is usually seen within the first 1 to 3 hours of the initial dose or dose increment, the assurance of a lack of an exaggerated hypotensive response can be clinically established in the office setting. The antihypertensive effects of continued dosing can be measured at subsequent visits, approximately 12 hours after a dose, to determine whether further titration is necessary.

Patients with severe hypertension may require from 1200 to 2400 mg per day, with or without thiazide diuretics. Should side effects (principally nausea or dizziness) occur with these doses administered twice daily, the same total daily dose administered three times daily may improve tolerability and facilitate further titration. Titration increments should not exceed 200 mg twice daily.

When a diuretic is added, an additive antihypertensive effect can be expected. In some cases this may necessitate a labetalol HCl dosage adjustment. As with most antihypertensive drugs, optimal dosages of labetalol HCl tablets are usually lower in patients also receiving a diuretic.

When transferring patients from other antihypertensive drugs, labetalol HCl tablets should be introduced as recommended and the dosage of the existing therapy progressively decreased.

Elderly Patients: As in the general patient population, labetalol therapy may be initiated at 100 mg twice daily and titrated upwards in increments of 100 mg b.i.d. as required for control of blood pressure. Since some elderly patients eliminate labetalol more slowly, however, adequate control of blood pressure may be achieved at a lower maintenance dosage compared to the general population. The majority of elderly patients will require between 100 and 200 mg b.i.d.
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring. Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1 Mild to Moderate Alzheimer's Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day. The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2 Severe Alzheimer's Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride has been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3 Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.

2.1 Mild to Moderate Alzheimer's Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day. The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2 Severe Alzheimer's Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride has been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3 Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Gemfibrozil

Gemfibrozil

The recommended dose for adults is 1200 mg administered in two divided doses 30 minutes before the morning and evening meals (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).
Clonidine Hydrochloride...

Clonidine Hydrochloride

Adults: The dose of clonidine hydrochloride tablets, USP must be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a general guide to its administration.

Initial Dose: 0.1 mg tablet twice daily (morning and bedtime). Elderly patients may benefit from a lower initial dose.

Maintenance Dose:Further increments of 0.1 mg per day may be made at weekly intervals if necessary until the desired response is achieved. Taking the larger portion of the oral daily dose at bedtime may minimize transient adjustment effects of dry mouth and drowsiness. The therapeutic doses most commonly employed have ranged from 0.2 mg to 0.6 mg per day given in divided doses.

Studies have indicated that 2.4 mg is the maximum effective daily dose, but doses as high as this have rarely been employed.

Renal Impairment: Patients with renal impairment may benefit from a lower initial dose. Patients should be carefully monitored. Since only a minimal amount of Clonidine is removed during routine hemodialysis, there is no need to give supplemental clonidine following dialysis.

For questions regarding this product call Actavis at 1-800-432-8534.
Paroxetine

Paroxetine

Major Depressive Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended initial dose is 20 mg/day. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine in the treatment of major depressive disorder. As with all drugs effective in the treatment of major depressive disorder, the full effect may be delayed. Some patients not responding to a 20-mg dose may benefit from dose increases, in 10-mg/day increments, up to a maximum of 50 mg/day. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least 1 week.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine should remain on it. It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Systematic evaluation of the efficacy of paroxetine has shown that efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 1 year with doses that averaged about 30 mg.

Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended dose of paroxetine in the treatment of OCD is 40 mg daily. Patients should be started on 20 mg/day and the dose can be increased in 10-mg/day increments. Dose changes should occur at intervals of at least 1 week. Patients were dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine in the treatment of OCD. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 6-month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with OCD assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). OCD is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Panic Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The target dose of paroxetine in the treatment of panic disorder is 40 mg/day. Patients should be started on 10 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10-mg/day increments and at intervals of at least 1 week. Patients were dosed in a range of 10 to 60 mg/day in the clinical trials demonstrating the effectiveness of paroxetine. The maximum dosage should not exceed 60 mg/day.

Maintenance Therapy

Long-term maintenance of efficacy was demonstrated in a 3-month relapse prevention trial. In this trial, patients with panic disorder assigned to paroxetine demonstrated a lower relapse rate compared to patients on placebo (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). Panic disorder is a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Social Anxiety Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. The recommended and initial dosage is 20 mg/day. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 60 mg/day. While the safety of paroxetine has been evaluated in patients with social anxiety disorder at doses up to 60 mg/day, available information does not suggest any additional benefit for doses above 20 mg/day (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials).

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with paroxetine should remain on it. Although the efficacy of paroxetine beyond 12 weeks of dosing has not been demonstrated in controlled clinical trials, social anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition, and it is reasonable to consider continuation of treatment for a responding patient. Dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Usual Initial Dosage

Paroxetine should be administered as a single daily dose with or without food, usually in the morning. In clinical trials the effectiveness of paroxetine was demonstrated in patients dosed in a range of 20 to 50 mg/day. The recommended starting dosage and the established effective dosage is 20 mg/day. There is not sufficient evidence to suggest a greater benefit to doses higher than 20 mg/day. Dose changes should occur in 10 mg/day increments and at intervals of at least 1 week.

Maintenance Therapy

Systematic evaluation of continuing paroxetine for periods of up to 24 weeks in patients with Generalized Anxiety Disorder who had responded while taking paroxetine during an 8-week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials). Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to paroxetine and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see WARNINGS: Usage in Pregnancy). When treating pregnant women with paroxetine during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. The physician may consider tapering paroxetine in the third trimester.

Dosage for Elderly or Debilitated Patients, and Patients With Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

The recommended initial dose is 10 mg/day for elderly patients, debilitated patients, and/or patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment. Increases may be made if indicated. Dosage should not exceed 40 mg/day.

Switching Patients to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor Antidepressant

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat depression and initiation of therapy with paroxetine. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping paroxetine before starting an MAOI antidepressant (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Paroxetine With Reversible MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start paroxetine tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome or NMS-like reactions. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, non-pharmacological interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS). In some cases, a patient receiving therapy with paroxetine tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome or NMS-like reactions in a particular patient, paroxetine tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome or NMS-like reactions for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with paroxetine tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

Discontinuation of Treatment With Paroxetine

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of paroxetine have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS: Discontinuation of Treatment With Paroxetine). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment, regardless of the indication for which paroxetine is being prescribed. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.
Gabapentin

Gabapentin

Gabapentin Capsules is given orally with or without food.

If Gabapentin Capsules dose is reduced, discontinued or substituted with an alternative medication, this should be done gradually over a minimum of 1 week (a longer period may be needed at the discretion of the prescriber).

Postherpetic Neuralgia

In adults with postherpetic neuralgia, Gabapentin Capsules therapy may be initiated as a single 300-mg dose on Day 1, 600 mg/day on Day 2 (divided BID), and 900 mg/day on Day 3 (divided TID). The dose can subsequently be titrated up as needed for pain relief to a daily dose of 1800 mg (divided TID). In clinical studies, efficacy was demonstrated over a range of doses from 1800 mg/day to 3600 mg/day with comparable effects across the dose range. Additional benefit of using doses greater than 1800 mg/day was not demonstrated.

Epilepsy

Gabapentin Capsules is recommended for add-on therapy in patients 3 years of age and older. Effectiveness in pediatric patients below the age of 3 years has not been established.

Patients >12 years of age: The effective dose of Gabapentin Capsules is 900 to 1800 mg/day and given in divided doses (three times a day) using 300 or 400 mg capsules. The starting dose is 300 mg three times a day. If necessary, the dose may be increased using 300 or 400 mg capsules three times a day up to 1800 mg/day. Dosages up to 2400 mg/day have been well tolerated in long-term clinical studies. Doses of 3600 mg/day have also been administered to a small number of patients for a relatively short duration, and have been well tolerated. The maximum time between doses in the TID schedule should not exceed 12 hours.

Pediatric Patients Age 3–12 years: The starting dose should range from 10-15 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses, and the effective dose reached by upward titration over a period of approximately 3 days. The effective dose of Gabapentin Capsules in patients 5 years of age and older is 25–35 mg/kg/day and given in divided doses (three times a day). The effective dose in pediatric patients ages 3 and 4 years is 40 mg/kg/day and given in divided doses (three times a day) (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pediatrics.) Dosages up to 50 mg/kg/day have been well-tolerated in a long-term clinical study. The maximum time interval between doses should not exceed 12 hours.

It is not necessary to monitor gabapentin plasma concentrations to optimize Gabapentin Capsules therapy. Further, because there are no significant pharmacokinetic interactions among Gabapentin Capsules and other commonly used antiepileptic drugs, the addition of Gabapentin Capsules does not alter the plasma levels of these drugs appreciably.

If Gabapentin Capsules is discontinued and/or an alternate anticonvulsant medication is added to the therapy, this should be done gradually over a minimum of 1 week.

Dosage in Renal Impairment

Creatinine clearance is difficult to measure in outpatients. In patients with stable renal function, creatinine clearance (CCr) can be reasonably well estimated using the equation of Cockcroft and Gault:

for females CCr=(0.85)(140 age)(weight)/[(72)(SCr)]for males CCr=(140 age)(weight)/[(72)(SCr)]

where age is in years, weight is in kilograms and SCr is serum creatinine in mg/dL.

Dosage adjustment in patients ≥ 12 years of age with compromised renal function or undergoing hemodialysis is recommended as follows (see dosing recommendations above for effective doses in each indication).
Table 6. Gabapetin Capsules Dosage Based on Renal Function. Renal Function Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Total Daily Dose Range (mg/day) Dose Regimen (mg) a For patients with creatinine clearance <15 mL/min, reduce daily dose in proportion to creatinine clearance (e.g., patients with a creatinine clearance of 7.5 mL/min should receive one-half the daily dose that patients with a creatinine clearance of 15 mL/min receive). b Patients on hemodialysis should receive maintenance doses based on estimates of creatinine clearance as indicated in the upper portion of the table and a supplemental post-hemodialysis dose administered after each 4 hours of hemodialysis as indicated in the lower portion of the table. ≥60 900-3600 300 TID 400 TID 600 TID 800 TID 1200 TID >30-59 400-1400 200 BID 300 BID 400 BID 500 BID 700 BID >15-29 200-700 200 QD 300 QD 400 QD 500 QD 700 QD 15a 100-300 100 QD 125 QD 150 QD 200 QD 300 QD Post-Hemodialysis Supplemental Dose (mg)b Hemodialysis 125b 150b 200b 250b 350b
The use of Gabapentin Capsules in patients <12 years of age with compromised renal function has not been studied.

Dosage in Elderly

Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and dose should be adjusted based on creatinine clearance values in these patients.
Rifampin

Rifampin

Rifampin can be administered by the oral route (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE). See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY for dosing information in patients with renal failure.

Tuberculosis

Adults: 10 mg/kg, in a single daily administration, not to exceed 600 mg/day, oral

Pediatric Patients: 10-20 mg/kg, not to exceed 600 mg/day, oral

It is recommended that oral rifampin be administered once daily, either 1 hour before or 2 hours after a meal with a full glass of water. Rifampin is indicated in the treatment of all forms of tuberculosis. A three-drug regimen consisting of rifampin, isoniazid, and

pyrazinamide (e.g., RIFATER®1) is recommended in the initial phase of short-course therapy which is usually continued for 2 months. The Advisory Council for the Elimination of Tuberculosis, the American Thoracic Society, and the Centers for Disease

Control and Prevention recommend that either streptomycin or ethambutol be added as a fourth drug in a regimen containing isoniazid (INH), rifampin and pyrazinamide for initial treatment of tuberculosis unless the likelihood of INH resistance is very low. The need for a fourth drug should be reassessed when the results of susceptibility testing are known. If community rates of INH resistance are currently less than 4%, an initial treatment regimen with less than four drugs may be considered.

Following the initial phase, treatment should be continued with rifampin and isoniazid (e.g., RIFAMATE®2) for at least 4 months. Treatment should be continued for longer if the patient is still sputum or culture positive, if resistant organisms are present, or if the patient is HIV positive.

1RIFATER® (rifampin, isoniazid, and pyrazinamide) is a registered trademark of Sanofi-Aventis U.S. 2RIFAMATE® (rifampin and isoniazid) is a registered trademark of Sanofi-Aventis U.S.

Meningococcal Carriers

Adults: For adults, it is recommended that 600 mg rifampin be administered twice daily for two days.

Pediatric Patients: Pediatric patients 1 month of age or older: 10 mg/kg (not to exceed 600 mg per dose) every 12 hours for two days. Pediatric patients under 1 month of age: 5 mg/kg every 12 hours for two days.
Trazodone Hydrochloride...

Trazodone Hydrochloride

The dosage should be initiated at a low level and increased gradually, noting the clinical response and any evidence of intolerance. Occurrence of drowsiness may require the administration of a major portion of the daily dose at bedtime or a reduction of dosage. Trazodone Hydrochloride Tablets USP should be taken shortly after a meal or light snack. Symptomatic relief may be seen during the first week, with optimal antidepressant effects typically evident within two weeks. Twenty-five percent of those who respond to Trazodone Hydrochloride Tablets USP require more than two weeks (up to four weeks) of drug administration.

Usual Adult Dosage

An initial dose of 150 mg/day in divided doses is suggested. The dose may be increased by 50 mg/day every three to four days. The maximum dose for outpatients usually should not exceed 400 mg/day in divided doses. Inpatients (i.e., more severely depressed patients) may be given up to but not in excess of 600 mg/day in divided doses.

Maintenance

Dosage during prolonged maintenance therapy should be kept at the lowest effective level. Once an adequate response has been achieved, dosage may be gradually reduced, with subsequent adjustment depending on therapeutic response.

Although there has been no systematic evaluation of the efficacy of Trazodone Hydrochloride Tablets USP beyond 6 weeks, it is generally recommended that a course of antidepressant drug treatment should be continued for several months.
Carvedilol

Carvedilol

Carvedilol should be taken with food to slow the rate of absorption and reduce the incidence of orthostatic effects.

2.1 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.2 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.3 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4 )].

2.1 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.2 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.3 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4 )].
Escitalopram

Escitalopram

Escitalopram tablets should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adolescents

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. A flexible-dose trial of escitalopram tablets(10 to 20 mg/day) demonstrated the effectiveness of escitalopram tablets [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of 3 weeks.

Adults

The recommended dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. A fixed-dose trial of escitalopram tablets demonstrated the effectiveness of both 10 mg and 20 mg of escitalopram tablets, but failed to demonstrate a greater benefit of 20 mg over 10 mg [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. Systematic evaluation of continuing escitalopram tablets 10 or 20 mg/day in adult patients with major depressive disorder who responded while taking escitalopram tablets during an 8-week, acute-treatment phase demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use escitalopram tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Generalized Anxiety Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adults

The recommended starting dose of escitalopram tablets is 10 mg once daily. If the dose is increased to 20 mg, this should occur after a minimum of one week.

Maintenance Treatment

Generalized anxiety disorder is recognized as a chronic condition. The efficacy of escitalopram tablets in the treatment of GAD beyond 8 weeks has not been systematically studied. The physician who elects to use escitalopram tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Special Populations

10 mg/day is the recommended dose for most elderly patients and patients with hepatic impairment.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Escitalopram tablets should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

2.4 Discontinuation of Treatment with Escitalopram Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of escitalopram tablets and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

2.5 Switching Patients To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of escitalopram tablets therapy. Similarly, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping escitalopram tablets before starting an MAOI [see Contraindications (4.1) and Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of naproxen and other treatment options before deciding to use naproxen tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with naproxen tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen tablets, naproxen suspension, naproxen delayed-released tablets, and naproxen sodium tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen. The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min) (see WARNINGS: Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis

The recommended dose is 250 mg, 375 mg, or 500 mg twice daily. During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Juvenile Arthritis

The recommended total daily dose of naproxen is approximately 10 mg/kg given in 2 divided doses (i.e., 5 mg/kg given twice a day). Naproxen tablets are not well suited to this dosage so use of naproxen oral suspension is recommended for this indication.

Management of Pain, Primary Dysmenorrhea, and Acute Tendonitis and Bursitis

Because the sodium salt of naproxen is more rapidly absorbed, naproxen sodium is recommended for the management of acute painful conditions when prompt onset of pain relief is desired. Naproxen may also be used. The recommended starting dose of naproxen is 500 mg, followed by 500 mg every 12 hours or 250 mg every 6 to 8 hours as required. The initial total daily dose should not exceed 1250 mg of naproxen. Thereafter, the total daily dose should not exceed 1000 mg of naproxen.

Acute Gout

The recommended starting dose is 750 mg of naproxen followed by 250 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided.
Citalopram Hydrobromide...

Citalopram Hydrobromide

Citalopram tablets should be administered once daily, in the morning or evening, with or without food.

Initial Treatment

Citalopram tablets (citalopram HBr) should be administered at an initial dose of 20 mg once daily, with an increase to a maximum dose of 40 mg/day. Dose increase should usually occur in increments of 20 mg at intervals of no less than one week. Doses above 40 mg/day are not recommended due to the risk of QT prolongation. Additionally, the only study pertinent to dose response for effectiveness did not demonstrate an advantage for the 60 mg/day dose over the 40 mg/day dose.

Special Populations

20 mg/day is the recommended dose for most elderly patients and patients with hepatic impairment, with titration to 40 mg/day only for nonresponding patients. 20 mg/day is the maximum recommended dose for CYP2C19 poor metabolizers or those patients taking cimetidine or another CYP2C19 inhibitor.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment. Citalopram should be used with caution in patients with severe renal impairment.

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to citalopram and other SSRIs or SNRIs, late in the third trimester, have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see PRECAUTIONS). When treating pregnant women with citalopram during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. The physician may consider tapering citalopram in the third trimester.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Systematic evaluation of citalopram in two studies has shown that its antidepressant efficacy is maintained for periods of up to 24 weeks following 6 or 8 weeks of initial treatment (32 weeks total). In one study, patients were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of citalopram (20-60 mg/day) during maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, while in the other study, patients were assigned randomly to continuation of citalopram 20 or 40 mg/day, or placebo, for maintenance treatment. In the latter study, the rates of relapse to depression were similar for the two dose groups (see Clinical Trials under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether the dose of citalopram needed to maintain euthymia is identical to the dose needed to induce remission. If adverse reactions are bothersome, a decrease in dose to 20 mg/day can be considered.

Discontinuation of Treatment with Citalopram

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of citalopram and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported (see PRECAUTIONS). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate.

Switching Patients To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI and initiation of citalopram therapy. Similarly, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping citalopram before starting an MAOI (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS).
Levofloxacin

Levofloxacin

2.1       Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function

The usual dose of levofloxacin tablets are 250 mg, 500 mg, or 750 mg administered orally every 24 hours, as indicated by infection and described in Table 1.

These recommendations apply to patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min. For patients with creatinine clearance <50 mL/min, adjustments to the dosing regimen are required [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].

Table 1: Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function (creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min)
Type of Infection* Dosed Every 24 hours Duration (days)† Nosocomial Pneumonia 750 mg 7 to 14 Community Acquired Pneumonia ‡ 500 mg 7 to 14 Community Acquired Pneumonia§ 750 mg 5 Acute Bacterial Sinusitis 750 mg 5 500 mg 10 to 14 Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis 500 mg 7 Complicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI) 750 mg 7 to 14 Uncomplicated SSSI 500 mg 7 to 10 Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis 500 mg 28 Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)¶ 750 mg 5 Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)# 250 mg 10 Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection 250 mg 3 Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure), adult and pediatric patients > 50 kg Þ,ß Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age Þ,ß 500 mg see Table 2 below (2.2) 60 ß 60 ß Plague, adult and pediatric patients > 50 kgà Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 500 mgsee Table 2 below (2.2) 10 to 1410 to 14
1* Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)].

†Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician.

‡ Due to methicillin-susceptible Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae (including multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Moraxella catarrhalis, Chlamydophila pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, or Mycoplasma pneumoniae [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

§Due to Streptococcus pneumoniae (excluding multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, or Chlamydophila pneumoniae [see Indications and Usage (1.3)].

¶This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis and AP due to E. coli, including cases with concurrent bacteremia.

#This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Enterococcus faecalis, Enterococcus cloacae, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa; and for AP due to E. coli.

ÞDrug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)].

ßThe safety of levofloxacin in adults for durations of therapy beyond 28 days or in pediatric patients for durations beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk.

à    Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis. Higher doses of levofloxacin typically used for treatment of pneumonia can be used for treatment of plague, if clinically indicated.

2.2       Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The dosage in pediatric patients ≥ 6 months of age is described below in Table 2.

Table 2: Dosage in Pediatric Patients ≥ 6 months of age
Type of Infection* Dose Freq. Once every Duration† Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure) ‡,§          Pediatric patients > 50 kg 500 mg 24 hr 60 days§ Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 8 mg/kg (not to exceed 250 mg per dose) 12 hr 60 days§ Plague¶ Pediatric patients > 50 kg 500 mg 24 hr 10 to 14 days Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age 8 mg/kg (not to exceed 250 mg per dose) 12 hr 10 to 14 days
*Due to Bacillus anthracis [see Indications and Usage (1.13)] and Yersinia pestis [see Indications and Usage (1.14)].

†Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician.

‡Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure toaerosolizedB. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrationsachieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)]

§The safety of levofloxacin in pediatric patients for durations of therapy beyond 14 days has not beenstudied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk.

¶Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis.

2.3       Dosage Adjustment in Adults with Renal Impairment

Administer levofloxacin with caution in the presence of renal insufficiency. Careful clinical observation and appropriate laboratory studies should be performed prior to and during therapy since elimination of levofloxacin may be reduced.

No adjustment is necessary for patients with a creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min.

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), adjustment of the dosage regimen is necessary to avoid the accumulation of levofloxacin due to decreased clearance [seeUse in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Table 3 shows how to adjust dose based on creatinine clearance.

Table 3: Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min)
Dosage in Normal Renal Function Every 24 hours Creatinine Clearance 20 to 49 mL/min Creatinine Clearance 10 to 19 mL/min Hemodialysis or Chronic Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD) 750 mg 750 mg every 48 hours 750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours 750 mg initial dose, then 500 mg every 48 hours 500 mg 500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 24 hours 500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours 500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 48 hours 250 mg No dosage adjustment required 250 mg every 48 hours. If treating uncomplicated UTI, then no dosage adjustment is required No information on dosing adjustment is available
2.4       Drug Interaction With Chelation Agents:

Antacids, Sucralfate, Metal Cations, Multivitamins

Levofloxacin tablets should be administered at least two hours before or two hours after antacids containing magnesium, aluminum, as well as sucralfate, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc or didanosine chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [seeDrugInteractions (7.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)]

2.5     Administration Instructions

Food and Levofloxacin Tablets

Levofloxacin tablets can be administered without regard to food.

Hydration for Patients Receiving Levofloxacin Tablets

Adequate hydration of patients receiving oral levofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria and cylindruria have been reported with quinolones [seeAdverse Reactions (6.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].
Risperidone

Risperidone

Table 1. Recommended Daily Dosage by Indication Initial Dose Titration (Increments) Target Dose Effective Dose Range Schizophrenia: adults (2.1) 2 mg 1 to 2 mg 4 to 8 mg 4 to 16 mg Schizophrenia: adolescents (2.2 0.5 mg 0.5 to 1 mg 3 mg 1 to 6 mg Bipolar mania: adults (2.2) 2 to 3 mg 1mg 1 to 6mg 1 to 6 mg Bipolar mania: children and adolescents (2.2) 0.5 mg 0.5 to 1mg 1 to 2.5 mg 1 to 6 mg Irritability in autistic disorder (2.3) 0.25 mg Can increase to 0.5 mg by Day 4: (body weight less than 20 kg) 0.5 mg Can increase to 1 mg by Day 4: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg) After Day 4, at intervals of > 2 weeks: 0.25 mg (body weight less than 20 kg)0.5 mg (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg) 0.5 mg: (body weight less than 20 kg)1 mg: (body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg) 0.5 to 3 mg
Severe Renal and Hepatic Impairment in Adults: use a lower starting dose of 0.5 mg twice daily. May increase to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily at intervals of at one week or longer

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone tablets can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is 2 mg per day. May increase the dose at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 to 2 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4 to 8 mg per day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4 mg to 16 mg per. However, doses above 6 mg per day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once-daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg per day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Adolescents

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1 mg to 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 3 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone tablets, the effectiveness of risperidone tablets 2 mg per day to 8 mg per day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in adult patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Both adult and adolescent patients who respond acutely should generally be maintained on their effective dose beyond the acute episode. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone tablets, the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone tablets, or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

The initial dose range is 2 mg to 3 mg per day. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 mg per day. The effective dose range is 1 mg to 6 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1 mg to 6 mg per day [see Clinical Studies (14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone tablet doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to the recommended target dose of 1mg to 2.5 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 mg and 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 2.5 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer-term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone tablets. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone tablets in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The dosage of risperidone tablets should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone tablets can be administered once daily, or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

For patients with body weight less than 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.25 mg per day. For patients with body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.5 mg per day. After a minimum of four days, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg and 1.0 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. Maintain this dose for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinical response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 2 weeks or greater, in increments of 0.25 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg, or increments of 0.5 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. The effective dose range is 0.5 mg to 3 mg per day. No dosing data are available for children who weigh less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consider gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidone tablets for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily, or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosing in Patients with Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe renal impairment (CLcr < 30 mL/min) or hepatic impairment (10-15 points on Child Pugh System), the initial starting dose is 0.5 mg twice daily. The dose may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg or less, administered twice daily. For doses above 1.5 mg twice daily, increase in intervals of one week or greater [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6 and8.7)].

2.5 Dose Adjustments for Specific Drug Interactions

When risperidone tablets are co-administered with enzyme inducers (e.g., carbamazepine), the dose of risperidone tablets should be increased up to double the patient's usual dose. It may be necessary to decrease the risperidone tablets dose when enzyme inducers such as carbamazepine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)]. Similar effect may be expected with co-administration of risperidone tablets with other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin, and phenobarbital).

When fluoxetine or paroxetine is co-administered with risperidone tablets, the dose of risperidone tablets should be reduced. The risperidone tablets dose should not exceed 8 mg per day in adults when co-administered with these drugs. When initiating therapy, risperidone tablets should be titrated slowly. It may be necessary to increase the risperidone tablets dose when enzyme inhibitors such as fluoxetine or paroxetine are discontinued [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].
Sinus Congestion Pe

Sinus Congestion Pe

adults and children 12 years of age and older: take 1 tablet every 4 hours, with a full glass of water, while symptoms persist. Do not exceed 6 tablets in 24 hours. children under 12 years of age: do not use
Sudogest Nasal Deconges...

Sudogest Nasal Decongestant

adults and children 12 years and over
• take 2 tablets every 4 to 6 hours • do not take more than 8 tablets in 24 hours
children ages 6 to 12 years
• take 1 tablet every 4 to 6 hours • do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours
children under 6 years

do not use this product in children under 6 years of age
Acid Reducer

Acid Reducer

adults and children 12 years and over: to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water 30 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn can be used up to twice daily (do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours) children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Amlodipine Besylate

Amlodipine Besylate

2.1 Adults

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine besylate tablets is 5 mg once daily with a maximum dose of 10 mg once daily.

Small, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine besylate tablets to other antihypertensive therapy.

Adjust dosage according to each patient’s need. In general, titration should proceed over 7 to 14 days so that the physician can fully assess the patient’s response to each dose level. Titration may proceed more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently.

The recommended dose for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 to 10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect [see ADVERSE REACTIONS (6)].

The recommended dose range for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 to 10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.4)].

2.2 Children

The effective antihypertensive oral dose in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.4), CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].
Nicorelief

Nicorelief

• if you are under 18 years of age, ask a doctor before use • before using this product, read the enclosed User’s Guide for complete directions and other important information • begin using the gum on your quit day • if you smoke your first cigarette more than 30 minutes after waking up, use Nicotine Polacrilex Gum, 2 mg • if you smoke your first cigarette within 30 minutes of waking up, use Nicotine Polacrilex Gum, 4 mg according to the following 12 week schedule:
Weeks 1 to 6

Weeks 7 to 9

Weeks 10 to 12

1 piece every

1 to 2 hours

1 piece every

2 to 4 hours

1 piece every

4 to 8 hours
• nicotine gum is a medicine and must be used a certain way to get the best results • chew the gum slowly until it tingles. Then park it between your cheek and gum. When the tingle is gone, begin chewing again, until the tingle returns. • repeat this process until most of the tingle is gone (about 30 minutes) • do not eat or drink for 15 minutes before chewing the nicotine gum, or while chewing a piece • to improve your chances of quitting, use at least 9 pieces per day for the first 6 weeks • if you experience strong or frequent cravings, you may use a second piece within the hour. However, do not continuously use one piece after another since this may cause you hiccups, heartburn, nausea or other side effects. • do not use more than 24 pieces a day • it is important to complete treatment. If you feel you need to use the gum for a longer period to keep from smoking, talk to your health care provider.
Rabeprazole Sodium

Rabeprazole Sodium

2.1 Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily for four to eight weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.1)]. For those patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8-week course of rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets may be considered.

2.2 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily [see Indications and Usage (1.2)].

2.3 Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily for 4 weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.3)]. If symptoms do not resolve completely after 4 weeks, an additional course of treatment may be considered. The recommended adolescent dosing is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily for 8 weeks.

2.4 Healing of Duodenal Ulcers in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one rabeprazole sodium 20 mg delayed-release tablet to be taken once daily after the morning meal for a period up to four weeks [see Indications and Usage (1.5)]. Most patients with duodenal ulcer heal within four weeks. A few patients may require additional therapy to achieve healing.

2.5 Helicobacter pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence in Adults

TABLE 1
THREE DRUG REGIMEN a
All three medications should be taken twice daily with the morning and evening meals.

aIt is important that patients comply with the full 7-day regimen [see Clinical Studies (14.5)].
Rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablet 20 mg Twice Daily for 7 Days Amoxicillin 1000 mg Twice Daily for 7 Days Clarithromycin 500 mg Twice Daily for 7 Days
2.6 Treatment of Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions, Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome in Adults

The dosage of rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets in patients with pathologic hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Some patients may require divided doses. Doses up to 100 mg QD and 60 mg BID have been administered. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with rabeprazole sodium delayed-release tablets for up to one year.

2.7 Short-term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adolescent Patients 12 Years of Age and Older

The recommended oral dose for adolescents 12 years of age and older is one 20 mg delayed-release tablet once daily for up to 8 weeks [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Studies (14.7)].

2.9 Elderly, Renal and Hepatic Impaired Patients

No dosage adjustment is necessary in elderly patients, in patients with renal disease or in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Administration of rabeprazole to patients with mild to moderate liver impairment resulted in increased exposure and decreased elimination. Due to the lack of clinical data on rabeprazole in patients with severe hepatic impairment, caution should be exercised in those patients.

2.10 Administration Recommendations

TABLE 2
Administration Recommendations Formulation Population Instructions Delayed-release tablet Adults and adolescents 12 years of age and older Swallow tablets whole. Do not chew, crush or split tablets.Tablets can be taken with or without food.
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1.      Mild to Moderate Alzheimer’s Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2.     Severe Alzheimer’s Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets has been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at doses of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3.      Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer’s disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Nifedipine

Nifedipine

do not use more than directed drink a full glass of water with each dose adults and children 12 years and over take 2 tablets every 6 hours do not take more than 8 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Antacid Extra Strength

Antacid Extra Strength

chew 2 - 4 tablets as symptoms occur, or as directed by a doctor
Duloxetine Hydrochlorid...

Duloxetine Hydrochloride

Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole and should not be chewed or crushed, nor should the capsule be opened and its contents sprinkled on food or mixed with liquids. All of these might affect the enteric coating. Duloxetine delayed-release capsules can be given without regard to meals.

2.1 Initial Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder — Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be administered at a total dose of 40 mg/day (given as 20 mg twice daily) to 60 mg/day (given either once daily or as 30 mg twice daily). For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg/day dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer any additional benefits. The safety of doses above 120 mg/day has not been adequately evaluated [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Generalized Anxiety Disorder — For most patients, the recommended starting dose for duloxetine delayed-release capsules is 60 mg administered once daily. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg once daily dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit. Nevertheless, if a decision is made to increase the dose beyond 60 mg once daily, dose increases should be in increments of 30 mg once daily. The safety of doses above 120 mg once daily has not been adequately evaluated [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain — The recommended dose for duloxetine delayed-release capsules is 60 mg administered once daily. There is no evidence that doses higher than 60 mg confer additional significant benefit and the higher dose is clearly less well tolerated [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. For patients for whom tolerability is a concern, a lower starting dose may be considered.

Since diabetes is frequently complicated by renal disease, a lower starting dose and gradual increase in dose should be considered for patients with renal impairment [see Dosage and Administration (2.3), Use in Specific Populations (8.10), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain — The recommended dose for duloxetine delayed-release capsules is 60 mg once daily. Dosing may be started at 30 mg for one week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. There is no evidence that higher doses confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.5)].

2.2 Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder — It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in MDD was demonstrated with duloxetine delayed-release capsules as monotherapy. Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be administered at a total dose of 60 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Generalized Anxiety Disorder — It is generally agreed that episodes of generalized anxiety disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in GAD was demonstrated with duloxetine delayed-release capsules as monotherapy. Duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be administered in a dose range of 60-120 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain — As the progression of diabetic peripheral neuropathy is highly variable and management of pain is empirical, the effectiveness of duloxetine delayed-release capsules must be assessed individually. Efficacy beyond 12 weeks has not been systematically studied in placebo-controlled trials.

Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain — The efficacy of duloxetine delayed-release capsules has not been established in placebo-controlled studies beyond 13 weeks.

2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

Hepatic Insufficiency — It is recommended that duloxetine delayed-release capsules should ordinarily not be administered to patients with any hepatic insufficiency [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14) and Use in Specific Populations (8.9)].

Severe Renal Impairment — Duloxetine delayed-release capsules are not recommended for patients with end-stage renal disease or severe renal impairment (estimated creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14) and Use in Specific Populations (8.10)].

Elderly Patients — No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any drug, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage in elderly patients, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

Pregnant Women — There are no adequate and well-controlled studies in pregnant women; therefore, duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be used during pregnancy only if the potential benefit justifies the potential risk to the fetus [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Nursing Mothers — Because the safety of duloxetine in infants is not known, nursing while on duloxetine delayed-release capsules is not recommended [see Use in Specific Populations (8.3)].

2.4 Discontinuing Duloxetine Delayed-Release Capsules

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of duloxetine delayed-release capsules and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with duloxetine delayed-release capsules. Conversely, at least 5 days should be allowed after stopping duloxetine delayed-release capsules before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.6 Use of Duloxetine Delayed-Release Capsules with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start duloxetine delayed-release capsules in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving duloxetine delayed-release capsule therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, duloxetine delayed-release capsules should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 5 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with duloxetine delayed-release capsules may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with duloxetine delayed-release capsules is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].
All-nite Cold And Flu

All-nite Cold And Flu

take only as directed – see Liver warning use dose cup do not exceed 4 doses per 24 hours adults and children 12 years and over 30 mL (2 TBSP) every 6 hours
children under 12 years

children under 4 years

ask a doctor

do not use
when using other Daytime or Nighttime products, carefully read each label to insure correct dosing each 30 mL dose cup contains: sodium content: 38 mg
Lisinopril

Lisinopril

2.1 Hypertension

Initial Therapy in adults: The recommended initial dose is 10 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 20 mg to 40 mg per day administered in a single daily dose. Doses up to 80 mg have been used but do not appear to give greater effect.

Use with diuretics in adults

If blood pressure is not controlled with lisinopril tablets alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added (e.g., hydrochlorothiazide, 12.5 mg). After the addition of a diuretic, it may be possible to reduce the dose of lisinopril tablets.

The recommended starting dose in adult patients with hypertension taking diuretics is 5 mg once per day.

Pediatric Patients 6 years of age and older with hypertension

For pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate > 30 mL/min/1.73m2, the recommended starting dose is 0.07 mg per kg once daily (up to 5 mg total). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response up to a maximum of 0.61 mg per kg (up to 40 mg) once daily. Doses above 0.61 mg per kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lisinopril tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate < 30 mL/min/1.73m2 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)and Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose for lisinopril tablets, when used with diuretics and (usually) digitalis as adjunctive therapy for systolic heart failure, is 5 mg once daily. The recommended starting dose in these patients with hyponatremia (serum sodium < 130 mEq/L) is 2.5 mg once daily. Increase as tolerated to a maximum of 40 mg once daily.

Diuretic dose may need to be adjusted to help minimize hypovolemia, which may contribute to hypotension [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4), and Drug Interactions (7.1)]. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of lisinopril tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

2.3 Reduction of Mortality in Acute Myocardial Infarction

In hemodynamically stable patients within 24 hours of the onset of symptoms of acute myocardial infarction, give lisinopril tablets 5 mg orally, followed by 5 mg after 24 hours, 10 mg after 48 hours and then 10 mg once daily. Dosing should continue for at least six weeks.

Initiate therapy with 2.5 mg in patients with a low systolic blood pressure (≤ 120 mmHg and > 100 mm Hg) during the first 3 days after the infarct [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)]. If hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure ≤ 100 mmHg) a daily maintenance dose of 5 mg may be given with temporary reductions to 2.5 mg if needed. If prolonged hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure < 90 mmHg for more than 1 hour) lisinopril tablets should be withdrawn.

2.4 Dose in Patients with Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment of lisinopril tablets is required in patients with creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min. In patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 10 mL/min and ≤ 30 mL/min, reduce the initial dose of lisinopril tablets to half of the usual recommended dose i.e., hypertension, 5 mg; systolic heart failure, 2.5 mg and acute MI, 2.5 mg. Up titrate as tolerated to a maximum of 40 mg daily. For patients on hemodialysis or creatinine clearance < 10 mL/min, the recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg once daily [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Sudogest

Sudogest

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION:

Directions – take every 4-6 hours -Do not take more than 4 does in 24 hours

Adults and children 12 years and over – 2 tablets

Children 6 to under 12 years – 1 tablet

Children under 6 years – do not use
Ibuprofen

Ibuprofen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of IBU tabletsand other treatment options before deciding to use IBU tablets. Usethe lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent withindividual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with IBU tablets, thedose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’sneeds.Do not exceed 3200 mg total daily dose. If gastrointestinal complaintsoccur, administer IBU tablets with meals or milk.

Rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, including flare-ups ofchronic disease:

Suggested Dosage: 1200 mg-3200 mg daily (400 mg, 600 mg or800 mg tid or qid). Individual patients may show a better responseto 3200 mg daily, as compared with 2400 mg, although in well-controlledclinical trials patients on 3200 mg did not show a better meanresponse in terms of efficacy. Therefore, when treating patients with3200 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinicalbenefits to offset potential increased risk.The dose should be tailored to each patient, and may be loweredor raised depending on the severity of symptoms either at time of initiatingdrug therapy or as the patient responds or fails to respond.In general, patients with rheumatoid arthritis seem to require higherdoses of IBU tablets than do patients with osteoarthritis.

The smallest dose of IBU tablets that yields acceptable controlshould be employed. A linear blood level dose-response relationshipexists with single doses up to 800 mg (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYfor effects of food on rate of absorption).

The availability of three tablet strengths facilitates dosage adjustment.In chronic conditions, a therapeutic response to therapy with IBU tablets is sometimes seen in a few days to a week but most often isobserved by two weeks. After a satisfactory response has beenachieved, the patient’s dose should be reviewed and adjusted asrequired.

Mild to moderate pain:

400 mg every 4 to 6 hours as necessaryfor relief of pain.In controlled analgesic clinical trials, doses of Ibuprofen tabletsgreater than 400 mg were no more effective than the 400 mg dose.

Dysmenorrhea:

For the treatment of dysmenorrhea, beginningwith the earliest onset of such pain, IBU tablets should be given in adose of 400 mg every 4 hours as necessary for the relief of pain.
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, multiple-dose studies with ISDN and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for isosorbide dinitrate tablets must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release ISDN, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long.

As also noted under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, the effects of the second and later doses have been smaller and shorter-lasting than the effects of the first.

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with isosorbide dinitrate tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

As with all titratable drugs, it is important to administer the minimum dose which produces the desired clinical effect. The usual starting dose of isosorbide dinitrate is 5 mg to 20 mg, two or three times daily. For maintenance therapy, 10 mg to 40 mg, two or three times daily is recommended. Some patients may require higher doses. A daily dose-free interval of at least 14 hours is advisable to minimize tolerance. The optimal interval will vary with the individual patient, dose and regimen.
Atorvastatin Calcium

Atorvastatin Calcium

do not give more than directed (see overdose warning) this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use find the right dose on chart below. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise, use age. chew before swallowing; this product will soften in mouth for ease of chewing repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms last do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor
Weight (lb)

Age (yr)

Dose (tablets)*

Under 48

Under 6

Ask a doctor

48-59

6-8

2

60-71

9-10

2 1/2

72-95

11

3

*or as directed by a doctor
Losartan Potassium And ...

Losartan Potassium And Hydrochlorothiazide

Do not exceed 6 doses in any 24 hour period age dose Adults and children 12 years and over 2 TSP (teaspoonful) every 4 hours children under 12 years do not use
Childrens Mapap

Childrens Mapap

do not give more than directed (see overdose warning) this product does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use find the right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise, use age. chew before swallowing; this product will soften in mouth for ease of chewing repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms last do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor Weight (lb) Age (yr) Tablets Under 24 Under 2 Ask a doctor 24-35 2-3 2 36-47 4-5 3 48-59 6-8 4 60-71 9-10 5 72-95 11 6
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age).

Metformin should be given in divided doses with meals and should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults

In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

Pediatrics

The usual starting dose of metformin tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer from Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin HCl monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin HCl tablets at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin HCl and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, CLINICAL STUDIES). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin HCl and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.)

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin.

Concomitant Metformin and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin therapy. Metformin therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin is not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin is not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Vimovo

Vimovo

clean affected area apply small amount of this product on the area 1-3 times daily If bandaged, let dry first may be covered with a sterile bandage
Cetrizine Hydrochloride...

Cetrizine Hydrochloride

use only with enclosed dosing cup adults and children 6 years and over 1 tsp (teaspoonful) (5mL) or 2 tsp (teaspoonfuls) (10mL) once daily depending upon severity of symptoms; do not take more than 2tsp (teaspoonfuls) (10mL) in 24 hours adults 65 years and over 1 tsp (teaspoonful) (5mL) once daily; do not take more than 1 tsp (teaspoonful) (5mL) in 24 hours children 2 to under 6 years of age ½ tsp (teaspoonful) (2.5mL) once daily. If needed, dose can be increased to a maximum of 1 tsp (teaspoonful) (5mL) once daily or ½ tsp(teaspoonful) (2.5mL) every 12 hours. Do not give more than 1 tsp (teaspoonful) (5mL) in 24 hours children under 2 years of age ask a doctor consumers with liver or kidney disease ask a doctor
Acetaminophen

Acetaminophen

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. While the usual daily dosages given below will meet the needs of most patients, there will be some who may require higher doses. In such cases dosage should be increased cautiously to avoid adverse effects.
ADULTS: USUAL DAILY DOSE: Management of Anxiety Disorders and relief of Symptoms of Anxiety. Depending on severity of symptoms - 2 mg to 10 mg, 2 to 4 times daily Symptomatic Relief in Acute Alcohol Withdrawal. 10 mg, 3 or 4 times during the first 24 hours, reducing to 5 mg, 3 or 4 times daily as needed Adjunctively for Relief of Skeletal Muscle Spasm. 2 mg to 10 mg, 3 or 4 times daily Adjunctively in Convulsive Disorders. 2 mg to 10 mg, 2 to 4 times daily Geriatric Patients, or in the presence of debilitating disease. 2 mg to 2.5 mg, 1 or 2 times daily initially; increase gradually as needed and tolerated PEDIATRIC PATIENTS: Because of varied responses to CNS-acting drugs, initiate therapy with lowest dose and increase as required. Not for use in children under 6 months. 1 mg to 2.5 mg, 3 or 4 times daily initially; increase gradually as needed and tolerated
Heartburn Relief Origin...

Heartburn Relief Original Strength

• adults and children 12 years and over: • to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water. Do not chew. • to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn • do not use more than 2 tablets in 24 hours • children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Loperamide Hydrochlorid...

Loperamide Hydrochloride

• drink plenty of clear fluids to help prevent dehydration caused by diarrhea • find right dose on chart. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise use age. • shake well before using • only use attached measuring cup to dose product
adults and children

12 years and over

30 mL (6 tsp) after the first loose stool; 15 mL (3 tsp) after each subsequent loose stool; but no more than 60 mL (12 tsp) in 24 hours

children 9-11 years

(60-95 lbs)

15 mL (3 tsp) after the first loose stool; 7.5 mL (1 1/2 tsp) after each subsequent loose stool; but no more than 45 mL (9 tsp) in 24 hours

children 6-8 years

(48-59 lbs)

15 mL (3 tsp) after the first loose stool; 7.5 mL (1 1/2 tsp) after each subsequent loose stool; but no more than 30 mL (6 tsp) in 24 hours

children under

6 years

(up to 47 lbs)

ask a doctor
Major Heartburn Relief ...

Major Heartburn Relief Maximum Strength

• adults and children 12 years and over: • to relieve symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water. Do not chew. • to prevent symptoms, swallow 1 tablet with a glass of water at any time from 10 to 60 minutes before eating food or drinking beverages that cause heartburn • do not use more than 2 tablets in 24 hours • children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Moxifloxacin

Moxifloxacin

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients

The dose of moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablet is 400 mg (orally) once every 24 hours. The duration of therapy depends on the type of infection as described in Table 1.

Table 1: Dosage and Duration of Therapy in Adult Patients
Type of Infectiona Dose Every 24 hours Durationb (days) Acute Bacterial Sinusitis (1.1) 400 mg 10 Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis (1.2) 400 mg 5 Community Acquired Pneumonia 400 mg 7 to 14 Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI ) (1.4) 400 mg 7 Complicated SSSI (1.5) 400 mg 7 to 21 Complicated Intra-Abdominal Infections (1.6) 400 mg 5 to 14
a Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)

b Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician

Intravenous formulation is indicated when it offers a route of administration advantageous to the patient (for example, patient cannot tolerate an oral dosage form). When switching from intravenous to oral formulation, no dosage adjustment is necessary. Patients whose therapy is started with moxifloxacin hydrochloride IV may be switched to moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets when clinically indicated at the discretion of the physician.

2.2 Drug interactions with Multivalent Cations

Oral doses of moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets should be administered at least 4 hours before or 8 hours after products containing magnesium, aluminum, iron or zinc, including antacids, sucralfate, multivitamins and VIDEX® (didanosine) chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [see Drug Interactions (7.1 ) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Administration Instructions

Moxifloxacin Hydrochloride Film-Coated Tablets

Moxifloxacin hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food, drink fluids liberally.
Purixan Suspension

Purixan Suspension

Other dosage forms of doxycycline may be more appropriate to meet some of the dosing recommendations listed below.

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Adults:

The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours) followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg/day.

In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For children above eight years of age:

The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 100 pounds or less is 2 mg/lb of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 1 mg/lb of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses, on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 2 mg/lb of body weight may be used. For children over 100 lb the usual adult dose should be used.

The therapeutic antibacterial serum activity will usually persist for 24 hours following recommended dosage.

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS).

If gastric irritation occurs, it is recommended that doxycycline be given with food or milk. The absorption of doxycycline is not markedly influenced by simultaneous ingestion of food or milk.

Studies to date have indicated that administration of doxycycline at the usual recommended doses does not lead to excessive accumulation of the antibiotic in patients with renal impairment.

Uncomplicated gonococcal infections in adults (except anorectal infections in men):

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose. The dose may be administered with food, including milk or carbonated beverage, as required.

Uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infection in adults caused by Chlamydia trachomatis:

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days.

Nongonococcal urethritis (NGU) caused by C. trachomatis and U. urealyticum:

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days.

Syphilis - early:

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg by mouth twice a day for 2 weeks.

Syphilis of more than one year's duration:

Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 4 weeks.

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by N. gonorrhoeae:

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by C. trachomatis:

100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days.

For the prophylaxis of malaria:

For adults, the recommended dose is 100 mg daily. For children over 8 years of age, the recommended dose is 2 mg/kg given once daily up to the adult dose. Prophylaxis should begin 1 to 2 days before travel to the malarious area. Prophylaxis should be continued daily during travel in the malarious area and for 4 weeks after the traveler leaves the malarious area.

Inhalational anthrax (post-exposure):

ADULTS: 100 mg of doxycycline, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days.

CHILDREN: weighing less than 100 lb (45 kg); 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days. Children weighing 100 lb or more should receive the adult dose.
Analgesic Creme Rub

Analgesic Creme Rub

Adults and children 12 years of age an older;

Apply generously to affected area not more than 3 to 4 times daily. Massage into painful area until thoroughly absorbed into the skin. Repeat as nessary but not more than 4 times daily.

Children under 12 years of age : consult a doctor.
Nicorelief

Nicorelief

• if you are under 18 years of age, ask a doctor before use • before using this product, read the enclosed User’s Guide for complete directions and other important information • begin using the gum on your quit day • if you smoke your first cigarette more than 30 minutes after waking up, use Nicotine Polacrilex Gum, 2 mg • if you smoke your first cigarette within 30 minutes of waking up, use Nicotine Polacrilex Gum, 4 mg according to the following 12 week schedule:
Weeks 1 to 6

Weeks 7 to 9

Weeks 10 to 12

1 piece every

1 to 2 hours

1 piece every

2 to 4 hours

1 piece every

4 to 8 hours
• nicotine gum is a medicine and must be used a certain way to get the best results • chew the gum slowly until it tingles. Then park it between your cheek and gum. When the tingle is gone, begin chewing again, until the tingle returns. • repeat this process until most of the tingle is gone (about 30 minutes) • do not eat or drink for 15 minutes before chewing the nicotine gum, or while chewing a piece • to improve your chances of quitting, use at least 9 pieces per day for the first 6 weeks • if you experience strong or frequent cravings, you may use a second piece within the hour. However, do not continuously use one piece after another since this may cause you hiccups, heartburn, nausea or other side effects. • do not use more than 24 pieces a day • it is important to complete treatment. If you feel you need to use the gum for a longer period to keep from smoking, talk to your health care provider.
Losartan Potassium

Losartan Potassium

Adult Hypertensive Patients

Losartan potassium tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents, and with or without food.

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan potassium tablets is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg used in patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension ─ Volume-Depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS, General). Losartan potassium tablets can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg.

If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response. The effect of losartan is substantially present within one week but in some studies the maximal effect occurred in 3-6 weeks (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension).

If blood pressure is not controlled by losartan potassium tablets alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension).

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or for patients with renal impairment, including patients on dialysis.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥6 years of age

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.7 mg/kg once daily (up to 50 mg total) administered as a tablet or a suspension (see Preparation of Suspension). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 1.4 mg/kg (or in excess of 100 mg) daily have not been studied in pediatric patients (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations and Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, and WARNINGS, Hypotension ─ Volume-Depleted Patients.)

Losartan potassium tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients <6 years of age or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, and PRECAUTIONS).

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL suspension)

Add 10 mL of Purified Water USP to an 8 ounce (240 mL) amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 50 mg losartan potassium tablets. Immediately shake for at least 2 minutes. Let the concentrate stand for 1 hour and then shake for 1 minute to disperse the tablet contents. Separately prepare a 50/50 volumetric mixture of Ora-PlusTM1 and Ora-Sweet SFTM1. Add 190 mL of the 50/50 Ora-PlusTM/Ora-Sweet SFTM mixture to the tablet and water slurry in the PET bottle and shake for 1 minute to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2-8°C (36-46°F) and can be stored for up to 4 weeks. Shake the suspension prior to each use and return promptly to the refrigerator.

__________________________________________

1 Trademark of Paddock Laboratories, Inc.

Hypertensive Patients with Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

The usual starting dose is 50 mg of losartan potassium tablets once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg daily should be added and/or the dose of losartan potassium tablets should be increased to 100 mg once daily followed by an increase in hydrochlorothiazide to 25 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Reduction in the Risk of Stroke).

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The usual starting dose is 50 mg once daily. The dose should be increased to 100 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients). Losartan potassium tablets may be administered with insulin and other commonly used hypoglycemic agents (e.g., sulfonylureas, glitazones and glucosidase inhibitors).
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride 5 Mg

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1. Mild to Moderate Alzheimer's Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2. Moderate to Severe Alzheimer's Disease

Donepezil hydrochloridehas been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3. Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer’s disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Montelukast Sodium

Montelukast Sodium

2.1 Asthma

            Montelukast sodium should be taken once daily in the evening. The following doses are recommended:

            For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10-mg tablet.

            For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5-mg chewable tablet.

            For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4-mg chewable tablet or one packet of       4-mg oral granules.

            For pediatric patients 12 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4-mg oral granules.

            Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients less than 12 months of age with asthma have not been established.

            There have been no clinical trials in patients with asthma to evaluate the relative efficacy of morning versus evening dosing. The pharmacokinetics of montelukast are similar whether dosed in the morning or evening. Efficacy has been demonstrated for asthma when montelukast was administered in the evening without regard to time of food ingestion.

2.2 Exercise-Induced Bronchoconstriction (EIB) in Patients 15 Years of Age and Older

       For prevention of EIB, a single 10 mg dose of montelukast should be taken at least 2 hours before exercise. An additional dose of montelukast should not be taken within 24 hours of a previous dose. Patients already taking montelukast sodium daily for another indication (including chronic asthma) should not take an additional dose to prevent EIB. All patients should have available for rescue a short-acting β‑agonist. Safety and effectiveness in patients younger than 15 years of age have not been established. Daily administration of montelukast sodium for the chronic treatment of asthma has not been established to prevent acute episodes of EIB.

Pediatric use information for patients ages 6 to 14 years of age for acute prevention of exercise-induced bronchoconstriction (EIB) is approved for Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp's montelukast tablet products. However, due to Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp's marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

2.3 Allergic Rhinitis

            For allergic rhinitis, montelukast sodium should be taken once daily. Efficacy was demonstrated for seasonal allergic rhinitis when montelukast was administered in the morning or the evening without regard to time of food ingestion. The time of administration may be individualized to suit patient needs.

            The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of seasonal allergic rhinitis are recommended:

            For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10-mg tablet.

            For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5-mg chewable tablet.

            For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4-mg chewable tablet or one packet of        4-mg oral granules.

            Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 2 years of age with seasonal allergic rhinitis have not been established.

            The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of perennial allergic rhinitis are recommended:

            For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10-mg tablet.

            For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5-mg chewable tablet.

            For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4-mg chewable tablet or one packet of       4-mg oral granules.

            For pediatric patients 6 to 23 months of age: one packet of 4-mg oral granules.

            Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 6 months of age with perennial allergic rhinitis have not been established.

2.4 Asthma and Allergic Rhinitis

            Patients with both asthma and allergic rhinitis should take only one montelukast sodium dose daily in the evening.

2.5 Instructions for Administration of Oral Granules

            Montelukast sodium 4-mg oral granules can be administered either directly in the mouth, dissolved in 1 teaspoonful (5 mL) of cold or room temperature baby formula or breast milk, or mixed with a spoonful of cold or room temperature soft foods; based on stability studies, only applesauce, carrots, rice, or ice cream should be used. The packet should not be opened until ready to use. After opening the packet, the full dose (with or without mixing with baby formula, breast milk, or food) must be administered within 15 minutes. If mixed with baby formula, breast milk, or food, montelukast sodium oral granules must not be stored for future use. Discard any unused portion. Montelukast sodium oral granules are not intended to be dissolved in any liquid other than baby formula or breast milk for administration. However, liquids may be taken subsequent to administration. Montelukast sodium oral granules can be administered without regard to the time of meals.
Veil Fluid Makeup Chest...

Veil Fluid Makeup Chestnut Spf 15

The dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets should be individualized.

2.1 Dosage in Adults

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient. The recommended initial dose is 5 mg for women and either 5 or 10 mg for men, taken only once per night immediately before bedtime with at least 7-8 hours remaining before the planned time of awakening. If the 5 mg dose is not effective, the dose can be increased to 10 mg. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels following use of the 10 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. The total dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets should not exceed 10 mg once daily immediately before bedtime.

The recommended initial doses for women and men are different because zolpidem clearance is lower in women.

2.2 Special Populations

Elderly or debilitated patients may be especially sensitive to the effects of zolpidem tartrate. Patients with hepatic insufficiency do not clear the drug as rapidly as normal subjects. The recommended dose of zolpidem tartrate in both of these patient populations is 5 mg once daily immediately before bedtime [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1); Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

2.3 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustment may be necessary when zolpidem tartrate tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.4 Administration

The effect of zolpidem tartrate tablets may be slowed by ingestion with or immediately after a meal.
Ursodiol

Ursodiol

There is considerable variation from patient to patient in the amount of medication required for treatment. As with all antipsychotic drugs, dosage should be individualized according to the needs and response of each patient. Dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, should be carried out as rapidly as practicable to achieve optimum therapeutic control.

To determine the initial dosage, consideration should be given to the patient’s age, severity of illness, previous response to other antipsychotic drugs, and any concomitant medication or disease state. Children, debilitated or geriatric patients, as well as those with a history of adverse reactions to antipsychotic drugs, may require less haloperidol. The optimal response in such patients is usually obtained with more gradual dosage adjustments and at lower dosage levels, as recommended below.

Clinical experience suggests the following recommendations:

Oral Administration

Initial Dosage Range

Adults
Moderate Symptomatology 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Severe Symptomatology 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.
To achieve prompt control, higher doses may be required in some cases.
Geriatric or Debilitated Patients 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Chronic or Resistant Patients 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Patients who remain severely disturbed or inadequately controlled may require dosage adjustment. Daily dosages up to 100 mg may be necessary in some cases to achieve an optimal response. Infrequently, haloperidol has been used in doses above 100 mg for severely resistant patients; however, the limited clinical usage has not demonstrated the safety of prolonged administration of such doses.
Children

The following recommendations apply to children between the ages of 3 and 12 years (weight range 15 to 40 kg). Haloperidol is not intended for children under 3 years old. Therapy should begin at the lowest dose possible (0.5 mg per day). If required, the dose should be increased by an increment of 0.5 mg at 5 to 7 day intervals until the desired therapeutic effect is obtained. (See chart below.)

The total dose may be divided, to be given b.i.d. or t.i.d.
Psychotic Disorders 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.15 mg/kg/day Non-Psychotic Behavior Disorders and Tourette’s Disorder 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.075 mg/kg/day Severely disturbed psychotic children may require higher doses. In severely disturbed, non-psychotic children or in hyperactive children with accompanying conduct disorders, who have failed to respond to psychotherapy or medications other than antipsychotics, it should be noted that since these behaviors may be short-lived, short-term administration of haloperidol may suffice. There is no evidence establishing a maximum effective dosage. There is little evidence that behavior improvement is further enhanced in dosages beyond 6 mg per day.
Maintenance Dosage

Upon achieving a satisfactory therapeutic response, dosage should then be gradually reduced to the lowest effective maintenance level.

Switchover Procedure

The oral form should supplant the injectable as soon as practicable. In the absence of bioavailability studies establishing bioequivalence between these two dosage forms, the following guidelines for dosage are suggested. For an initial approximation of the total daily dose required, the parenteral dose administered in the preceding 24 hours may be used. Since this dose is only an initial estimate, it is recommended that careful monitoring of clinical signs and symptoms, including clinical efficacy, sedation, and adverse effects, be carried out periodically for the first several days following the initiation of switchover. In this way, dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, can be quickly accomplished. Depending on the patient’s clinical status, the first oral dose should be given within 12-24 hours following the last parenteral dose.
Quetiapine Fumarate

Quetiapine Fumarate

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Quetiapine fumarate tablets can be taken with or without food

2.2 Recommended Dosing

The recommended initial dose, titration, dose range and maximum quetiapine fumarate tablets dose for each approved indication is displayed in Table 1. After initial dosing, adjustments can be made upwards or downwards, if necessary, depending upon the clinical response and tolerability of the patient [see Clinical Studies (14.1 and 14.2)].

Table 1: Recommended Dosing for Quetiapine Fumarate Tablets
Indication Initial Dose and Titration Recommended Dose Maximum Dose Schizophrenia-Adults Day 1: 25 mg twice daily. Increase in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg divided two or three times on Days 2 and 3 to range of 300 to 400 mg by Day 4. Further adjustments can be made in increments of 25 to 50 mg twice a day, in intervals of not less than 2 days. 150 to 750 mg/day 750 mg/day Schizophrenia- Adolescents (13 to 17 years) Day 1: 25 mg twice daily. Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg. Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 800 mg/day. Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily. 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day Schizophrenia-Maintenance N/A1 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day Bipolar Mania- Adults Monotherapy or as an adjunct to lithium or divalproex Day 1: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg. Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg. Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.Further dosage adjustments up to 800 mg/day by Day 6 should be in increments of no greater than 200 mg/day. 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day Bipolar Mania- Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years), Monotherapy Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg. Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 600 mg/day. Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily. 400 to 600 mg/day 600 mg/day Bipolar Depression- Adults Administer once daily at bedtime. Day 1: 50 mg Day 2: 100 mg Day 3: 200 mg Day 4: 300 mg 300 mg/day 300 mg/day Bipolar I Disorder Maintenance Therapy- Adults Administer twice daily totaling 400-800 mg/day as adjunct to lithium or divalproex. Generally, in the maintenance phase, patients continued on the same dose on which they were stabilized. 400 to 800 mg/day 800 mg/day
1 N/A Not applicable

Maintenance Treatment for Schizophrenia and Bipolar I Disorder

Maintenance Treatment—Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need formaintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

2.3 Dose Modifications in Elderly Patients

Consideration should be given to a slower rate of dose titration and a lower target dose in the elderly and in patients who are debilitated or who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Elderly patients should be started on quetiapine fumarate tablets 50 mg/day and the dose can be increased in increments of 50 mg/day depending on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient.

2.4 Dose Modifications in Hepatically Impaired Patients

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be reduced to one sixth of original dose when co-medicated with a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor (e.g. ketoconazole, itraconazole, indinavir, ritonavir, nefazodone, etc.). When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be increased by 6 fold [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions(7.1)].

2.5 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be reduced to one sixth of original dose when co-medicated with a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, indinavir, ritonavir, nefazodone, etc.). When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be increased by 6 fold [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.6 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inducers

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be increased up to 5 fold of the original dose when used in combination with a chronic treatment (e.g., greater than 7 to 14 days) of a potent CYP3A4 inducer (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, rifampin, avasimibe, St. John’s wort etc.). The dose should be titrated based on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient. When the CYP3A4 inducer is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be reduced to the original level within 7 to 14 days [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) and Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.7 Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address re-initiation of treatment, it is recommended that when restarting therapy of patients who have been off quetiapine fumarate tablets for more than one week, the initial dosing schedule should be followed. When restarting patients who have been off quetiapine fumarate tablets for less than one week, gradual dose escalation may not be required and the maintenance dose may be reinitiated.

2.8 Switching from Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from antipsychotics to quetiapine fumarate tablets, or concerning concomitant administration with antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching patients with schizophrenia from depot antipsychotics, if medically appropriate, initiate quetiapine fumarate tablets therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.
Major Ultra Strength Ga...

Major Ultra Strength Gas Relief

swallow one or two softgels as needed after a meal do not exceed two softgels per day except under the advice and supervision of a physician
Major Prep Hemorrhoidal...

Major Prep Hemorrhoidal

Distributed By

Major Pharmaceuticals

31778 Enterprise Drive

Livonia, MI 48150

Made in Korea
Allergy

Allergy

adults and children 12 years of age and over 1 tablet every 4 to 6hours. Do not take more than 6 tablets in 24 hours. children 6 to under 12 years of age 1/2 tablet (break tablet in half) every 4 to 6 hours.Do not exceed 3 whole tablets in 24 hours. children under 6 years of age do not use this product in children under 6 years of age
Signature Antibacterial...

Signature Antibacterial Foaming Hand

take only by mouth. Doses may be taken as a single daily dose or in divided doses. adults and children 12 years of age and over take 1 to 3 softgels daily. children 2 to under 12 years of age take 1 softgel daily children under 2 years of age ask a doctor
Potrassium Chloride

Potrassium Chloride

To minimize gastrointestinal irritation, patients must follow direction regarding dilution. Each tablespoonful (15mL) should be diluted with three (3) fluid ounce or more of water or other liquid.
Dehydrated Alcohol

Dehydrated Alcohol

The dosage of Dehydrated Alcohol Injection for therapeutic nerve or ganglion block varies from as little as 0.05 to 0.5 mL in trigeminal neuralgia to 0.5 to 1.0 mL per interspace for subarachnoid injections. Doses larger than 1.5 mL are seldom required. All injections should be made slowly and only after all steps have been taken to insure precise placement of the alcohol. A 1.0 mL tuberculin syringe is desirable to facilitate accurate measurement of the dose. Separate needles should be used for injection of successive interspaces or other sites. Since Dehydrated Alcohol Injection is hypobaric as compared to spinal fluid, proper positioning of the patient is essential to control localization of injections into the subarachnoid space.

When lesser concentrations of alcohol are used, larger volumes are usually injected. A dose of 2 mL of 45% alcohol has been used for injecting individual motor nerves, or from 1.5 to 4.0 mL for epidural injection in children with spastic cerebral palsy; 50 mL of 50% alcohol has been used for celiac plexus blockade.

The LD50 oral dose in rats is 13.7 g/kg.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Olanzapine

Olanzapine

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 to 10 mg initially, with a target dose of 10 mg/day within several days. Further dosage adjustments, if indicated, should 4 generally occur at intervals of not less than 1 week, since steady state for olanzapine would not be achieved for approximately 1 week in the typical patient. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 10 to 15 mg/day in clinical trials. However, doses above 10 mg/day were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. An increase to a dose greater than the target dose of 10 mg/day (i.e., to a dose of 15 mg/day or greater) is recommended only after clinical assessment. Olanzapine is not indicated for use in doses above 20 mg/day.

Dosing in Special Populations — The recommended starting dose is 5 mg in patients who are debilitated, who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, who otherwise exhibit a combination of factors that may result in slower metabolism of olanzapine (e.g., nonsmoking female patients ≥65 years of age), or who may be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Maintenance Treatment —The effectiveness of oral olanzapine, 10 mg/day to 20 mg/day, in maintaining treatment response in schizophrenic patients who had been stable on olanzapine for approximately 8 weeks and were then followed for relapse has been demonstrated in a placebo-controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Adolescents

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with schizophrenia was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 12.5 mg/day (mean dose of 11.1 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment — The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been systematically evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder (Manic or Mixed Episodes)

Adults

Dose Selection for Monotherapy — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals, generally beginning with 10 or 15 mg. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 24 hours, reflecting the procedures in the placebo-controlled trials. When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 5 mg QD are recommended.

Short-term (3 to 4 weeks) antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Monotherapy — The benefit of maintaining bipolar I patients on monotherapy with oral olanzapine at a dose of 5 to 20 mg/day, after achieving a responder status for an average duration of 2 weeks, was demonstrated in a controlled trial [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The physician who elects to use olanzapine for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

Dose Selection for Adjunctive Treatment — When administered as adjunctive treatment to lithium or valproate, oral olanzapine dosing should generally begin with 10 mg once-a-day without regard to meals.

Antimanic efficacy was demonstrated in a dose range of 5 mg to 20 mg/day in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. The safety of doses above 20 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Adolescents

Dose Selection — Oral olanzapine should be administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals with a recommended starting dose of 2.5 or 5 mg, with a target dose of 10 mg/day. Efficacy in adolescents with bipolar I disorder (manic or mixed episodes) was demonstrated based on a flexible dose range of 2.5 to 20 mg/day in clinical trials, with a mean modal dose of 10.7 mg/day (mean dose of 8.9 mg/day). When dosage adjustments are necessary, dose increments/decrements of 2.5 or 5 mg are recommended.

The safety and effectiveness of doses above 20 mg/day have not been evaluated in clinical trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Maintenance Treatment — The efficacy of olanzapine for the maintenance treatment of bipolar I disorder in the adolescent population has not been evaluated; however, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of olanzapine pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and adolescent patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.5 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adults

Oral olanzapine should be administered in combination with fluoxetine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg and fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination in adult patients with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Dosage and Administration information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine tablets. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of olanzapine and fluoxetine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.

Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyaxa and the Combination of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine
Use in Combination
For Symbyax

(mg/day)

Olanzapine

(mg/day)

Fluoxetine

(mg/day)
3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 5 20 12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 20 6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 5 40+10 12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine 10+2.5 40+10
a Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine.

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that bipolar I disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Olanzapine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with bipolar I disorder.

2.7 Olanzapine and Fluoxetine in Combination: Dosing in Special Populations

The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modification may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients under < 10 years of age. [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Drug Interactions (7), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Natural Fiber Therapy N...

Natural Fiber Therapy Natural Laxative Natural Laxative

Other information
each teaspoon contains: potassium 30 mg; sodium 5 mg store below 30ºC (86ºF) protect contents from humidity. Keep tightly closed
Calamine

Calamine

• shake well before using • apply as needed
Natural Fiber Therapy N...

Natural Fiber Therapy Natural Laxative Natural Laxative

Other information
each teaspoon contains: potassium 30 mg; sodium 5 mg Phenylketonurics: phenylalanine 25 mg store below 30ºC (86ºC) protect contents from humidity keep tightly closed
Saline Laxative Enema

Saline Laxative Enema

Do not use more unless directed by a doctor. See Warnings.
adults & children 12 years and over one bottle once daily children 2 to under 12 years ½ bottle once daily children under 2 years do not use
Dermasarra

Dermasarra

• for maximum effectiveness, never dilute or drink fluids of any kind immediately before or after taking this product • adults and children 12 years of age and over: one or two tablespoons • children 2 to under 12: one or two teaspoons • repeat dose every 15 minutes or until distress subsides • do not take more than 5 doses in 1 hour without consulting a doctor
Tizanidine

Tizanidine

2.1 Dosing Information

Tizanidine tablets may be prescribed with or without food. Once the formulation has been selected and the decision to take with or without food has been made, this regimen should not be altered.

Food has complex effects on tizanidine pharmacokinetics, which differ with the different formulations. Tizanidine capsules and tizanidine tablets are bioequivalent to each other under fasting conditions (more than 3 hours after a meal), but not under fed conditions (within 30 minutes of a meal). These pharmacokinetic differences may result in clinically significant differences when switching administration of tablet and capsules and when switching administration between the fed or fasted state. These changes may result in increased adverse events, or delayed or more rapid onset of activity, depending upon the nature of the switch. For this reason, the prescriber should be thoroughly familiar with the changes in kinetics associated with these different conditions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

The recommended starting dose is 2 mg. Because the effect of tizanidine peaks at approximately 1 to 2 hours post-dose and dissipates between 3 to 6 hours post-dose, treatment can be repeated at 6 to 8 hour intervals, as needed, to a maximum of three doses in 24 hours.

Dosage can be gradually increased by 2 mg to 4 mg at each dose, with 1 to 4 days between dosage increases, until a satisfactory reduction of muscle tone is achieved. The total daily dose should not exceed 36 mg. Single doses greater than 16 mg have not been studied.

2.2 Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment

Tizanidine should be used with caution in patients with renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance < 25 mL/min), as clearance is reduced by more than 50%. In these patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7)].

2.3 Dosing in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Tizanidine should be used with caution in patients with any hepatic impairment. In these patients, during titration, the individual doses should be reduced. If higher doses are required, individual doses rather than dosing frequency should be increased. Monitoring of aminotransferase levels is recommended for baseline and 1 month after maximum dose is achieved, or if hepatic injury is suspected [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.4 Drug Discontinuation

If therapy needs to be discontinued, particularly in patients who have been receiving high doses (20 mg to 36 mg daily) for long periods (9 weeks or more) or who may be on concomitant treatment with narcotics, the dose should be decreased slowly (2 mg to 4 mg per day) to minimize the risk of withdrawal and rebound hypertension, tachycardia, and hypertonia [see Drug Abuse and Dependence (9.3)].
Ropinirole Hydrochlorid...

Ropinirole Hydrochloride

General Dosing Considerations for Parkinson's Disease and RLS Ropinirole Tablets can be taken with or without food. Patients may be advised that taking Ropinirole Tablets with food may reduce the occurrence of nausea. However, this has not been established in controlled clinical trials. If a significant interruption in therapy with Ropinirole Tablets has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.Geriatric Use Pharmacokinetic studies demonstrated a reduced clearance of ropinirole in the elderly (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Dose adjustment is not necessary since the dose is individually titrated to clinical response.Renal Impairment The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole were not altered in patients with moderate renal impairment (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Therefore, no dosage adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment. The use of Ropinirole Tablets in patients with severe renal impairment has not been studied.Hepatic Impairment The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole have not been studied in patients with hepatic impairment. Since patients with hepatic impairment may have higher plasma levels and lower clearance, Ropinirole Tablets should be titrated with caution in these patients.Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level and gradually titrated to therapeutic response. The dosage should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of nausea, dizziness, somnolence, and dyskinesia.The recommended starting dose for Parkinson’s disease is 0.25 mg 3 times daily. Based on individual patient response, dosage should then be titrated with weekly increments as described in Table 5. After week 4, if necessary, daily dosage may be increased by 1.5 mg/day on a weekly basis up to a dose of 9 mg/day, and then by up to 3 mg/day weekly to a total dose of 24 mg/day. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been tested in clinical trials.Table 5. Ascending-Dose Schedule of Ropinirole Tablets for Parkinson’s Disease
Week Dosage Total Daily Dose 1 0.25 mg 3 times daily 0.75 mg 2 0.5 mg 3 times daily 1.5 mg 3 0.75 mg 3 times daily 2.25 mg 4 1 mg 3 times daily 3 mg
When Ropinirole Tablets are administered as adjunct therapy to L-dopa, the concurrent dose of L-dopa may be decreased gradually as tolerated. L-dopa dosage reduction was allowed during the advanced Parkinson’s disease (with L-dopa) study if dyskinesias or other dopaminergic effects occurred. Overall, reduction of L-dopa dose was sustained in 87% of patients treated with Ropinirole Tablets and in 57% of patients on placebo. On average the L-dopa dose was reduced by 31% in patients treated with Ropinirole Tablets.Ropinirole Tablets for Parkinson’s disease patients should be discontinued gradually over a 7-day period. The frequency of administration should be reduced from 3 times daily to twice daily for 4 days. For the remaining 3 days, the frequency should be reduced to once daily prior to complete withdrawal of Ropinirole Tablets.Dosing for Restless Legs Syndrome In all clinical trials, the dose for Ropinirole Tablets was initiated at 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. Patients were titrated based on clinical response and tolerability. The recommended adult starting dosage for RLS is 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. After 2 days, the dosage can be increased to 0.5 mg once daily and to 1 mg once daily at the end of the first week of dosing, then as shown in Table 6 as needed to achieve efficacy. For RLS, the safety and effectiveness of doses greater than 4 mg once daily have not been established. Table 6. Dose Titration Schedule for RLS
Day/Week Dosage to be taken once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime Days 1 and 2 0.25 mg Days 3-7 0.5 mg Week 2 1 mg Week 3 1.5 mg Week 4 2 mg Week 5 2.5 mg Week 6 3 mg Week 7 4 mg
In clinical trials of patients being treated for RLS with doses up to 4 mg once daily, Ropinirole Tablets were discontinued without a taper.
Tramadol Hydrochloride

Tramadol Hydrochloride

Adults (17 years of age and over)

For patients with moderate to moderately severe chronic pain not requiring rapid onset of analgesic effect, the tolerability of tramadol hydrochloride tablets can be improved by initiating therapy with a titration regimen: The total daily dose may be increased by 50 mg as tolerated every 3 days to reach 200 mg/day (50 mg q.i.d.). After titration, tramadol hydrochloride tablets 50 to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every 4 to 6 hours not to exceed 400 mg.day.

For the subset of patients for whom rapid onset of analgesic effect is required and for whom the benefits outweigh the risk of discontinuation due to adverse events associated with higher initial doses, tramadol hydrochloride tablets 50 mg to 100 mg can be administered as needed for pain relief every four to six hours, not to exceed 400 mg per day.

Individualization of Dose

Good pain management practice dictates that the dose be individualized according to patient need using the lowest beneficial dose. Studies with tramadol in adults have shown that starting at the lowest possible dose and titrating upward will result in fewer discontinuations and increased tolerability.
In all patients with creatinine clearance less than 30 mL/min, it is recommended that the dosing interval of tramadol hydrochloride tablets be increased to 12 hours, with a maximum daily dose of 200 mg. Since only 7% of an administered dose is removed by hemodialysis, dialysis patients can receive their regular dose on the day of dialysis. The recommended dose for adult patients with cirrhosis is 50 mg every 12 hours. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient over 65 years old should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting the greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal or cardiac function and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. For elderly patients over 75 years old, total dose should not exceed 300 mg/day.
Levofloxacin

Levofloxacin

do not take more than directed the smallest effective dose should be used adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 tablet every 4 to 6 hours while symptoms persist if pain or fever does not respond to 1 tablet, 2 tablets may be used do not exceed 6 tablets in 24 hours, unless directed by a doctor children under 12 years: ask a doctor
Glipizide

Glipizide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glipizide or any other hypoglycemic agent. In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient’s blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood-glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of glipizide may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

In general, glipizide should be given approximately 30 minutes before a meal to achieve the greatest reduction in postprandial hyperglycemia.

Initial Dose

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg, given before breakfast. Geriatric patients or those with liver disease may be started on 2.5 mg.

Titration

Dosage adjustments should ordinarily be in increments of 2.5 to 5 mg, as determined by blood glucose response. At least several days should elapse between titration steps. If response to a single dose is not satisfactory, dividing that dose may prove effective. The maximum recommended once daily dose is 15 mg. Doses above 15 mg should ordinarily be divided and given before meals of adequate caloric content. The maximum recommended total daily dose is 40 mg.

Maintenance

Some patients may be effectively controlled on a once-a-day regimen, while others show better response with divided dosing. Total daily doses above 15 mg should ordinarily be divided. Total daily doses above 30 mg have been safely given on a b.i.d. basis to long-term patients.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS section).

Patients Receiving Insulin

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, many stable non-insulin-dependent diabetic patients receiving insulin may be safely placed on glipizide. When transferring patients from insulin to glipizide, the following general guidelines should be considered:
For patients whose daily insulin requirement is 20 units or less, insulin may be discontinued and glipizide therapy may begin at usual dosages. Several days should elapse between glipizide titration steps. For patients whose daily insulin requirement is greater than 20 units, the insulin dose should be reduced by 50% and glipizide therapy may begin at usual dosages. Subsequent reductions in insulin dosage should depend on individual patient response. Several days should elapse between glipizide titration steps.
During the insulin withdrawal period, the patient should test urine samples for sugar and ketone bodies at least three times daily. Patients should be instructed to contact the prescriber immediately if these tests are abnormal. In some cases, especially when patient has been receiving greater than 40 units of insulin daily, it may be advisable to consider hospitalization during the transition period.

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, no transition period is necessary when transferring patients to glipizide. Patients should be observed carefully (1 to 2 weeks) for hypoglycemia when being transferred from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) to glipizide due to potential overlapping of drug effect.
Aspirin Thin Coated

Aspirin Thin Coated

drink a full glass of water with each dose adults and children 12 years and over: take 1 to 2 tablets every 4 hours or 3 tablets every 6 hours, not to exceed 12 tablets in 24 hours. children under 12 years: consult a doctor
Peg 3350

Peg 3350

Directions for Bottle(s) Only
• do not take more than directed unless advised by your doctor • the bottle top is a measuring cap marked to contain 17 grams of powder when filled to the indicated line (white section in cap) • adults and children 17 years of age and older: • fill to top of white section in cap which is marked to indicate the correct dose (17 g) • stir and dissolve in any 4 to 8 ounces of beverage (cold, hot or room temperature) then drink • use once a day • use no more than 7 days • children 16 years of age or under: ask a doctor
Oral Pain Relief Anesth...

Oral Pain Relief Anesthetic Anesthetic

Cut open tip of tube.

Adults and children 2 years of age and older, apply to affected area up to 4 times daily or as directed by a dentist or doctor.

Children under 12 years of age should be supervised in the use of the product.

Children under 2 years of age, consult a doctor.

Major Pharmaceuticals

Manufacturer Details

Share This Page

Major Pharmaceuticals Drugs